2016 Volvo XC60 Owner's Manual

WEB EDITION OWNER'S MANUAL

WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe you may be affected by alcohol, medication or driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed any impairment that could hinder your ability to with your safety and comfort in mind. We encour- drive. age you to familiarize yourself with the equipment Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable fed- descriptions and operating instructions in this eral safety and emission standards. If you have manual. any questions regarding your vehicle, please con- We also urge you and your passengers to wear tact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contact- seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. ing Volvo" for information on getting in touch with And, of course, please do not operate a vehicle if Volvo in the United States and Canada. Contents

01 Introduction 02 Safety On-board owner's manual...... 11 Occupant safety...... 26 Top tether anchors...... 56 Owner's information...... 13 Recall information...... 26 Integrated booster cushion – general Contacting Volvo...... 13 Reporting safety defects...... 27 information...... 57 About this manual...... 14 Seat belts – general...... 28 Integrated booster cushion – using...... 59 Change of ownership...... 18 Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling...... 29 Integrated booster cushion – stowing...... 60 Crash event data...... 18 Seat belt reminder...... 30 Child safety locks...... 61 Volvo Structural Parts Statement...... 19 Seat belts – pregnancy...... 30 Information on the Internet...... 20 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)..... 31 Volvo ID...... 21 Front airbags...... 32 Open Source Software Notice...... 21 Occupant Weight Sensor...... 36 Volvo and the environment...... 22 Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags...... 39 Important warnings...... 23 Inflatable Curtain (IC)...... 41 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)...... 42 Technician certification...... 24 Rollover Protection System (ROPS)...... 44 01 Crash02 mode – general information...... 44 02 Crash mode – starting the vehicle...... 45 Crash mode – moving the vehicle...... 45 Child safety...... 46 Child restraints...... 47 Infant seats...... 49 Convertible seats...... 51 Booster cushions...... 54 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors...... 55

2 Contents

03 Instruments and controls Instrument overview ...... 64 Tunnel detection (models with the rain Digital compass*...... 105 Information displays – introduction...... 68 sensor* only)...... 92 Panoramic roof* – introduction...... 106 Eco Guide* and Power Meter*...... 71 Active Bending Lights (ABL)*...... 92 Panoramic roof* – operation...... 107 Auxiliary lights*...... 93 Information displays – indicator symbols. 72 HomeLink® Wireless Control System* – Information displays – warning symbols... 74 Instrument and "theater" lighting...... 93 introduction...... 109 ® My Car – introduction...... 76 Parking lights...... 93 HomeLink Wireless Control System* – programming...... 110 Information displays – ambient tempera- Rear fog lights...... 94 ture sensor...... 77 Hazard warning flashers...... 94 Volvo Sensus...... 112 Information displays – trip odometer and Turn signals...... 95 Information display – menu controls...... 113 clock...... 78 Front interior lighting...... 96 Information display – menu overview..... 114 Inserting/removing remote key...... 78 Rear interior lighting...... 97 Information display – messages...... 114 Ignition modes...... 79 Home safe lighting...... 97 Trip computer – introduction ...... 115 Front seats...... 80 Approach lighting...... 97 Trip computer – functions, analog instrument panel...... 117 Front seats – folding backrest*...... 81 Windshield wipers...... 98 Front seats – power seat...... 81 Trip computer – functions, digital instru- 03 Rain sensor*...... 03 98 ment 03panel...... 120 Key memory – power driver's seat* and Windshield washer...... 99 door mirrors...... 83 Trip computer – Supplementary informa- Tailgate wiper/washer...... 100 tion...... 122 Rear seats – head restraints...... 84 Power windows...... 100 Trip computer – Trip statistics...... 123 Rear seats – folding backrest...... 86 Power door mirrors...... 102 Steering wheel...... 87 Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/ Electrically heated* steering wheel...... 88 retraction...... 103 Lighting panel...... 89 Heated windshield*, rear window and High/low beam headlights...... 90 door mirror defrosters...... 104 Active high beams (AHB)*...... 90 Interior rearview mirror...... 104

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 Contents

04 Climate 05 Loading and storage 06 Locks and alarm Climate – general information...... 125 Storage spaces...... 138 Remote key and key blade...... 150 Climate – sensors...... 125 Tunnel console...... 140 Remote key – loss...... 150 Air quality...... 126 Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets...... 140 Key memory...... 151 Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)*...... 126 Glove compartment...... 141 Locking/unlocking confirmation...... 151 Climate – menu settings...... 127 Vanity mirror...... 141 Immobilizer (start inhibitor)...... 152 Air distribution – general...... 127 12-volt socket in the cargo area*...... 141 Remote key – functions...... 153 Electronic climate control (ECC)...... 129 Loading – general...... 142 Remote key – range...... 154 Heated seats...... 130 Loading – roof load carriers...... 142 Detachable key blade – general informa- Temperature and blower control...... 131 Load anchoring eyelets...... 143 tion...... 155 Automatic climate control...... 131 Grocery bag holder...... 144 Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting...... 155 Air conditioning...... 132 Cargo net – general information...... 144 Detachable key blade – unlocking...... 156 Max. defroster and electrically heated Cargo net – mounting/removing...... 145 Private locking...... 156 windshield*...... 132 Cargo area cover...... 147 Remote key – replacing the battery...... 157 Air distribution – function...... 133 Steel cargo grid...... 147 Air 04distribution – recirculation...... 134 05 Keyless06 drive*– locking/unlocking...... 159 Air distribution – table...... 135 Keyless drive* – unlocking with key blade...... 160 Keyless drive* – key memory...... 160 Keyless drive* – messages...... 161 Keyless drive* – antenna locations...... 162 Locking/unlocking – from the outside..... 163 Manual locking...... 164 Locking/unlocking – from inside...... 164 Locking/unlocking – glove compartment 165

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

07 Driver support Locking/unlocking – tailgate...... 166 Active chassis* (Four C)...... 174 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue Power tailgate – automatic opening/clos- Stability system – introduction...... 174 Assist...... 191 ing...... 167 Stability system – operation...... 175 Radar sensor...... 193 Power tailgate – programming...... 168 Stability system – symbols and mes- Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations...... 193 Power tailgate – interruption...... 168 sages...... 177 Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and Power tailgate – manual opening/closing 169 Adjustable steering force*...... 179 messages...... 195 Alarm – general information...... 169 Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc- Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting...... 197 Alarm indicator...... 170 tion...... 179 Distance Alert – introduction...... 198 Alarm – arming/disarming...... 170 Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 180 Distance Alert – operation...... 198 Alarm signal...... 171 Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations 180 Distance Alert – limitations...... 199 Alarm – turning off...... 171 Cruise control (CC) – introduction...... 181 Distance Alert – symbols and messages 201 Alarm-related functions...... 171 Cruise control (CC) – engaging and setting speed...... 181 City Safety – introduction...... 202 Toggling between ACC and CC (stand- City Safety – function...... 203 ard Cruise Control)...... 183 City Safety – operation...... 204 06 Cruise07 control (CC) – deactivating...... 183 City Safety07 – limitations...... 204 Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction... 184 City Safety – troubleshooting...... 205 Adaptive Cruise Control – function...... 185 City Safety – symbols and messages..... 207 Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging...... 187 City Safety – Laser sensor...... 208 Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed 188 Collision warning – introduction...... 209 Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time Collision warning* – function...... 211 interval...... 189 Collision warning* – operation...... 212 Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating.. 189 Collision warning* – Cyclist detection..... 213 Adaptive Cruise Control – passing another vehicle...... 191 Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection...... 214

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5 Contents

08 Starting and driving Collision warning* – limitations...... 215 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- Starting the engine...... 247 The camera’s limitations...... 217 duction...... 236 Switching off the engine...... 249 Collision warning – troubleshooting...... 218 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – func- Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction...... 237 Collision warning – symbols and mes- tion...... 249 sages...... 220 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the tion...... 237 Driver Alert System...... 222 engine...... 250 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – guiding Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction 222 Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching and marker lines...... 239 off the engine...... 250 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation.... 223 Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- Jump starting...... 251 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function...... 223 tions...... 240 Transmission – general information...... 252 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations... 224 BLIS* – introduction...... 240 Transmission – positions...... 252 Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and BLIS* – function...... 241 Transmission – Geartronic...... 254 messages...... 225 BLIS* – operation...... 242 Transmission – shiftlock override...... 256 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)...... 243 duction...... 227 Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA)...... 257 BLIS* – limitations...... 244 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – opera- Start/Stop – introduction...... 257 BLIS* – messages...... 245 tion...... 07 227 07 Start/Stop08 – function...... 257 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions...... 258 tions...... 229 Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions...... 259 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages...... 230 Start/Stop – settings...... 260 Park assist – introduction...... 232 Start/Stop – symbols and messages...... 261 Park assist – function...... 232 ECO*...... 262 Park assist – operation...... 234 All Wheel Drive (AWD)...... 264 Park assist – limitations...... 235 Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction...... 264 Park assist – troubleshooting...... 236 Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation.. 265

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

09 Wheels and tires Brakes – general...... 266 Towing the vehicle...... 285 Tires – general information...... 289 Brakes – symbols ...... 268 Towing eyelet...... 285 Tires – storage and age...... 290 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)...... 268 Towing by tow truck...... 286 Tires – tread wear indicator...... 291 Brake lights...... 268 Tires – tire economy...... 291 Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA)...... 269 Changing a wheel – direction of rotation 292 Parking brake – general information...... 269 Changing a wheel – removing wheel...... 292 Parking brake – applying...... 270 Changing a wheel – spare wheel...... 295 Parking brake – releasing...... 271 Changing a wheel – accessing the spare Parking brake – symbols and messages 272 wheel...... 296 Driving through water...... 273 Changing a wheel – installing a wheel.... 296 Engine and cooling system...... 274 Tire inflation – general information...... 297 Conserving electrical current...... 274 Tire inflation – checking pressure...... 298 Before a long distance trip...... 274 Tire specifications...... 299 Driving in cold weather...... 275 Tire inflation – pressure table...... 301 Refueling08 – fuel requirements...... 276 08 Loading09 specifications...... 302 Refueling – octane rating...... 277 Loading specifications – load limit...... 302 Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler Tire specifications – terminology...... 303 door...... 278 Tire specifications – Uniform Tire Quality Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap...... 279 Grading...... 304 Emission controls...... 280 Snow chains...... 305 Economical driving...... 280 Snow tires/studded tires...... 306 Towing a trailer...... 282 Tire pressure monitoring - introduction.. 306 Detachable trailer hitch...... 283 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – general information...... 307 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)...... 284

7 Contents

10 Maintenance and servicing Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – introduction...... 323 Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting...... 342 – changing wheels...... 308 Maintenance – owner maintenance...... 324 Bulbs – specifications...... 342 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – hoisting...... 325 Wiper blades – service position...... 343 – recalibrating...... 309 Onboard Diagnostic System...... 326 Wiper blades – windshield...... 344 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – activating/deactivating...... 309 Booking service and repairs ...... 326 Wiper blades – tailgate...... 345 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Maintenance – opening/closing hood..... 328 Engine compartment – washer fluid...... 345 – messages...... 310 Engine compartment – overview...... 329 Battery – symbols...... 346 Tire Monitor - introduction...... 311 Engine compartment – engine oil...... 330 Battery – handling...... 346 Calibrating Tire Monitor...... 311 Engine compartment – coolant...... 332 Battery – maintenance...... 347 Tire Monitor status information...... 312 Engine compartment – brake fluid...... 333 Battery – changing...... 348 Tire Monitor – messages...... 313 Engine compartment – power steering Fuses – introduction...... 349 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)...... 314 fluid...... 334 Fuses – engine compartment...... 351 Tire sealing system* – general informa- Bulbs – introduction...... 335 Fuses – glove compartment...... 355 tion...... 314 Bulbs – headlight housing...... 336 Fuses – cargo area/trunk...... 358 Tire sealing system* – overview...... 316 09 Bulbs –10 cover...... 337 Fuses –10 engine compartment cold zone Tire sealing system* – sealing hole...... 317 Bulbs – low beam, Halogen...... 338 (Start/Stop only)...... 359 Tire sealing system – checking inflation Bulbs – high beam, Halogen...... 338 Washing the car...... 361 pressure...... 319 Bulbs – extra high beam...... 339 Automatic car wash...... 362 Tire sealing system* – inflating tires...... 320 Bulbs – front turn signals...... 339 Polishing and waxing...... 362 Tire sealing system* – sealing compound container...... 321 Bulbs – rear fog lights...... 340 Cleaning the interior...... 363 Bulbs – location of taillight bulbs...... 340 Touching up paintwork...... 365 Bulbs – brake lights and taillights...... 341 Bulbs – license plate lighting...... 341 Bulbs – cargo area lighting...... 341

8 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. Contents

11 Specifications 12 Index Label information...... 368 Index...... 386 Dimensions...... 371 Weights...... 374 Engine specifications...... 376 Oil specifications...... 377 Oil volume...... 378 Coolant – specification and volume...... 379 Transmission oil – specification and volumes...... 379 Brake fluid – specification and volume... 379 Power steering – specification...... 380 Fuel tank volume – specification and volume...... 380 Air conditioning – specification and volume...... 380 Battery specifications...... 11 381 12 Symbols – general information...... 382 Warning symbols...... 382 Indicator symbols...... 383 Information symbols...... 384 Information symbols – ceiling console.... 385 Information symbols – center console.... 385

9 INTRODUCTION 01 Introduction

On-board owner's manual • Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov- Searching for information 01 The owner's manual can be displayed on the ering commonly used functions. center console screen and you can carry out Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor- searches for the information that you require. ner for additional information about the on- board owner's manual. To open the owner's manual, press the MY CAR button on the center console, press OK/ NOTE MENU and select Owner's manual. The on-board owner's manual cannot For basic information, see "Infotainment - • be accessed while the vehicle is mov- operating the system." The following sections ing. also provide more detailed information. • Specifications regarding your vehicle are not found in the on-board information. This information is listed in the Searching using the text wheel printed owner's manual. List of characters

Switching between character entry modes (see the following table) Surf history Use the text wheel to enter a web address. 1. Turn TUNE to the desired letter and press OK/MENU to confirm. The number/letter keys on the center console can also be The on-board owner's manual start page used. There are four ways of finding information articles in the on-board owner's manual: 2. Continue to the next letter, etc. The results of the search will be displayed in • Searching: search for an article. the phone book. • Categories: All of the articles are sorted by category. • Favorites: Quick access to frequently read articles.

}} 11 01 Introduction

|| 01 3. To switch from letter entry mode to the Press EXIT briefly to erase a single character. Quick Guide entry mode for numbers or special char- Press and hold EXIT to erase all characters. This is a selection of articles that will help you acters, or to go view surf history, turn Pressing a number key on the center console become familiar with some of the vehicle's TUNE to one of the selections (see the while the text wheel is displayed (see the pre- most common functions. These articles can explanation in the following table) in the vious illustration) will display a list of charac- also be found in their respective categories list for switching character entry mode (2) ters. Press the desired key repeatedly to but are listed here for quick access. and press OK/MENU. enter the desired letter and continue to the Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide next letter, etc. and press OK/MENU to open an article. 123/A Toggle between letters and num- Press EXIT to return to the previous view. BC bers by pressing OK/MENU. To enter a number, press and hold the button. Navigating in an article => This leads to surf history. Turn TUNE to select a web address Categories and press OK/MENU to go to the The articles in the on-board owner's manual website. are divided into main categories and sub-categories. The same article may be listed in Go Go to the website by pressing several applicable categories to help make OK/MENU. searches easier.

a|A Toggle between upper and lower Turn TUNE to navigate in the category struc- case letters by pressing OK/ ture and press OK/MENU to open a category MENU. (indicated by the symbol) or an article (indicated by the symbol). Press EXIT to | Switch from the text wheel to the | } return to the previous view. Address: field. Use TUNE to Home move the cursor and erase char- Favorites : Returns you to the owner's manual start page. acters by pressing EXIT. Press Articles that have been marked as favorites OK/MENU to return to the text can be found here. For information about Favorites: Add/remove an article from wheel. marking an article as a favorite, see "Navigat- the list of favorites. This can also be done by pressing the FAV button on the center The number/letter keys on the ing in an article" below. console keypad. center console can also be used Turn TUNE to navigate in the list of favorites to edit the Address: field. and press OK/MENU to open an article. Highlighted link: takes you to the linked Press EXIT to return to the previous view. article. Important information: if the article contains warnings, cautions or notes, sym-

12 01 Introduction

bols for these types of information and Owner's information Contacting Volvo 01 the number of such texts in the article will Your vehicle is equipped with a screen on be displayed here. which you can display information about your In the USA: Turn TUNE to navigate among the links or vehicle's features and functions. The printed Volvo Cars of North America, LLC scroll in an article. When you have scrolled to owner's manual supplements the on-board Customer Care Center the beginning/end of an article, you can information and contains important texts, the return to the start page or a favorite by scroll- latest updates and instructions that can be 1 Volvo Drive, ing one additional step up/down. Press OK/ useful in situations when it is not practical to P.O. Box 914 MENU to activate a selection or highlighted read the information on the screen. link. Press EXIT to return to the previous Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 Changing the language used for the on-board view. information could mean that some of the 1-800-458-1552 Related information information displayed may not comply with www.volvocars.com/us • Information on the Internet (p. 20) national or local statutes and regulations. In Canada: WARNING Volvo Cars of Canada The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and for National Customer Service complying with current statutes and regu- 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 lations. It is also essential to maintain and service Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 the vehicle according to Volvo's recom- 1-800-663-8255 mendations as stated in the owner's information and the service and warranty book- www.volvocars.com/ca let. Related information If the on-board information differs from the About this manual (p. 14) printed owner's manual, the printed infor- • mation always takes precedence. • Important warnings (p. 23) • Crash event data (p. 18) • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19)

13 01 Introduction

01 About this manual • Favorites: Quick access to frequently NOTE Reading your owner's manual is a good way read articles. The owner's manual mobile app can be to familiarize yourself with the features and • Quick Guide: A selection of articles cov- downloaded at www.volvocars.com. systems in your vehicle. ering commonly used functions. The mobile app also contains videos and • Before you operate your vehicle for the Select the symbol in the lower right-hand cor- searchable content, and provides easy first time, we recommend that you look ner for additional information about the on- navigation between the various articles. through the information found in the board owner's manual. chapters "Your Driving Environment" and Footnotes NOTE "During Your Trip." Certain pages of this manual contain informa- • Information contained in the balance of • The on-board owner's manual cannot tion in the form of footnotes at the bottom of the manual is extremely useful and should be accessed while the vehicle is mov- the page. This information supplements the be read after operating the vehicle for the ing. text that the footnote number refers to (a let- first time. • Specifications regarding your vehicle ter is used if the footnote refers to text in a • The manual is structured so that it can be are not found in the on-board informa- table). used for reference. For this reason, it tion. This information is listed in the should be kept in the vehicle for ready printed owner's manual. Display texts access. There are several displays in the driver’s field of vision that show messages generated by On-board owner's manual The owner's manual in mobile devices various systems and functions in the vehicle. When the printed manual refers to the on- These texts are indicated in the Owner’s board owner's manual, this pertains to the Manual by being in slightly larger type than information displayed on the center console the surrounding text and are printed in gray, screen. (for example: Change doors unlock The language used on the center console setting). screen and instrument panel can be changed Decals in the MY CAR system settings menu. There are various types of decals in the vehi- There are four ways of finding information cle whose purpose is to provide important articles in the on-board owner's manual: information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as • Searching: search for an article. follows, in descending order of importance. • Categories: All of the articles are sorted by category.

14 01 Introduction

Risk of injury Risk of damage to the vehicle Information 01 G031592 G031593 G031590

Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning back- White ISO symbols and white text/image on a White ISO symbols and white text/image on a ground, white text/image on a black back- black or blue warning background and space black background. These decals provide gen- ground. Decals of this type are used to indi- for a message. If the information on decals of eral information. cate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle this type could result in serious injury or could result. NOTE death. The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle.

}} 15 01 Introduction

|| 01 Types of lists used in the owner's Bullet lists NOTE information Bullets are used to differentiate a number of • Do not export your Volvo to another Procedures components/functions/points of information that can be listed in random order. country before investigating that coun- Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or try's applicable safety and exhaust actions that must be carried out in a certain For example: emission requirements. In some cases order, are arranged in numbered lists in this • Coolant it may be difficult or impossible to manual. comply with these requirements. Mod- • Engine oil ifications to the emission control sys- If there is a series of illustrations associ- Continues on next page tem(s) may render your Volvo not certi- ated with step-by-step instructions, each fiable for legal operation in the U.S., step in the procedure is numbered in the } }This symbol can be found at the lower Canada and other countries. same way as the corresponding illustra- right corner to indicate that the current topic tion. continues on the following page. • All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are Lists in which letters are used can be Continuation from previous page based on the latest product informa- found with series of illustrations in cases This symbol can be found at the upper left tion available at the time of publica- where the order in which the instructions || corner to indicate that the current topic is a tion. Please note that some vehicles are carried out is not important. continuation from the previous page. may be equipped differently, depend- Arrows with or without numbers are used ing on special legal requirements. to indicate the direction of a movement. Options and accessories Optional equipment described in this Optional or accessory equipment described manual may not be available in all mar- Arrows containing letters are used to indi- kets. cate movement. in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Some of the illustrations shown are Optional or accessory equipment may not be • If there are no illustrations associated with a generic and may not depict the exact available in all countries or markets. Please step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure model for which this manual is are indicated by ordinary numbers. note that some vehicles may be equipped dif- intended. ferently, depending on special legal require- Position lists ments. • Volvo reserves the right to make model Red circles containing a number are used changes at any time, or to change in general overview illustrations in which Contact your Volvo retailer for additional specifications or design without notice certain components are pointed out. The information. and without incurring obligation. corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components.

16 01 Introduction

01 WARNING ignition must be in mode II (p. 79) or the tion in the U.S., Canada and other coun- engine must be running. Depress the brake tries. If your vehicle is involved in an accident, pedal, press the button on the front side of • All information, illustrations and specifica- unseen damage may affect its drivability the gear selector and move the selector from and safety. tions contained in this manual are based P (Park). on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note WARNING Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) that some vehicles may be equipped dif- The ABS system performs a brief self-diag- ferently, depending on special legal CALIFORNIA proposition 65 nostic test when the engine has been started requirements. Optional equipment descri- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and driver releases the brake pedal. Another bed in this manual may not be available in and certain vehicle components contain or automatic test may be performed when the all markets. emit chemicals known to the state of Cali- vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately fornia to cause cancer, and birth defects • Some of the illustrations shown are 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate generic and may not depict the exact or other reproductive harm. In addition, several times and a sound may be audible certain fluids contained in vehicles and model for which this manual is intended. from the ABS control module. This is normal. certain products of component wear con- • Volvo reserves the right to make model tain or emit chemicals known to the State Fuel filler door changes at any time, or to change speci- of California to cause cancer, and birth fications or design without notice and defects or other reproductive harm. Press the button on the light switch panel (see the illustration in Refueling – opening/ without incurring obligation. closing fuel filler door (p. 278)) when the vehi- Related information WARNING cle is at a standstill to unlock the fuel filler • Information on the Internet (p. 20) door. It will relock when closed and there will Certain components of this vehicle such as • Volvo and the environment (p. 22) air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, be an audible click. adaptive steering columns, and button cell • Important warnings (p. 23) batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Points to keep in mind Special handling may apply for service or • Do not export your Volvo to another vehicle end of life disposal. country before investigating that coun- See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ try's applicable safety and exhaust emis- perchlorate. sion requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the Shiftlock emission control system(s) may render When your vehicle is parked, the gear selec- your Volvo not certifiable for legal operator is locked in the P (Park) position. To release the selector from this position, the

17 01 Introduction

01 Change of ownership Crash event data NOTE When the vehicle changes owners, all per- This vehicle is equipped with an event data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle sonal settings should be reset to the factory recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; defaults. is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like no data are recorded by the EDR under situations, such as an air bag deployment or normal driving conditions and no personal To reset, press the MY CAR button in the hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash center console followed by OK/MENU and understanding how a vehicle's systems per- location) are recorded. However, other select Settings Reset to factory settings. formed. The EDR is designed to record data parties, such as law enforcement, could related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- combine the EDR data with the type of User data e.g., for apps, the web browser personally identifying data routinely tems for a short period of time, typically 30 and for personal settings in menus such as acquired during a crash investigation. the climate system and vehicle settings seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is should be reset to factory defaults. designed to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, special For vehicles equipped with the optional Volvo • How various systems in your vehicle were equipment is required, and access to the On Call with Sensus Connect (VOC), personal operating; vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to settings stored in the vehicle should be • Whether or not the driver and passenger the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such deleted, see Changing ownership of a vehicle safety belts were buckled/fastened; as law enforcement, that have the special with Volvo On Call. • How far (if at all) the driver was depress- equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Related information ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • Volvo ID (p. 21) Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a • How fast the vehicle was traveling. number of computers whose task is to con- These data can help provide a better under- tinuously control and monitor the vehicle’s standing of the circumstances in which operation. They can also register information crashes and injuries occur. during normal driving conditions if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and functionality. Some of the stored information is required by technicians when carrying out service and maintenance to enable them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. This information may be stored in the vehicle’s computers for a certain period of time.

18 01 Introduction

Volvo will not contribute to spreading the Volvo Cars of Canada Volvo Structural Parts Statement 01 above-mentioned information to third parties National Customer Service Volvo has always been and continues to be a without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. leader in automotive safety. However, due to national legal requirements 9130 Leslie Street and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles provide information of this type to authorities designed to help protect vehicle occupants in such as law enforcement agencies or others 1-800-663-8255 the event of a collision. who may assert a legal right to obtain such www.volvocars.com/ca Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of information. a collision. This energy absorption system Related information Volvo and service and repair facilities with including, but not limited to, structural com- Information on the Internet (p. 20) agreements with Volvo have access to the • ponents such as bumper reinforcement bars, special technical equipment required in order • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, to read and interpret the information stored fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsi- panels must work together to maintain cabin ble for ensuring that the information transmit- integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. ted to Volvo during service and maintenance The supplemental restraint system including is stored and handled in a secure manner and but not limited to air bags, side curtain air that this handling is done in accordance with bags, and deployment sensors work together applicable legal requirements. For additional with the above components to provide proper information, contact: timing for air bag deployment. For additional information, contact: Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North Amer- In the United States ica does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Volvo parts for collision repair. Customer Care Center In addition Volvo does not support the use or 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 re-use of structural components from an Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 existing vehicle that has been previously damaged. Although these parts may appear 1-800-458-1552 equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have www.volvocars.com/us been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has been damaged as a result of In Canada a prior collision. The quality of these used

}} 19 01 Introduction

|| 01 parts may also have been affected due to Information on the Internet Owner's manuals for earlier model environmental exposure. Additional information regarding your vehicle Volvos Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are Related information can be found at www.volvocars.com. available in PDF format. Quick Guides and Important warnings (p. 23) • Support on the Internet supplements can also be found on the sup- • Information on the Internet (p. 20) Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR port site. Select a model and a model year • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) code below to visit the site, which is available and download the desired information. in most markets. Contact Contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site. Related information • About this manual (p. 14) QR code to the support site • Contacting Volvo (p. 13) The information on the support site is searchable and is grouped into different categories. It includes support for e.g., Internet-based services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the navigation system* and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain various procedures such as how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a cell phone. Downloadable information Maps Sensus Navigation system* maps can be downloaded from the support site. Mobile apps For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The VOC* app can also be found here.

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 01 Introduction

Volvo ID Open Source Software Notice Portions of this product uses software 01 This is your personal ID that can be used to The systems in your Volvo contain certain copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The access a number of services1 free/open source and other software. FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. This product uses certain free / open source Creating a Volvo ID This product includes software under and other software originating from third To create a Volvo ID, provide your personal following licenses: email address and then follow the instructions parties, that is subject to the GNU General provided in the email that you will receive Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/ GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old- from Volvo. This can be done from: GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License licenses/gpl-2.0.html version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project • Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista • From an Internet-connected vehicle: License (“FreeType License”) and other Enter your email address in the app that 2.6.31 kernel and kernel from different and/or additional copyright licenses, requires a Volvo ID and follow the instruc- L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP) disclaimers and notices. The links how to tions provides or press the Internet con- access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3, • uBoot (based on v2009.08) nect ( ) button on the center console LGPLv3, and the other open source software • busybox (based on version 1.13.2.) and select Apps, Settings and follow the licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and GCC runtime library exception: http:// instructions provided. notices are provided to you below. Please www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html • Volvo On Call (VOC*): download the latest refer to the exact terms of the relevant libgcc_s.so.1 version of the VOC app and create a License, regarding your rights under said • Volvo ID on the start page. licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/ to provide the source code of said free/open lgpl.html source software to you for a charge covering • Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1 the cost of performing such distribution, such The FreeType Project License: http:// as the cost of media, shipping and handling, www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT upon written request. Please contact your nearest Volvo retailer. • libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3) This offer is valid for a period of at least three Related information (3) years from the date of the distribution of • About this manual (p. 14) this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers spare parts or customer support.

1 These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21 01 Introduction

01 Volvo and the environment mental refinement of conventional gasoline- FSC® Volvo is committed to the well being of its powered internal combustion engines, Volvo customers. As a natural part of this commit- is actively looking at advanced technology ment, we care about the environment in alternative-fuel vehicles. which we all live. Concern for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing When you drive a Volvo, you become our our environmental impact. partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's Volvo's environmental activities are based on environmental impact, you can: a holistic view, which means we consider the • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. overall environmental impact of a product Tests have shown decreased fuel econ- ® ® throughout its complete life cycle. In this con- omy with improperly inflated tires. The FSC (Forest Stewardship Council ) text, design, production, product use, and symbol indicates that the wood pulp used in Follow the recommended maintenance recycling are all important considerations. In • ® schedule in your Warranty and Service this publication comes from FSC certified production, Volvo has partly or completely Records Information booklet. forests and other responsible sources. phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cad- • Drive at a constant speed whenever pos- Related information mium; and reduced the number of chemicals sible. • Economical driving (p. 280) used in our plants 50% since 1991. • See a trained and qualified Volvo service • Tires – tire economy (p. 291) technician as soon as possible for Volvo was the first in the world to introduce inspection if the check engine (malfunc- into production a three-way catalytic con- tion indicator) light illuminates, or stays verter with a Lambda sond, now called the on after the vehicle has started. heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc. NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the • When cleaning your vehicle, please use remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the genuine Volvo car care products. All only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC- Volvo car care products are formulated to free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system be environmentally friendly. of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to continuous environ-

22 01 Introduction

01 Important warnings WARNING Volvo service technician before installing Please keep the following warnings in mind any accessory in or on your vehicle. Never use a hand-held cellular tele- when operating/servicing your vehicle. • Accessories that have not been approved phone while driving. Some jurisdic- • by Volvo may or may not be specifically tions prohibit cellular telephone use by Driver distraction tested for compatibility with your vehicle. a driver while the vehicle is moving. A driver has a responsibility to do everything Additionally, an inexperienced installer possible to ensure his or her own safety and • If your vehicle is equipped with a navi- may not be familiar with some of your the safety of passengers in the vehicle and gation system, set and make changes car's systems. to your travel itinerary only with the others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distrac- Any of your car's performance and safety vehicle parked. • tions is part of that responsibility. systems could be adversely affected if Never program your audio system Driver distraction results from driver activities • you install accessories that Volvo has not while the vehicle is moving. Program that are not directly related to controlling the tested, or if you allow accessories to be radio presets with the vehicle parked, vehicle in the driving environment. Your new installed by someone unfamiliar with your and use your programmed presets to vehicle. Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many fea- make radio use quicker and simpler. ture-rich entertainment and communication • Damage caused by unapproved or systems. These include hands-free cellular • Never use portable computers or per- improperly installed accessories may not telephones, navigation systems, and multi- sonal digital assistants while the vehi- be covered by your new vehicle warranty. purpose audio systems. You may also own cle is moving. See your Warranty and Service Records other portable electronic devices for your own Information booklet for more warranty convenience. When used properly and safely, Accessory installation information. Volvo assumes no responsi- they enrich the driving experience. Improperly • We strongly recommend that Volvo own- bility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of non- used, any of these could cause a distraction. ers install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installa- genuine accessories. For all of these systems, we want to provide tions be performed only by a trained and Related information the following warning that reflects the strong qualified Volvo service technician. Volvo concern for your safety. Never use • About this manual (p. 14) these devices or any feature of your vehicle in • Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 19) a way that distracts you from the task of driv- ensure compatibility with the performing safely. Distraction can lead to a serious ance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and accident. In addition to this general warning, qualified Volvo service technician knows we offer the following guidance regarding where accessories may and may not be specific newer features that may be found in safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, your vehicle: please consult a trained and qualified

23 01 Introduction

01 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Technician certification Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo CALL roadside assistance. supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). Additional information, features, and benefits of this program are described in a separate Certified technicians have demonstrated a information package in your glove compart- high degree of competence in specific areas. ment. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or If you require assistance, dial: more years before a certificate is issued. In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63- These professional technicians are best able VOLVO) to analyze vehicle problems and perform the In Canada 1-800-263-0475 necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition. NOTE Some vehicles may be equipped with Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which will allow access to the call center and additional features directly from the vehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance program mentioned above. Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be a customer pay subscription offer after an initial complimentary trial period.

Related information • Information on the Internet (p. 20)

24 SAFETY 02 Safety

Occupant safety • Never drink and drive. Recall information Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. • If you are taking any medication, consult Information regarding recalls or other service your physician about its potential effects campaigns is available on our website at Volvo's concern for safety on your driving abilities. www.volvocars.com/us/. 02 Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 • Take a driver-retraining course. when the first Volvo rolled off the production On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo inven- • Have your eyes checked regularly. and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will tion), safety cages, and energy-absorbing • Keep your windshield and headlights be displayed at the lower left side of the impact zones were designed into Volvo vehi- clean. screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Num- cles long before it was fashionable or • Replace wiper blades when they start to ber for your vehicle (found at the base of the required by government regulation. leave streaks. windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. We will not compromise our commitment to • Take into account the traffic, road, and safety. We continue to seek out new safety weather conditions, particularly with Volvo customers in Canada features and to refine those already in our regard to stopping distance. For any questions regarding open recalls for vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate • Never send text messages while driving. your vehicle, please contact your authorized hearing your suggestions about improving • Refrain from using or minimize the use of Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to automobile safety. We also want to know if a cell phone while driving. answer your questions, please contact Volvo you ever have a safety concern with your Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Mon- vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: Related information day through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: • Recall information (p. 26) EST or by e-mail at [email protected]. 1-800-663-8255. • Reporting safety defects (p. 27) You may also write us at: Occupant safety reminders Volvo Cars of Canada How safely you drive doesn't depend on how National Customer Service old you are but rather on: 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 • How well you see. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 • Your ability to concentrate. • How quickly you make decisions under Related information stress to avoid an accident. • Occupant safety (p. 26) The following suggestions are intended to • Reporting safety defects (p. 27) help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment.

26 02 Safety

Reporting safety defects (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: Reporting safety defects in Canada The following information will help you report NHTSA, U.S. Department of Trans- If you believe your vehicle has a defect that any perceived safety-related defects in your portation, Washington D.C. 20590. could cause a crash or could cause injury or vehicle. death, you should immediately inform Trans- You can also obtain other informa- port Canada in addition to notifying Volvo 02 Reporting safety defects in the U.S. tion about motor vehicle safety from Cars of Canada Corp. If you believe that your vehicle has a http://www.safercar.gov, where you Transport Canada can be contacted at: defect which could cause a crash or can also enter your vehicle's VIN 1-800-333-0510 could cause injury or death, you (Vehicle Identification Number) to Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 should immediately inform the see if it has any open recalls. National Highway Traffic Safety Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Administration (NHTSA) in addition Volvo strongly recommends that if Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road to notifying Volvo Cars of North your vehicle is covered under a Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1 America, LLC. If NHTSA receives service campaign, safety or emis- similar complaints, it may open an sion recall or similar action, it should Related information investigation, and if it finds that a be completed as soon as possible. • Occupant safety (p. 26) safety defect exists in a group of Please check with your local retailer • Recall information (p. 26) vehicles, it may order a recall and or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC remedy campaign. However, NHTSA if your vehicle is covered under cannot become involved in individ- these conditions. ual problems between you, your NHTSA can be reached at: retailer, or Volvo Cars of North Internet: America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety http://www.nhtsa.gov Hotline toll-free at Telephone: 1-888-327-4236 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236).

27 02 Safety

Seat belts – general peak forces exerted by the seat belt on the WARNING Seat belts should always be worn by all occu- occupant. Never repair the belt yourself; have this pants of your vehicle. Children should be • Seat belt maintenance work done by a trained and qualified properly restrained, using an infant, car, or Check periodically that the seat belts are in Volvo service technician only. 02 booster seat determined by age, weight and good condition. Use water and a mild deter- height. • Any device used to induce slack into gent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism the shoulder belt portion of the three- Volvo also believes no child should sit in the function as follows: attach the seat belt and point belt system will have a detrimen- front seat of a vehicle. pull rapidly on the strap. tal effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a colli- WARNING sion. Never use a seat belt for more than one • The seat back should not be tilted too occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion far back. The shoulder belt must be of the belt under the arm, behind the back taut in order to function properly. or otherwise out of position. Such use • Do not use child safety seats or child could cause injury in the event of an acci- booster cushions/backrests in the dent. As seat belts lose much of their front passenger's seat. We also rec- strength when exposed to violent stretch- ommend that children who have out- ing, they should be replaced after any col- grown these devices sit in the rear lision, even if they appear to be undamaged. seat with the seat belt properly fastened.

Adjusting the seat belt Related information Most states and provinces make it mandatory • Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) Seat belt pretensioners • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30) All seat belts are equipped with pretensioners that reduce slack in the belts. These pretensioners are triggered in situations where the front or side impact airbags deploy, and in certain impacts from the rear. The front seat belts also include a tension reducing device which, in the event of a collision, limits the

28 02 Safety

Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling NOTE Related information Seat belts should be used by all occupants in • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) Each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) the vehicle when it is in motion. is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30) which is designed to help keep the seat Buckling a seat belt belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt 02 Pull the belt out far enough to insert the latch is pulled out as far as possible. If this is plate into the receptacle until a distinct click done, a sound from the seat belt retractor is heard. The seat belt retractor is normally will be audible, which is normal, and the "unlocked" and you can move freely, provi- seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in ded that the shoulder belt is not pulled out place. This function is automatically disa- too far. bled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted. Seat belt retractor The seat belt retractor will lock up in the See also Child restraints (p. 47) for informa- following situations: tion about using a seat belt's ALR/ELR func- • if the belt is pulled out rapidly tion to anchor a child seat. • during braking and acceleration When wearing the seat belt remember: • if the vehicle is leaning excessively • The belt should not be twisted or turned. • when driving in turns • The lap section of the belt must be posi- • if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer- tioned low on the hips (not pressing gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is against the abdomen). activated • Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut. Unbuckling the seat belt To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot.

29 02 Safety

Seat belt reminder Rear seats Seat belts – pregnancy The seat belt reminder is intended to alert all The seat belt reminder in the rear seat has The seat belt should always be worn during occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts two additional functions: pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be should be fastened before the vehicle begins • It provides information about which seat worn correctly. 02 to move. belts are fastened in the rear seat. A message will appear in the information display when a belt is being used. This message will disappear after several seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever. • It also provides a reminder if one of the occupants of the rear seat has unbuckled his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. A visual and audible signal will be given. These signals will stop when the

seat belt has been re-buckled or can be G020998

G017726 stopped by pressing the OK button. • The message Unbelted in rear seat will The diagonal section should wrap over the Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console appear in the information display if one of shoulder then be routed between the breasts The seat belt reminder consists of an audible the rear doors has been opened. and to the side of the belly. The lap section signal, an indicator light near the rearview The message in the information display can should lay flat over the thighs and as low as mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel always be accessed, even if it has been possible under the belly. It must never be that alert all occupants of the vehicle to fas- erased, by pressing the OK button to display allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack ten their seat belts (p. 28). The audible signal stored messages. from the belt and ensure that it fits close to and indicator light will be on for several sec- the body without any twists. onds from the time the ignition is switched Related information As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers on, regardless of whether or not the seat • Seat belts – pregnancy (p. 30) belts are fastened. should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of If the front seat belts are unbuckled while the the vehicle as they drive (which means they vehicle is in motion, the audible signal and must be able to easily operate the foot pedals warning light will be active for a several sec- and steering wheel). Within this context, they onds. should strive to position the seat with as large

30 02 Safety

a distance as possible between their belly Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) bags (p. 39), a front passenger occupant and the steering wheel. As an enhancement to the three-point seat weight sensor (p. 36), and inflatable curtains (p. 41). All of these systems are moni- Related information belts (p. 28), your Volvo is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). tored by the SRS control module. An SRS • Seat belts – buckling/unbuckling (p. 29) warning light in the instrument panel (see the 02 • Seat belt reminder (p. 30) illustration) illuminates when the ignition is in • Child restraints (p. 47) modes I or II, and will normally go out after approximately 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the system. Where applicable, a text message will also be displayed when the SRS warning light illuminates. If this warning symbol is not functioning properly, the general warning symbol illuminates and a text message will be displayed. See also Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 72) and Information displays – Models with an analog instrument panel warning symbols (p. 74) for more information about indicator and warning lights.

Models with an digital instrument panel* Volvo's SRS consists of seat belt pretensioners, front airbags (p. 32), side impact air-

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31 02 Safety

|| WARNING WARNING Front airbags The front airbags supplement the three-point If the SRS warning light stays on after If your vehicle has become flood-damaged • seat belts (p. 28). For these airbags to provide the engine has started or if it illumi- in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/stand- the protection intended, seat belts must be nates while you are driving, have the ing water on the floor of the vehicle), do 02 vehicle inspected by a trained and not attempt to start the vehicle or insert worn at all times. qualified Volvo service technician as the remote key into the ignition slot before soon as possible. disconnecting the battery (see below). This may cause airbag deployment which could • Never try to repair any component or result in serious injury. Have the vehicle part of the SRS yourself. Any interfer- towed to a trained and qualified Volvo ence in the system could cause mal- service technician for repairs. function and serious injury. All work on Before attempting to tow the vehicle: these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service 1. Switch off the ignition for at least technician. 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually

overriding the shiftlock system Trans- G018665 mission – shiftlock override (p. 256). The front airbag system Related information The front airbag system includes gas genera- • Crash mode – general information tors surrounded by the airbags, and decelera- (p. 44) tion sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the airbags to be inflated with nitro- gen gas.

32 02 Safety

WARNING collisions where rapid deceleration occurs. The airbags in the vehicle are designed • The SRS (p. 31) sensors, which trigger to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a • the front airbags, are designed to react to replacement for–the three-point seat both the impact of the collision and the 02 belts. For maximum protection, wear inertial forces generated by it, and to seat belts at all times. Be aware that determine if the intensity of the collision is no system can prevent all possible sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners injuries that may occur in an accident. and/or airbags to be deployed. Never drive with your hands on the • However, not all frontal collisions activate the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. front airbags. • The front airbags are designed to help If the collision involves a nonrigid object Location of the passenger's side front airbag prevent serious injury. Deployment • occurs very quickly and with consider- (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, As the movement of the seats' occupants able force. During normal deployment fixed object at a low speed, the front air- compresses the airbags, some of the gas is and depending on variables such as bags will not necessarily deploy. expelled at a controlled rate to provide better seating position, one may experience • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other side impact collision, in a collision from deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire injuries as a result from deployment of the rear or in a rollover situation. process, including inflation and deflation of one or both of the airbags. • The amount of damage to the bodywork the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a • When installing any accessory equip- does not reliably indicate if the airbags second. ment, make sure that the front airbag should have deployed or not. The location of the front airbags is indicated system is not damaged. Any interfer- by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering ence in the system could cause mal- WARNING wheel pad and above the glove compartment, function. If any of the airbags have deployed: and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. Front airbag deployment • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. • The front airbags are designed to deploy Have it towed to a qualified repair The driver's side front airbag is folded and facility. located in the steering wheel hub. during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, • If necessary seek medical attentIon. The passenger's side front airbag is folded depending on the crash severity, angle, behind a panel located above the glove com- speed and object impacted. The airbags partment. may also deploy in certain non-frontal

}} 33 02 Safety

|| WARNING www.volvocars.com/us NOTE • Do not use child safety seats or child In Canada • Deployment of front airbags occurs booster cushions/backrests in the Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. only one time during an accident. In a front passenger's seat. We also rec- collision where deployment occurs, 02 ommend that occupants under 4 feet National Customer Service the airbags and seat belt pretensioners 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 activate. Some noise occurs and a outgrown these devices sit in the rear small amount of powder is released. seat with the seat belt fastened1. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 The release of the powder may appear • Never drive with the airbags deployed. 1-800-663-8255 as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate The fact that they hang out can impair www.volvocars.com/ca the steering of your vehicle. Other fire. safety systems can also be damaged. • Volvo's front airbags use special sen- • The smoke and dust formed when the sors that are integrated with the front airbags are deployed can cause skin seat buckles. The point at which the and eye irritation in the event of pro- airbag deploys is determined by longed exposure. whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. Should you have questions about any com- • Collisions can occur where only one of ponent in the SRS system, please contact a the airbags deploys. If the impact is trained and qualified Volvo service technician less severe, but severe enough to or Volvo customer support: present a clear injury risk, the airbags In the USA are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are Volvo Cars of North America, LLC triggered at full capacity. Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552

1 See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information, (p. 36).

34 02 Safety

Airbag decals WARNING WARNING • Children must never be allowed in the • No objects or accessory equipment, front passenger's seat. e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the • Occupants in the front passenger's 02 seat must never sit on the edge of the air bag hatch (the area above the glove seat, sit leaning toward the instrument compartment) or the area affected by panel or otherwise sit out of position. airbag deployment. • The occupant's back must be as • There should be no loose articles, upright as comfort allows and be such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, against the seat back with the seat or dashboard area. belt properly fastened. • Never try to open the airbag cover on • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the steering wheel or the passenger's Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors the dash, seat or out of the window. side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants.

Related information • Occupant Weight Sensor (p. 36) • Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags (p. 39) • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41) • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Passenger's side airbag decal (p. 31)

35 02 Safety

Occupant Weight Sensor detect the presence of a properly seated NOTE The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is occupant and determine if the passenger's When the ignition is switched on, the OWS designed to meet the regulatory requirements side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). indicator light will go on for up to 10 sec- of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard onds while the system performs a self- 02 (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the pas- diagnostic test. not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag senger's side front airbag when: under certain conditions. • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, However, if a fault is detected in the system: or has small/medium objects in the front • The OWS indicator light will stay on seat, • The SRS warning light (p. 31) will come • the system determines that an infant is on and stay on 2 present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service instructions, urgent will be displayed in the information display. • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child WARNING restraint that is installed according to the 2 manufacturer's instructions, If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the G017724 • the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat, passenger's side front airbag will not Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light deploy in the event of a collision. In this • a front passenger takes his/her weight off case, the SRS system and Occupant Disabling the passenger's side front of the seat for a period of time, Weight Sensor should be inspected by a airbag • a child or a small person occupies the trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that ALL occupants front passenger's seat. (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay of any vehicle with a front passenger side air- on to remind you that the passenger's side bag (p. 32), and be properly restrained for front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER their size and weight. For child safety recom- AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the mendations, see Child safety (p. 46). overhead console, near the base of the rear- The OWS works with sensors that are part of view mirror. the front passenger's seat and seat belt (p. 28). The sensors are designed to

36 02 Safety

WARNING Passeng- OWS Passeng- If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIR- • Never try to open, remove, or repair er's seat indicator er's side occu- light sta- front air- BAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible any components in the OWS system. that the person isn't sitting properly in the This could result in system malfunc- pancy status bag status seat. If this happens: 02 tion. Maintenance or repairs should tus only be carried out by an a trained and • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to qualified Volvo service technician. Seat unoc- OWS indi- Passenger's place the seatback in an upright position. cupied cator light side front air- The front passenger's seat should not • Have the person sit upright in the seat, • lights up. bag disabled be modified in any way. This could centered on the seat cushion, with the reduce pressure on the seat cushion, Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's person's legs comfortably extended. which might interfere with the OWS pied by low cator light side front air- • Restart the vehicle and have the person system's function. weight lights up bag disabled remain in this position for about two occupant/ minutes. This will allow the system to objectA detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag. Seat occu- OWS indi- Passenger's • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- pied by cator light side front air- tor lamp remains on even after this, the heavy occu- is not lit bag enabled person should be advised to ride in the pant/object rear seat.

A Volvo recommends that children always be properly This condition reflects limitations of the OWS restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. classification capability. It does not indicate Do not assume that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator OWS malfunction. lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear Modifications seat. If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) example by altering or adapting the driver's the passenger's side front airbag in the event or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag of a collision anytime the system senses that systems, please contact Volvo at: a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER In the USA AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and Volvo Cars of North America, LLC remain off. Customer Care Center

}} 37 02 Safety

|| 1 Volvo Drive WARNING WARNING P.O. Box 914 • No objects that add to the total weight • Keep the following points in mind with Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 on the seat should be placed on the respect to the OWS system. Failure to front passenger's seat. If a child is follow these instructions could 02 1-800-458-1552 seated in the front passenger's seat adversely affect the system's function In Canada with any additional weight, this extra and result in serious injury to the occu- weight could cause the OWS system pant of the front passenger's seat: Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. to enable the airbag, which might • The full weight of the front seat pas- National Customer Service cause it to deploy in the event of a col- senger should always be on the seat lision, thereby injuring the child. 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 cushion. The passenger should never • The seat belt should never be wrapped lift him/herself off the seat cushion Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 around an object on the front pas- using the armrest in the door or the 1-800-663-8255 senger's seat. This could interfere with center console, by pressing the feet on the OWS system's function. the floor, by sitting on the edge of the • The front passenger's seat belt should seat cushion, or by pressing against never be used in a way that exerts the backrest in a way that reduces more pressure on the passenger than pressure on the seat cushion. This normal. This could increase the pres- could cause OWS to disable the front, sure exerted on the weight sensor by a passenger's side airbag. child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child.

38 02 Safety

WARNING Side impact protection (SIPS) airbags As an enhancement to the structural side Do not place any type of object on the • impact protection built into your vehicle, it is front passenger's seat in such a way also equipped with Side Impact Protection that jamming, pressing, or squeezing 02 occurs between the object and the System (SIPS) airbags. front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt (Child restraints (p. 47)). • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could Driver's side SIPS airbag interfere with the OWS system's function.

Related information • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) G032949 (p. 31) Location of the side impact (SIPS) airbags (front seats only) The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of Passenger's side SIPS airbag impact. NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.

}} 39 02 Safety

|| Components in the SIPS airbag system WARNING Related information This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) generator, the side airbag modules built into • The SIPS airbag system is a supple- (p. 31) the outboard sides of both front seat back- ment to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point • Front airbags (p. 32) 02 rests, and electronic sensors/wiring. seat belt system. It is not designed to • Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 41) deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident.

40 02 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) NOTE WARNING The inflatable curtain is designed to help pro- If the inflatable curtain deploys, it remains In order for the IC to provide its best protect the heads of the occupants of the front inflated for approximately 3 seconds. tection, both front seat occupants and seats and the occupant of the outboard rear both outboard rear seat occupants should seating positions in certain side impact colli- sit in an upright position with the seat belt 02 sions. WARNING properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child • The IC system is a supplement to the restraint system. Only adults should sit in Side Impact Protection System. It is the front seats. Children must never be not designed to deploy during colli- allowed in the front passenger seat, Child sions from the rear of the vehicle. safety (p. 46) for guidelines. Failure to • Never try to open or repair any compo- follow these instructions can result in injury nents of the IC system. This should be to the vehicle occupants in an accident. done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • Never hang heavy items from the ceil- • Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ing handles. This could impede (p. 31) deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • Front airbags (p. 32) • The cargo area and rear seat should • Child safety (p. 46) not be loaded to a level higher than This system consists of inflatable curtains 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of located along the sides of the roof liners, the rear side windows. Objects placed stretching from the center of both front side higher than this level could impede the windows to the rear edge of the rear side function of the Inflatable Curtain. door windows. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the Side Impact Airbag Sys- tem (p. 39) (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously.

41 02 Safety

Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) rearward. This movement helps absorb some The WHIPS system consists of specially of the forces that could result in whiplash. designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some WARNING 02 of the energy generated in a collision from the • The WHIPS system is designed to rear (when the vehicle is rear-ended). supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed.

In the event of a rear-end collision, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly

42 02 Safety

WARNING WARNING Related information • Seat belts – general (p. 28) • Occupants in the front seats must • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind never sit out of position. The occu- the front seats could impede the func- pant's back must be as upright as tion of the WHIPS system. 02 comfort allows and be against the seat • If the rear seat backrests are folded back with the seat belt properly fas- down, cargo must be secured to pre- tened. vent it from sliding forward against the • If your vehicle has been involved in a front seat backrests in the event of a rear-end collision, the front seat back- collision from the rear. This could rests must be inspected by a trained interfere with the action of the WHIPS and qualified Volvo service technician, system. even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself.

WARNING Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear- facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat.

43 02 Safety

Rollover Protection System (ROPS) Crash mode – general information If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS) After a collision, the functionality of some of the text Safety mode See manual may utilizes the Roll Stability Control (RSC) func- the vehicle's systems may be reduced as a appear in the information display. tion and has been designed to help minimize safety precaution. 02 the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers NOTE or if a skid should occur. This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers system is intact. the amount of change in the lateral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a Crash mode is a feature that is triggered if rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a roll- one or more of the safety systems (e.g. over, the stability system is activated, power front (p. 32) or side airbags (p. 39), an inflat- to the engine is cut and the brakes are able curtain (p. 41), or one or more of the seat applied to one or more of the wheels until the belt pretensioners) has deployed. The colli- vehicle regains stability. sion may have damaged an important function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sen- WARNING Warning symbol: analog instrument panel sors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc. The vehicle’s stability systems, including ROPS and RSC, do not replace the driver’s responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be respected.

Warning symbol: digital instrument panel*

44 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 02 Safety

WARNING Crash mode – starting the vehicle Crash mode – moving the vehicle If Crash mode has been set Crash If the message Normal mode appears after Never attempt to repair the vehicle • mode (p. 44)) and damage to the vehicle is an attempt has been made to start the engine, yourself or to reset the electrical sys- minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may tem after the vehicle has displayed Starting the vehicle after a crash (p. 45), the 02 Safety mode See manual. This could attempt to start the engine. vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position, if for example, it is blocking traf- result in injury or improper system To do so: function. fic. It should, however, not be moved farther 1. Remove the remote key from the ignition than is absolutely necessary. Restoring the vehicle to normal operat- • slot and open the driver's door. If a mes- ing status should only be done by a WARNING trained and qualified Volvo service sage is displayed that the ignition is on, technician. press the start button. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Crash mode has been set, it should • After Safety mode See manual has 2. Close the driver's door and reinsert the remote key in the ignition slot. not be driven or towed (pulled by another been displayed, if you detect the odor vehicle). There may be concealed damage of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel 3. Try to start the vehicle. that could make it difficult or impossible to leakage, do not attempt to start the control. The vehicle should be transported vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. WARNING on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs. Related information If the message Safety mode See manual is still displayed, the vehicle should not be • Crash mode – starting the vehicle driven and must be towed. Concealed Related information (p. 45) faults may make the vehicle difficult to • Crash mode – moving the vehicle control. • Crash mode – general information (p. 44) (p. 45) Related information • Crash mode – general information (p. 44) • Crash mode – moving the vehicle (p. 45)

45 02 Safety

Child safety pen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on When a child has outgrown the child safety Children should always be seated safely when the seat. Other occupants should also be seat, you should use the rear seat with the traveling in the vehicle. properly restrained to help reduce the chance standard seat belt fastened. The best way to of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. help protect the child here is to place the General information child on a cushion so that the seat belt is 02 All states and provinces have legislation gov- Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint properly located on the hips (see Booster erning how and where children should be car- systems (p. 47) for all occupants including cushions (p. 54) for illustration). Legislation ried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations children. Remember that, regardless of age in your state or province may mandate the existing in your state or province. Recent and size, a child should always be properly use of a child seat or cushion in combination accident statistics have shown that children restrained in a vehicle. with the seat belt, depending on the child's are safer in rear seating positions than front age and/or size. Please check local regula- Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ seating positions when properly restrained. A tions. LATCH attachments (p. 55), which make it child restraint system can help protect a child more convenient to install child seats. in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when A specially designed and tested booster selecting a child restraint system: cushion and backrest can be obtained from Some restraint systems for children are your Volvo retailer. designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap It should have a label certifying that it meets belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – Such child restraint systems can help protect Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in children in vehicles in the event of an acci- CMVSS 213. height dent only if they are used properly. However, Make sure the child restraint system is Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. children could be endangered in a crash if the approved for the child's height, weight and (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – child restraints are not properly secured in the development – the label required by the 137 cm) in height vehicle. Failure to follow the installation standard or regulation, or instructions for instructions for your child restraint can result infant restraints, typically provide this infor- in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a mation. sudden stop. In using any child restraint system, we urge Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable you to carefully look over the instructions that substitute for a child restraint system. In an are provided with the restraint. Be sure you accident, a child held in a person's arms can understand them and can use the device be crushed between the vehicle's interior and properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused an unrestrained person. The child could also child restraint system can result in increased be injured by striking the interior, or by being injuries for both the infant or child and other ejected from the vehicle during a sudden occupants in the vehicle. maneuver or impact. The same can also hap-

46 02 Safety

WARNING Volvo has some very specific Child restraints recommendations: Suitable child restraints should always be Do not use child safety seats or child • • Always wear your seat belt (p. 28). used when children travel in the vehicle. booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also rec- • Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety Child restraint systems 02 ommend that children under 4 feet device which, when used with a three- 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have point seat belt can help reduce serious outgrown these devices sit in the rear injuries during certain types of accidents. seat with the seat belt fastened. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehi- • On hot days, the temperature in the cle. vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures • Volvo strongly recommends that every- for even a short period of time can one in the vehicle be properly restrained. cause heat-related injury or death. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants Small children are particularly at risk. (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back

Child seat should always be registered. See seat of any vehicle with a front passenger G022840 side airbag. Child restraints (p. 47) for more information. Infant seat • Drive safely! Volvo's recommendations There are three main types of child restraint Why does Volvo believe that no child should Related information systems: infant seats (p. 49), convertible sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple • Infant seats (p. 49) seats (p. 51), and booster cush- really. A front airbag (p. 32) is a very powerful • Convertible seats (p. 51) ions (p. 54). They are classified according to the child's age and size. device designed, by law, to help protect an • Booster cushions (p. 54) adult. • Integrated booster cushion – general The following section provides general infor- Because of the size of the airbag and its information (p. 57) mation on securing a child restraint using a three-point seat belt (p. 28). Refer to ISOFIX/ speed of inflation, a child should never be • Child safety locks (p. 61) placed in the front seat, even if he or she is LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) and Top tether properly belted or strapped into a child safety • Top tether anchors (p. 56) anchors (p. 56) for information on securing seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety a child restraint using ISOFIX/LATCH lower for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue anchors and/or top tether anchorages. to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up.

}} 47 02 Safety

|| WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to 02 help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom-

G022847 G023269 mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In Convertible seat Booster cushion addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, WARNING WARNING properly restrained, as long as possi- A child seat should never be used in the Always refer to the child restraint manufac- ble. front passenger seat of any vehicle with a turer's instructions for detailed information front passenger airbag – not even if the on securing the restraint. Automatic Locking Retractor/ "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If ELR) the severity of an accident were to cause To make child seat installation easier, each the airbag to inflate, this could lead to seri- seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equip- ous injury or death to a child seated in this ped with a locking mechanism to help keep position. the seat belt taut.

48 02 Safety

When attaching the seat belt to a child Child restraint recall information is readily Infant seats seat: available in both the U.S. and Canada. For Suitable child restraints should always be 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. used when children (depending on their age/ according to the child seat manufactur- Government's Auto Safety Hotline at size) are seated in the vehicle. er's instructions. 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www- 02 odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/recalls/ Securing an infant seat with a seat belt 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the Transport Canada's Child Safety website at buckle (lock) in the usual way. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat. Related information A sound from the seat belt retractor will be • Child safety locks (p. 61) audible at this time and is normal. The belt • Integrated booster cushion – general will now be locked in place. This function is information (p. 57) automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. G022844

WARNING Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend NOTE that children who have outgrown these Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for infor- devices sit in the rear seat with the seat mation on securing a child restraint using belt properly fastened. ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. Child restraint registration and recalls Child restraints could be recalled for safety 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of reasons. You must register your child the vehicle. restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat informed about child safety seat recalls, be according to the manufacturer's instruc- sure to fill out and return the registration card tions. that comes with new child restraints.

}} 49 02 Safety

|| WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the 02 "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. G023270 G022846

Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt click is audible. WARNING out as far as possible to activate the • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing belt's automatic locking function. position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. G023271

Fasten the seat belt

50 02 Safety

NOTE WARNING Convertible seats Suitable child restraints should always be The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. used when children (depending on their age/ and allowed to retract fully. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt size) are seated in the vehicle. path. 02 Securing a convertible seat with a seat 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let belt the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A The infant seat can be removed by unbuck- sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- ling the seat belt and letting it retract com- matic locking function will be audible at pletely. this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. Related information • Child safety (p. 46) • Child restraints (p. 47) • Convertible seats (p. 51) • Integrated booster cushion – general information (p. 57)

• ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) G018630 • Top tether anchors (p. 56) Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat

NOTE G022850 Refer to (p. 55) and (p. 56) for informa- Ensure that the seat is securely in place tion on securing a child restraint using 6. Push and pull the infant seat along the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and/or top tether anchorages. seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child.

}} 51 02 Safety

|| WARNING • A small child's head represents a con- siderable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recom- 02 mends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be instal-

G022847 led in the rear seat only. G022848 Route the seat belt through the convertible seat • A rear-facing convertible seat should Fasten the seat belt not be positioned behind the driver's 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch WARNING seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct Always use a convertible seat that is suita- click is audible. ble for the child's age and size. See the 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt convertible seat manufacturer's recom- 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible mendations. seat according to the manufacturer's out as far as possible to activate the instructions. belt's automatic locking function. 1. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle.

52 02 Safety

NOTE WARNING Related information • Child safety (p. 46) The locking retractor will automatically It should not be possible to move the child release when the seat belt is unbuckled restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. • Child restraints (p. 47) and allowed to retract fully. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt • Infant seats (p. 49) path. 02 • Integrated booster cushion – general 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, information (p. 57) let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A The convertible seat can be removed by • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) sound from the seat belt retractor's auto- unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract Top tether anchors (p. 56) matic locking function will be audible at completely. • this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. G022850

Ensure that the seat is securely in place G022849

Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt WARNING 6. Push and pull the convertible seat along A child seat should never be used in the the seat belt path to ensure that it is held front passenger seat of any vehicle with a securely in place by the seat belt. front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position.

53 02 Safety

Booster cushions 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch Related information Booster cushions should be properly posi- plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct • Child safety (p. 46) tioned in the vehicle. click is audible. • Child restraints (p. 47) Infant seats (p. 49) 02 Securing a booster cushion • • Convertible seats (p. 51) • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) • Top tether anchors (p. 56) G022852

G022851 Positioning the seat belt

Position the child correctly on the booster cush- 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut ion and fits snugly around the child. Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible WARNING seats (p. 51). • The hip section of the three-point seat 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat belt must fit snugly across the child's of the vehicle. hips, not across the stomach. The shoulder section of the three-point 2. With the child properly seated on the • seat belt should be positioned across booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or the chest and shoulder. around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm.

54 02 Safety

ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 3. Fasten the attachment on the child Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ child seats are located in the rear, outboard LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instruc- 02 Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child tions. seat anchors

WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to

FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to G018631 the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/ LATCH lower anchors

NOTE WARNING • The rear seat's center position is not • Be sure to fasten the attachment cor- equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower rectly to the anchor (see the illustra- anchors. When installing a child tion). If the attachment is not correctly restraint in this position, attach the Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark fastened, the child restraint may not restraint's top tether strap (if it is so be properly secured in the event of a the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as equipped) to the top tether anchorage collision. shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the point and secure the restraint with the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. vehicle's center seat belt. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors are only intended for Always follow your child seat manufacturer's • Always follow your child seat manufac- installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/ use with child seats positioned in the turer's installation instructions, and outboard seating positions. These LATCH lower anchors and top teth- use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors ers (p. 56) whenever possible. anchors are not certified for use with and top tethers whenever possible. any child restraint that is positioned in To access the anchors the center seating position. When 1. Put the child restraint in position. securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's 2. Kneel on the child restraint to press down center seat belt. the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel.

}} 55 02 Safety

|| Related information Top tether anchors Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's • Child safety (p. 46) Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top instructions for information on securing the • Infant seats (p. 49) tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are child seat. • Convertible seats (p. 51) located on the rear side of the backrests. 02 NOTE • Integrated booster cushion – general Child restraint anchorages information (p. 57) On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors.

WARNING • Always refer to the recommendations made by the child restraint manufacturer. • Volvo recommends that the top tether anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint. Securing a child seat • Never route a top tether strap over the 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head 2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint. restraint and attach it to the anchor. • Child restraint anchorages are 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower designed to withstand only those ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraint is not equipped with lower tether restraints. Under no circumstances are straps, or the restraint is used in the cen- they to be used for adult seat belts or ter seating position, follow instructions for harnesses. The anchorages are not securing a child restraint using the Auto- able to withstand excessive forces on matic Locking Retractor seat belt (see them in the event of collision if full har- Child restraints (p. 47)). ness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a 4. Firmly tension all straps. belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffer-

56 02 Safety

ing severe injuries should a collision Integrated booster cushion – general In Canada, Transport Canada's occur. information weight recommendation is 40 – • Do not install rear speakers that The booster cushions are designed to raise 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg). require the removal of the top tether the child higher so that the shoulder strap anchors or interfere with the proper crosses over the child's collarbone, not over If using a booster cushion does not result in 02 use of the top tether strap. the neck. proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly 2 Related information Integrated two-stage booster cushion secured child restraint (see (p. 47) ). The shoulder belt must never be placed behind • Child safety (p. 46) Volvo's optional integrated booster cushions are located in the outboard seating positions. the child's back or under the arm. • Infant seats (p. 49) These booster cushions have been specially • Convertible seats (p. 51) designed to help safeguard children in the • Integrated booster cushion – general rear seat. They should be stowed (p. 60) information (p. 57) (folded down into the seat cushion) when not • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 55) in use. When using an integrated booster cushion (p. 59), the child must be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt. Use these booster cushions only with children whose weight is between: • Stage 1: 48 – 80 lbs (22 – 36 kg) Correct seating position: child's head is below • Stage 2: 33 – 55 lbs (15 – 25 kg) the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across and whose height is between: the collarbone • Stage 1: 45 – 55 in. (115 – 140 cm) • Stage 2: 37 – 47 in. (95 – 120 cm)

2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. }} 57 02 Safety

|| • That the seat belt (p. 28) is properly posi- WARNING tioned and is taut. • The shoulder section of the seat belt is DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can across the child's collarbone, not over the occur 02 neck. Follow all instructions on the • The lap section of the seat belt is across booster cushion and in the vehi- the child's hips and not the abdomen. cle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. Incorrect seating position: the child's head is above the head restraint and the shoulder belt is • Use this booster cushion only with not across the collarbone children whose height and weight are Before driving, check that: within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion – • The integrated two-stage booster cushion general information (p. 57)). is set in the correct position according to In the event of a collision while the the child's height and weight (see the • integrated booster cushion was occu- table below) and is locked in position. pied, the entire booster cushion and Stage 1 Stage 2 seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be Weight 48 – 80 lbs 33 – 55 lbs replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be per- 22 – 36 kg 15 – 25 kg formed by a trained and qualified Height 45 – 55 in. 37 – 47 in. Volvo service technician only. 115 – 140 cm 95 – 120 cm Related information • Child safety (p. 46) • Infant seats (p. 49) • Convertible seats (p. 51) • Booster cushions (p. 54)

58 02 Safety

Integrated booster cushion – using Press the booster cushion rearward to Lift the front edge of the booster cushion The Integrated booster cushion (p. 57) in the lock it in position. and press it rearward toward the backrest to lock it in position. rear seat can be folded up in two stages, Stage 2 depending on the child's height and weight. WARNING 02 Stage 1 DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion – general information (p. 57)). • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified With the booster cushion in the stage 1 Volvo service technician only. position, press the button (see the arrow Pull the handle (1) forward and upward (2) in illustration 1). to release the booster cushion.

}} 59 02 Safety

|| Related information Integrated booster cushion – stowing NOTE • Integrated booster cushion – stowing The integrated booster cushion (p. 57) can be (p. 60) The booster cushion cannot be moved folded down completely (stowed) from either from the stage 2 (upper) position to the the stage 1 or stage 2 positions. stage 1 (lower) position. It must first be 02 folded down completely to the stowed position, and then adjusted to stage 1.

Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. Press down on the center of the booster cushion to return it to the stowed position.

NOTE The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down.

CAUTION Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed.

60 02 Safety

WARNING Child safety locks Power child safety locks and Power child safety locks* help prevent chil- disengaging rear door windows* DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can dren from inadvertently opening one of the occur rear doors or windows from inside the vehicle. 02 Follow all instructions on the Manual child safety locks booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with children whose height and weight are Driver's door control panel within the permitted limits shown in the table (Integrated booster cushion – The power child safety locks can be acti- general information (p. 57)). G021077 vated/deactivated when the remote key is in I • In the event of a collision while the mode (p. 79) or higher. Activation/deacti- integrated booster cushion was occu- Child safety locks – rear doors vation can be done up to 2 minutes after the pied, the entire booster cushion and The controls are located on the rear door engine has been switched off (if no door has seat belt must be replaced. The jambs. Use the remote control's key blade or been opened). booster cushion should also be a screwdriver to adjust these controls. To activate the child safety locks: replaced if it is badly worn or damaged The rear doors can only be opened from 1. Put the ignition in mode I or higher, or in any way. This work should be per- the outside when the slot is in the hori- formed by a trained and qualified start the engine. zontal position. Volvo service technician only. 2. Press the button on the driver's door con- The rear doors can be opened from the trol panel (see the illustration). inside when the slot is in the vertical posi- Related information tion. > Rear child locks Activated will be • Integrated booster cushion – using (p. 59) displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is activated. When the child safety locks are activated:

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61 02 Safety

|| • The rear door windows can only be opened from the driver's door control panel • The rear doors cannot be opened from 02 the inside The child safety locks' current setting is stored when the engine is switched off. If these locks were activated when the engine was switched off, they will also be active when the engine is restarted. Related information • Detachable key blade – general information (p. 155) • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164)

62 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 03 Instruments and controls

Instrument overview This overview shows the location of the instrument panel and center console displays, and controls/buttons/switches.

64 03 Instruments and controls

}} 65 03 Instruments and controls

66 03 Instruments and controls

Function See Function See Function See

Controls for menus (p. 76), In-door control pan- (p. 100), Lighting panel, but- (p. 89), and messages, turn (p. 95), els (power windows, (p. 102), tons for opening fuel (p. 278), signals, high/low (p. 89), mirrors, central lock- (p. 164), filler door and (p. 166) beams, trip computer (p. 115) ing button, power (p. 61) unlocking the tailgate child safety locks) Paddles for manually (p. 254) Power seat* adjust- (p. 81) shifting gears* Hazard warning (p. 94) ment controls flashers 03 Cruise control (p. 181) Related information Controls for the info- (p. 76), Information displays – ambient tempera- Horn, airbag (p. 87), • tainment system and (p. 129), ture sensor (p. 77) (p. 32) menus Sensus Info- tainment • Information displays – trip odometer and Main instrument (p. 68) supplement clock (p. 78) panel Climate system con- (p. 129) Infotainment system/ Sensus Info- trols Bluetooth hands-free tainment controls supplement Gear selector (p. 252)

START/STOP (p. 78) Controls for active (p. 174) ENGINE button chassis (Four-C)*

Ignition slot (p. 78) Wipers and washers (p. 98), (p. 99) Display for infotain- (p. 113), ment system func- Sensus Info- Steering wheel (p. 87) tions and menus tainment adjustment supplement Hood opening control (p. 328) Door handle - Parking brake (p. 269)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67 03 Instruments and controls

Information displays – introduction More detailed information can be found in the Tachometer: Shows engine speed in The displays show information on some of the descriptions of the functions that use the thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm) vehicle's functions, such as cruise control, the information displays. Gear indicator: Shows the currently trip computer and messages. The information Gauges and indicators: analog selected gear is shown with text and symbols. instrument panel Gauges and indicators: digital instrument panel* Different themes (display alternatives) can be 03 selected for the digital instrument panel: • Elegance • Eco • Performance To change themes, press the OK button on the left steering wheel lever and use the thumb wheel to scroll to Themes. Press OK to confirm your choice.

Information displays: analog instrument panel Fuel gauge: When the indicator shows one white marking1, a yellow indicator light will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See also Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) and Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276) for additional information. Eco meter: Indicates how economically the vehicle is being driven. The higher the needle moves on the scale, the more economically the vehicle is being driven. Speedometer

Information displays: digital instrument panel*

1 When the message Distance to empty fuel tank: shows "----", the marker turns red

68 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Theme Elegance: gauges and indicators Theme Eco: gauges and indicators Theme Performance: gauges and indicators Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a Fuel gauge. When the indicator shows a one white marking, a yellow indicator light white marking, a yellow indicator light will white marking, a yellow indicator light will will illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See illuminate to indicate a low fuel level. See See also Trip computer – introduction also Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) also Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) (p. 115) and Refueling – fuel require- and Refueling – fuel requirements and Refueling – fuel requirements ments (p. 276) for additional information. (p. 276) for additional information. (p. 276) for additional information. Coolant temperature gauge Eco Guide (see Eco Guide* and Power Coolant temperature gauge Meter* (p. 71)) Speedometer Speedometer Speedometer Tachometer (engine speed in thousands Tachometer (shows engine speed in of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Tachometer (engine speed in thousands thousands of revolutions per minute of revolutions per minute (rpm)) Gear indicator: Shows the currently (rpm)) selected gear Gear indicator: Shows the currently Power Meter (see Eco Guide* and Power selected gear Meter* (p. 71)). Gear indicator: Shows the currently selected gear

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 69 03 Instruments and controls

|| Indicator and warning symbols Some of the symbols shown may not be available in all markets or models. Related information • Instrument overview (p. 64) • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 72) • Information displays – warning symbols 03 (p. 74)

Indicator and warning symbols: digital instrument Indicator and warning symbols: analog instru- panel ment panel Indicator symbols Indicator symbols Indicator and warning symbols Indicator and warning symbols Warning symbols Warning symbols Function check All indicator and warning symbols light up in ignition mode II or when the engine is started. When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the function check is carried out in ignition mode II, all symbols go out after 5 seconds except the malfunction indicator light, which may indicate a fault in the vehicle's emissions system, and the symbol for low oil pressure.

70 03 Instruments and controls

Eco Guide* and Power Meter* Average Eco guide and Power guide are two gauges in The average reading changes gradually the instrument panel that help improve driving according to changes in the current reading economy. to indicate how economically the vehicle has been driven recently. The higher the average The vehicle also stores driving-related statis- reading, the more economically the vehicle tics in the form of a bar graph, see Trip com- has been driven. puter – Trip statistics (p. 123). Power Meter Introduction This gauge indicates the engine power that 03 To display or remove these functions from the has been utilized and the amount of power instrument panel, select the "Eco" theme (see remaining. Information displays – introduction (p. 68)). Current (instantaneous) reading Driving statistics are also stored and can be displayed in the form of a bar chart (see Trip Average computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)). Current (instantaneous) reading Eco Guide This is the current level of economical driving; This gauge gives an indication of how eco- the higher the reading, the more economically nomically the vehicle is being driven. the vehicle is being driven. This value is calculated based on the vehicle's speed, engine speed (rpm), engine load and brake use. The optimal speed range is between approximately 30–50 mph (50–80 km/h), preferably at Available power as low rpm as possible. The markers fall when the brake or accelerator pedal is Utilized power pressed. If the current reading is very low, the red field in the gauge will illuminate after a slight delay, indicating low driving economy.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71 03 Instruments and controls

|| Available power Information displays – indicator Symbol Description The smaller, upper indicator shows the symbols engine's available power2. The higher the The indicator symbols alert the driver when Left turn signal indicator reading on the scale, the greater the amount certain functions are activated, that a system of power remaining in the current gear. is actively working or that a fault may have Right turn signal indicator Utilized power occurred in a system or function. The larger, lower indicator shows the amount Tire pressure monitoring sensor 2 Symbol Description of engine power that has been utilized . The (TPMS)A 03 higher the reading on the scale, the greater Fault in the Active Bending The Eco function is on. the amount of power that is being utilized. Light (ABL)*system The larger the gap between the two indicators, the greater the amount of power remain- Malfunction indicator light TheStart/Stop function is active ing. (the engine has auto-stopped)

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) A Option in Canada

Rear fog lights on Fault in the Active Bending Light (ABL) system Stability system This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the ABL system. See Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 92) for more information about The stability system's Sport this system. mode is activated

Low fuel level

Information symbol, read the text displayed in the instrument panel

High beam indicator

2 Depending on rpm

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Malfunction Indicator Light 3. If the warning light goes off, no further pressing the OK button (see Information dis- As you drive, a computer called On-Board action is required. play – menu controls (p. 113) for information) or this will take place automatically after a Diagnostics II (OBDII) monitors your vehicle's If the indicator light remains on, the vehicle short time (the length of time varies, depend- engine, transmission, electrical and emission should be driven to a trained and qualified ing on the function affected). systems. Volvo service technician for inspection, see The malfunction indicator light will illuminate if Brakes – general (p. 266) for additional infor- The information symbol may also illuminate the computer senses a condition that poten- mation. together with other symbols. tially may need correcting. When this hap- Rear fog lights High beam indicator pens, please have your vehicle checked by a This symbol indicates that the rear fog lights This symbol illuminates when the high beam 03 trained and qualified Volvo service technician are on. headlights are on, or if the high beam flash as soon as possible. Stability system function is used. A malfunction indicator light may have many This indicator symbol flashes when the stabil- Left turn signal indicator causes. Sometimes, you may not notice a ity system is actively working to stabilize the Right turn signal indicator change in your car's behavior. Even so, an vehicle, see Stability system – introduction uncorrected condition could hurt fuel econ- (p. 174) for more detailed information. omy, emission controls, and drivability. NOTE Stability system - Sport mode Extended driving without correcting the cause • Both turn signal indicators will flash could even damage other components in This symbol illuminates to indicate that the stability system's Sport mode has been acti- when the hazard warning flashers are your vehicle. used. vated to help provide maximum tractive force, This light may illuminate if the fuel filler cap is for example when driving with snow chains, • If either of these indicators flash faster not closed tightly or if the engine was running or driving in deep snow or loose sand. than normal, the direction indicators while the vehicle was refueled. are not functioning properly. Low fuel level Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) When this light comes on, the vehicle should If the warning light comes on, there may be a be refueled as soon as possible. See Refuel- Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction in the ABS system (the standard ing – fuel requirements (p. 276) for informa- (TPMS)* braking system will still function). Check the tion about fuel and refueling. This symbol illuminates to indicate that tire system by: Information symbol pressure in one or more tires is low, see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – general 1. Stopping in a safe place and switching off The information symbol lights up and a text information (p. 307) for detailed information. the ignition. message is displayed to provide the driver Eco* function on 2. Restart the engine. with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. The message can be The symbol will illuminate when the Eco func- erased and the symbol can be turned off by tion is activated.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 03 Instruments and controls

|| Start/stop* Information displays – warning sary. If the oil level is normal and the light The symbol illuminates when the engine has symbols stays on after restart, have the vehicle towed auto-stopped. The warning lights alert the driver that an to the nearest trained and qualified Volvo important function is activated or that a seri- service technician. Related information ous fault has occurred. Parking brake applied • Information displays – introduction (p. 68) This symbol flashes while the brake is being • Information displays – warning symbols Symbol Description applied and then glows steadily when the (p. 74) parking brake has been set. Low oil pressureA 03 See Parking brake – general information (p. 269) for more information about using the B Parking brake applied parking brake. Airbags – SRS SRS airbags If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on for longer than Seat belt reminder approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has been started, the SRS system's diagnos- Generator not charging tic functions have detected a fault in a seat belt lock or pretensioner, a front airbag, side impact airbag, and/or an inflatable curtain. Fault in the brake system Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as Warning symbol, read the text soon as possible. displayed in the instrument panel See Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) (p. 31) for more information about the airbag A Certain engines do not use this symbol to indicate low oil system. pressure. On these models, a text message will be displayed on the instrument panel instead, see Engine com- Seat belt reminder partment – engine oil (p. 330). B The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital This symbol comes on for approximately instrument panel. 6 seconds if the driver has not fastened his or her seat belt. Low oil pressure If the light comes on while driving, stop the vehicle, stop the engine immediately, and check the engine oil level. Add oil if neces-

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Generator not charging If the and symbols come on WARNING This symbol comes on during driving if a fault at the same time, there may be a fault in the has occurred in the electrical system. Contact • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark brake force distribution system. an authorized Volvo workshop. in the reservoir or if a warning mes- 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn sage is displayed in the text window: Engine temperature DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle off the engine. Engine overheating can result from low oil or towed to a trained and qualified Volvo coolant levels, towing or hard driving at high 2. Restart the engine. service technician and have the brake heat and altitude, or mechanical malfunction. system inspected. • If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- Engine overheating will be signaled with text ing. • 03 and a red warning triangle in the middle of the If the and symbols instrument display. The exact text will depend • If the symbols remain on, check the level are on at the same time, there is a risk on the degree of overheating. It may range in the brake fluid reservoir, see Engine of reduced vehicle stability. from High engine temp Reduce speed to compartment – brake fluid (p. 333). If the brake fluid level is normal but the sym- High engine temp Stop engine. If appropri- bols are still lit, the vehicle can be driven, Warning symbol ate, other messages, such as Coolant level with great care, to an authorized Volvo The red warning symbol lights up to indicate low, Stop safely will also be displayed. If workshop to have the brake system a problem related to safety and/or drivability. your engine does overheat so that you must checked. A message will also appear in the instrument stop the engine, always allow the engine to MIN panel. The symbol remains visible until the cool before attempting to check oil and cool- • If the level in the reservoir is below , the vehicle should be transported to an fault has been rectified but the text message ant levels. authorized Volvo workshop to have the can be cleared with the OK button, see Infor- See Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332) brake system checked. mation display – menu controls (p. 113). The for more information. warning symbol can also come on in conjunc- tion with other symbols. Fault in brake system If this symbol lights, the brake fluid level may Action: be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the and check the level in the brake fluid reser- vehicle further. voir, see Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 333). If the level in the reservoir is below 2. Read the information on the display. MIN, the vehicle should be transported to an Implement the action in accordance with authorized Volvo workshop to have the brake the message in the display. Clear the system checked. message using OK.

}} 75 03 Instruments and controls

|| Reminder – doors not closed Related information My Car – introduction If one of the doors is not closed properly, the • Information displays – introduction (p. 68) The MY CAR menu system provides access information or warning symbol illuminates • Information displays – indicator symbols to menus for operating many of the vehicle's (depending on the vehicle's speed), a graphic (p. 72) functions, such as setting the clock, door mir- will be displayed in instrument panel and an rors, lock and alarm settings, etc. explanatory text message3 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehi- Some of the features or functions are stand- cle in a safe place as soon as possible and ard; others are optional and vary according to model/market. 03 close the door. If the vehicle is driven at a speed Operation lower than approximately 5 mph Use the buttons on the center console or the (7 km/h), the information symbol illu- steering wheel keypad to navigate in the minates. menus. If the vehicle is driven at a speed higher than approximately 5 mph (7 km/h), the warning symbol illuminates. If the hood is not closed properly, the warning symbol illuminates, a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel and an explanatory text message3 will also be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the hood. If the tailgate is not closed properly, the information symbol illuminates and a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the tailgate.

3 Text message applies only to models with the optional digital instrument panel

76 03 Instruments and controls

OK/MENU: Press the button on the cen- Information displays – ambient ter console or the thumb wheel on the temperature sensor steering wheel keypad to select a menu alternative or to store a selected function in the system's memory. TUNE: Turn this control on the center console or the thumb wheel on the steering wheel keypad to navigate up/down in a menu. 03 EXIT

EXIT functions Depending on which function the cursor is pointing to and the menu level, briefly pressing EXIT will result in: Location of the ambient temperature sensor, A: • An in-coming phone call will be rejected digital instrument panel*, B: analog instrument panel • The current function will be cancelled • Characters entered will be erased NOTE • The most recent selection will be cancel- When the ambient temperature is between led 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake • Go back/up in the menu system symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning Pressing and holding EXIT takes you to the for possible slippery road surfaces. Please normal view for MY CAR. If you are already in note that this symbol does not indicate a normal view, this will take you to the main fault with your vehicle. source menu. At low speeds or when the vehicle is not Menu selections and paths moving, the temperature readings may be The center console control panel and the steer- slightly higher than the actual ambient ing wheel keypad. The illustration is generic and Please consult your Sensus Infotainment sup- temperature. the appearance/location of the buttons may vary. plement for a description of the MY CAR MY CAR: opens the MY CAR menu sys- menu selections and paths. tem. Related information • Information displays – introduction (p. 68)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 03 Instruments and controls

Information displays – trip odometer Clock Inserting/removing remote key and clock The remote key is used to start the engine or The trip odometers T1 and T2 and clock are to use various electrical functions without displayed in the instrument panel. starting the engine. Trip odometers Inserting and removing the remote key

Clock, digital instrument panel* Display6 Setting the clock The clock can be set in the MY CAR menu Trip odometer4 system. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for Ignition slot with remote key and START/STOP additional information about these menus. ENGINE button. Odometer display Go to Settings System options Time Inserting the remote key7 Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering settings. Set Auto time to ON (check the Holding the end of the remote key with the wheel lever to display the desired trip odome- box) and select the correct time zone under base of the key blade, insert the remote key ter. Location. into the ignition slot as shown in the illustra- Press and hold the RESET button on the left tion and press it in as far as possible. steering wheel lever for at least 1 second to Related information reset the selected trip odometer5. • Information displays – introduction (p. 68) CAUTION Foreign objects in the ignition slot can impair function or cause damage.

4 The trip odometer will be displayed differently in analog and digital instrument panels 5 Models with a digital information panel: press and hold RESET for more than approximately 4 seconds to reset all trip computer information 6 Models with an analog instrument panel: the time will be displayed in the center of the instrument panel 7 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Removing the remote key Ignition modes Mode Function The remote key can be removed from the The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II ignition slot by pulling it out. that can be used without starting the engine. 0 The odometer, clock and tem- The following table shows examples of which perature gauge are illuminated. Related information functions are available in the respective Power seats* can be adjusted • Ignition modes (p. 79) modes. and the infotainment system can be used for a limited time (to min- NOTE imize battery drain, see the Sen- sus Infotainment Supplement). To access ignition modes I or II without 03 starting the engine, the brake pedal must I The laminated panoramic roof, not be depressed. power windows,12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment, navigation system*, climate system blower, windshield wipers can be used.

II The headlights/taillights illuminate. Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds. Other systems are activated. However, the heated seats* and heated rear window function can only be activated when the engine is running. Mode II should only be used for very short periods to help avoid draining the battery.

Ignition modes Ignition mode 0 – The vehicle is unlocked.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 03 Instruments and controls

|| Ignition mode I Front seats WARNING – With the remote key fully pressed into the The front seats can be adjusted in a number Do not adjust the seat while driving. ignition slot8, press START/STOP of ways to help provide the most comfortable • The seat should be adjusted so that ENGINE briefly. seating position. the brake pedal can be depressed Ignition mode II fully. In addition, position the seat as – With the remote key fully pressed into the far rearward as comfort and control ignition slot8, press START/STOP allow. ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds. • Check that the seat is securely locked 03 Returning to mode 0 into position after adjusting. To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, press START/STOP ENGINE briefly. Related information • Front seats – power seat (p. 81) Starting and stopping the engine See Starting the engine (p. 247) and Switch- • Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86) ing off the engine (p. 249) for information on • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84) starting the engine and switching it off. Emergency towing Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. See Towing the vehicle (p. 285) for important Front-rear adjustment: lift the bar and information about the remote key when the move the seat to the position of your vehicle is being towed. choice. Related information Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion, • Inserting/removing remote key (p. 78) pump up/down. Backrest tilt: turn the control to adjust the angle of the backrest. Electronic lumbar support*. Press the button to adjust. Control panel for power seat*, see Front seats – power seat (p. 81).

8 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

80 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Front seats – folding backrest*10 Without releasing the catches, push the Front seats – power seat12 The front passenger's seat backrest can be backrest forward. The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short folded down to make it easier to transport Move the seat as far forward as possible period after unlocking the door with the long objects. so that the head restraint slides under the remote control without the key in the ignition glove compartment. slot. Seat adjustment is normally made when the ignition is on and can always be made Return the seat to its upright position in the when the engine is running. reverse order. Power seat WARNING 03 • When transporting long objects, cover sharp edges on the load to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • When the seat's backrest is returned to the upright position, push and pull it The front passenger seat backrest can be to be sure that it is securely locked in folded to a horizontal position to make room this position. for a long load. Fold the backrest as follows: Move the seat as far back and down as Related information Power seat adjustment controls possible. • Front seats (p. 80) Front edge of seat cushion up/down Adjust the backrest to an upright position. • Front seats – power seat (p. 81) Raise/lower the seat • Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86) Lift the catches on the rear of the back- Seat forward/rearward rest. • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84) Backrest tilt

Electronic lumbar support*

10 The front passenger's seat backrest on models equipped with the optional sport seat cannot be folded down 12 Optional on certain models }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81 03 Instruments and controls

|| Operation Programming the seat's memory Heated seats* Three different seating and door mirror posi- See Heated seats (p. 130). NOTE tions can be stored in the driver seat's memory. Related information • Only one of the power seat's controls • Front seats (p. 80) can be used at the same time. The following example explains how button Rear seats – folding backrest (p. 86) (1) can be programmed. Buttons (2) and (3) • The power seats have an overload • • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84) protector that activates if a seat is are programmed in the same way. blocked by any object. If this occurs, To program (store) a seat and door mirror 03 switch off the ignition (key in posi- position in button (1): tion 0) and wait for a short period before operating the seat again. 1. Move the seat (and door mirrors) to the desired positions using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. Power seat memory function 2. Press and hold down the M (memory) button (4). 3. With the memory button depressed, press button (1) briefly to store the current position for the seat/mirrors. To move the seat and mirrors to the position that they were in when a button was programmed: – Press and hold down button (1) until the seat and mirrors stop moving.

Power seat memory buttons NOTE Button for storing a position As a safety precaution, the seat will stop automatically if the button is released Button for storing a position before the seat has reached the preset position. Button for storing a position

M (memory) button

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Key memory – power driver's seat* 3. To activate the remote key memory fea- NOTE and door mirrors ture, press ENTER (check the box). The remote key's memory feature and the Each remote key has a memory that enables it > The remote key is now ready to store power driver's seat memory function (the to store (remember) the position of the power the position of the power driver's seat settings made using the buttons on the driver's seat and door mirrors when the vehi- and door mirrors. side of the seat, see the section "Power cle is locked with that remote key. Repeat this procedure for each of the vehi- seat memory function" in Front seats – power seat (p. 81)) work independently of Remote key memory and the power cle's remote keys. each other. 13 See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for a driver's seat* and door mirrors 03 description of the menu system. Storing the positions of the power driver's seat/mirrors in the remote key 1. Move the seat and door mirrors to the desired position using the seat and mirror adjustment controls. 2. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors with the remote key (or close the driver's door and press the lock button on the door handle with the remote key in your possession on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). The key memory has to be activated for each > The positions of the power driver's of the remote keys used in the vehicle as seat and door mirrors are now stored follows: in the remote key's memory. 1. Insert a remote key in the ignition slot. 2. Go into the MY CAR menu and go to Settings Car settings Car key memory

13 This information also applies to vehicles with the optional keyless drive. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83 03 Instruments and controls

|| Returning the seat/mirrors to the stored Emergency stop Rear seats – head restraints positions The rear seat head restraints can be folded To move the seat and door mirrors to the WARNING down. The center head restraint can be position stored in the remote key: raised/lowered according to the passenger's Because the driver's seat can be • height. 1. Unlock the driver's door with the same adjusted with the ignition off, children remote key (the one used to lock the should never be left unattended in the Rear center head restraint doors). For models equipped with the vehicle. optional keyless drive, you must have the • Movement of the seat can be STOP- 03 same remote key in your possession. PED at any time by pressing any but- 2. Open the driver's door within 2 minutes. ton on the power seat control panel. Do not adjust the seat while driving. The driver's seat and door mirrors will auto- • The seat should be adjusted so that matically move to the position in which you the brake pedal can be depressed left them (if the vehicle has been unlocked fully. In addition, position the seat as with one of the other keys and new seat/ far rearward as comfort and control mirror adjustments have been made). allow. The seat rails on the floor must not be NOTE • obstructed in any way when the seat is • The seat will move to this position in motion. even if someone else has moved it to a different position and locked the vehi- Related information cle with a different remote key. • Remote key – functions (p. 153) • This feature will work in the same way with all of the remote keys that you use with your vehicle.

84 03 Instruments and controls

The center head restraint should be adjusted Manually folding down the rear seat's CAUTION according to the passenger's height. The outboard head restraints restraint should be carefully adjusted to sup- The rear head restraints should not be port the occupant's head. kept folded down for prolonged periods. This could result in pressure marks in • Pull the head restraint up as required. leather upholstery. • To lower, press and hold the button (located at the center, between the back- WARNING rest and the head restraint) while pressing the head restrain down carefully. For safety reasons, no one should be 03 allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded WARNING down. If these positions are occupied, the The center rear seat head restraint should head restraints should be in the upright only be in its lowest position when this (fixed) position. seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint • Pull the handle closest to the head Automatically folding down the rear should be correctly adjusted to the pas- restraint to fold it down. senger’s height. The upper edge of the seat’s outboard head restraints head restraint should be at least on a level • To return the head restraint to the upright with the upper-most point of the seat position, push it up until it clicks into occupant's ear. place.

NOTE • The head restraint must be returned to the upright position manually. • The outboard head restraints cannot be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button.

1. The ignition must be in mode II. 2. Press the button to lower the rear head restraints for improved visibility.

}} 85 03 Instruments and controls

|| NOTE Rear seats – folding backrest The rear seat head restraints and backrests The head restraint must be returned to • can be folded down. The center head the upright position manually. restraint can be raised/lowered according to • The outboard head restraints cannot the passenger's height. be folded down on models that are not equipped with this button. Folding down the rear seat backrests The three sections of the rear seat backrest can be folded down in different combinations 03 CAUTION to make it easier to transport long objects. The rear head restraints should not be kept folded down for prolonged periods. • The left (driver's side) section can be This could result in pressure marks in folded down separately. leather upholstery. • The center section can be folded down separately. WARNING • The right (passenger's side) section can only be folded down together with the For safety reasons, no one should be center section. allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded • All three sections can be folded down together. down. If these positions are occupied, the Release and lower the center head head restraints should be in the upright restraint (see Rear seats – head restraints (fixed) position. CAUTION (p. 84)) if the center and/or right section of To help avoid damage to the upholstery, the backrest is to be lowered. The out- Related information there should be no objects on the rear seat board head restraints fold down automat- • Front seats (p. 80) and the seat belt should not be buckled ically. when the backrest is folded down. • Front seats – power seat (p. 81) Pull up the backrest release control on • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84) the respective section(s) ( ) and fold the section(s) down. A red indicator ( ) shows that the backrest is not locked in the upright position.

86 03 Instruments and controls

NOTE Related information Steering wheel • Front seats (p. 80) The steering wheel can be adjusted to various It may be necessary to move the front seats forward or put their backrests in a • Front seats – power seat (p. 81) positions and has controls for the horn, cruise more upright position before folding down • Rear seats – head restraints (p. 84) control*, menus, the infotainment system and the rear seat backrests. Bluetooth®-connected cell phone. Adjusting WARNING

• When one or more sections of the 03 backrest is returned to the upright position, check that it is properly locked in place by pushing and pulling it. The red indicators should also not be visible. • Return the outboard head restraints to the upright position. • Long loads should always be securely

anchored to help avoid injury in the G021138 event of a sudden stop. Adjusting the steering wheel • Always turn the engine off and apply the parking brake when loading/ Lever for releasing/locking the steering unloading the vehicle. wheel • Place the transmission in the Park (P) Possible positions position to help prevent inadvertent To adjust the steering wheel's height and movement of the gear selector. reach: • On hot days, the temperature in the 1. Pull the lever toward you to release the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of people to these high tem- steering wheel. peratures for even a short period of 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position time can cause heat-related injury or that suits you. death. Small children are particularly at risk.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 03 Instruments and controls

|| 3. Push back the lever to lock the steering control*, see Adaptive Cruise Control – Electrically heated* steering wheel wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to introduction (p. 184). The steering wheel can be heated electrically. push into place, press the steering wheel Paddles for manually shifting gears (Gear- lightly at the same time as you push the tronic), see Transmission – Geartronic lever. (p. 254). WARNING Infotainment system controls, see Sensus Infotainment supplement. Never adjust the steering wheel while driv- 03 ing. Horn

With the optional speed-dependent power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted, see Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 174). Keypads and steering wheel paddles* Button for steering wheel heating With the engine running, press this button once to begin warming the steering wheel (press again to switch off). The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the function is active. Horn This function can also be started automati- – Press the steering wheel hub to sound cally (the setting can be activated/deactivated the horn. in the MY CAR menu) if the vehicle is cold and the ambient temperature is below Related information approximately 50° F (10° C). • Electrically heated* steering wheel (p. 88) Steering wheel keypads and paddles* Cruise control, see Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181). Adaptive cruise

88 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel With the headlight switch in the NOTE The lighting panel is used to control the day- position: The use of Daytime Running Lights is rec- time running lights, parking lights, etc., and to ommended in the United States and is In the US: the daytime running lights will adjust the instrument panel lighting and "the- • mandatory in Canada. ater" lighting (p. 93). be off • In Canada: the daytime running lights will be on With the headlight switch in the position: With the headlight switch in the 16 03 position and the ignition in mode II or if the • The daytime running lights will be off and engine is running (see Ignition modes (p. 79)) the low beam headlights will be on • In the US: the daytime running lights will be off • In Canada: the daytime running lights will be on

With the headlight switch in the posi- Lighting panel overview tion: Thumb wheel for adjusting display, instru- • The daytime running lights will be on (the ment and "theater" lighting (see Instru- low beam headlights will automatically ment and "theater" lighting (p. 93)) switch on in dark conditions) Rear fog lights (see Rear fog lights US models only: The daytime running lights (p. 94)) in mode can be switched on or off in Headlight switch the MY CAR menu system under Settings Car settings Light settings Daytime Volvo recommends using the posi- running lights. tion whenever possible. Headlight switch positions Daytime running lights function as follows:

16 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off.

89 03 Instruments and controls

High/low beam headlights High beam flash Active high beams (AHB)* When the engine is started, the low beams Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to AHB uses a camera at the upper edge of the are activated automatically if the headlight position 1. The high beams come on until the windshield to detect the headlights of oncom- control is in position . lever is released. ing vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens, the head- Related information lights will automatically switch from high • Active Bending Lights (ABL)* (p. 92) beams to low beams. When the camera no • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90) longer detects the headlights/taillights of 03 • Lighting panel (p. 89) other vehicles, your headlights will switch • Tunnel detection (models with the rain back to high beams after several seconds. sensor* only) (p. 92) To activate AHB: • Turn the headlight control to the position. The feature will begin functioning if the engine has been running for at least 20 seconds and the vehicle's speed is at least 12 mph Headlight switch and steering wheel lever (20 km/h). High beam flash

Toggle between high and low beams

Continuous high beam headlights With the headlight switch in the (in dark conditions only, when the daytime running lights have automatically switched off and the low beam headlights have switched on) or position: • Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to position 2 and release it to toggle between low and high beams. Headlight switch in the AUTO position

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Switch AHB on or off by pulling the left steer- NOTE CAUTION ing wheel lever rearward (toward the steering wheel) as far as possible and releasing it. If • Keep the windshield in front of the In the following situations, it may be nec- AHB is switched off while the high beams are camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. essary to switch between high and low beams manually: on, the headlights will change to low beams. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could • In heavy fog or rain obstruct the camera. • In blowing snow or slush • In bright moonlight Active high beam Temporary If • In freezing rain 03 unavailable Switch manually is displayed in the instrument panel, switching between high • In areas with dim street lighting and low beams will have to be done man- • When oncoming vehicles have dim ually. However, the light switch can remain in front lighting the position. The same applies if • If there are pedestrians on or near the Windscreen Sensors blocked is displayed road and the symbol is displayed. The • If there are reflective objects, such as symbol will go out when these messages are signs, near the road Models with an analog instrument panel displayed. • When oncoming vehicles' lights are obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. When AHB is activated, the symbol will AHB may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in illuminate in the instrument panel. The high heavy fog or rain). When AHB becomes active • When there are vehicles on connecting again or if the sensors in the windshield are roads beam indicator ( ) in the instrument panel no longer obscured, the messages will disap- will also illuminate when the high beams are • At the top of hills or in dips in the road on. pear and the symbol will illuminate. • In sharp curves Models with a digital instrument panel When AHB is activated, will illuminate See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for as a white symbol in the instrument panel. more information about the camera's limita- When the high beams are on, the symbol will tions. blue. change to Related information • High/low beam headlights (p. 90) • Lighting panel (p. 89)

91 03 Instruments and controls

Tunnel detection (models with the rain Active Bending Lights (ABL)* NOTE sensor* only) With ABL activated, the headlight beams This function is only active in twilight or For models without automatic low beams, adjust laterally to help light up a curve dark conditions, and only when the vehicle tunnel detection activates the low beams according to movements of the steering is in motion. when the vehicle enters a tunnel. The low wheel (see the right-pointing beam in the fol- beams are switched off approx. 20 seconds lowing illustration). If a fault should occur in the system, the sym- after the vehicle leaves the tunnel. bol will illuminate and a message will be dis- The rain sensor reacts to the change in light- played as shown in the table. 03 ing conditions when, for example, the vehicle enters a tunnel and the tunnel detection fea- Symbol Display Explanation ture will then activate the low beam headlights. The low beams will be switched off Headlamp The system is approx. 20 seconds after the vehicle leaves failure not functioning the tunnel. Service properly and required should be The rain sensor does not have to be activated inspected/ for tunnel detection to function. repaired by a Related information trained and • Lighting panel (p. 89) Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light qualified Volvo function deactivated (left) and activated (right) service techni- • High/low beam headlights (p. 90) cian. ABL is activated automatically17 when the engine is started. Related information The function can be deactivated/reactivated • Lighting panel (p. 89) in the MY CAR menu system under My XC60 • High/low beam headlights (p. 90) Active Bending Lights or under Settings • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90) Car settings Light settings Active Bending Lights. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

17 The factory default setting is on.

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Auxiliary lights* Instrument and "theater" lighting Parking lights If the vehicle is fitted with auxiliary lights, the Turn the headlight switch to the posi- Instrument lighting driver can use the MY CAR menu system to tion (the license plate lighting comes on at the Illumination of the display and instrument choose to deactivate and turn these lights on same time). and off along with the high beam headlights. lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. The display lighting is automatically subdued The auxiliary lights must be connected to the in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the vehicle's electrical system, which should only thumb wheel. be done by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. See My Car – introduction The intensity of the instrument lighting is 03 (p. 76) for more information about the menu adjusted with the thumb wheel. system. "Theater" lighting When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone out and the engine is running, several LEDs located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting for the occupants of the front seats. This lighting goes out just after the overhead courtesy lighting when the Headlight switch in the parking light position vehicle is locked. Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II or the engine is running, the daytime run- Related information ning lights will also be on. • Lighting panel (p. 89) With the headlight switch in this position, the • Front interior lighting (p. 96) parking lights will remain on even when the • Rear interior lighting (p. 97) ignition is switched off. • Ignition modes (p. 79) In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle. This happens regardless of the position that the headlight control is in or which mode the ignition is in. Related information • Lighting panel (p. 89)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 03 Instruments and controls

Rear fog lights NOTE Hazard warning flashers The rear fog lights are considerably brighter The hazard warning flasher should be used to The rear fog lights are considerably than the normal taillights and should be used • indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic brighter than the normal taillights and only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, hazard. should be used only when conditions smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehi- such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust When the function is activated, both turn sig- cles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). reduce visibility for other vehicles to nal indicators in the instrument panel will less than 500 ft. (150 meters). flash. • Condensation may form temporarily on 03 the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time.

Related information • Lighting panel (p. 89) The rear fog lights will only function in combination with the high/low beam headlights. Location of the hazard warning flasher button – Press the button to switch the rear fog – To activate the flashers, press the button lights on/off. in the center dash. Press the button again > The rear fog light indicator symbol to turn off the flashers. on the instrument panel and the NOTE light in the button illuminate when the rear fog lights are switched on. • Regulations regarding the use of the hazard warning flasher may vary, depending on where you live. • The hazard warning flashers will be activated automatically if an airbag deploys.

94 03 Instruments and controls

Related information Turn signals NOTE • Turn signals (p. 95) The turn signals are controlled by the left This automatic flashing sequence can steering wheel lever. • be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. • If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb.

03 Related information • Hazard warning flashers (p. 94)

Turn signals When changing lanes The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by moving the turn signal lever up or down to the first position and releasing it. When turning Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the lever can be returned to its initial position by hand.

95 03 Instruments and controls

Front interior lighting Overhead courtesy lighting Related information The lighting in the front part of the passenger The passenger compartment lighting is • Rear interior lighting (p. 97) compartment is controlled with the buttons in switched on and off automatically when but- the ceiling console. ton (3) is in the neutral position. The lighting comes on and remains on for 30 seconds if: • the vehicle is unlocked from the outside with the key or remote control 03 • the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode 0. The lighting switches off when: • the engine is started • the vehicle is locked from the outside.

G021149 The lighting comes on and remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. Light switches, front roof lighting The passenger compartment lighting can be Drivers side front reading light, on/off switched on and off manually within Passenger's side front reading light, 30 minutes after the vehicle has been on/off unlocked. Overhead courtesy lighting. If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will Switch (3) has three positions for all passen- switch off automatically after one minute. ger compartment lighting: Courtesy lights/door step lighting* • Off: right side depressed, automatic light- The courtesy lights/door step lighting switch ing off. on/off automatically when one of the front • Neutral position: automatic lighting is doors is opened/closed. on. Glove compartment lighting • On – left side depressed, passenger The glove compartment lighting switches compartment lighting on. on/off automatically when the lid is opened/ closed.

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Rear interior lighting Home safe lighting Approach lighting The lights are switched on or off by pressing When you leave your vehicle at night, you can Approach lighting activates the parking lights, each respective button. make use of the home safe lighting function door mirror lights, license plate lighting, dome to illuminate the area in front of the vehicle. lighting and door step lighting when you approach the vehicle. This function illuminates the headlights, parking lights, lights in the door mirrors, license This function is activated by pressing the plate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell approach light button on the remote key (see lighting. These lights will remain on for 30 18, the illustration in Remote key – functions 03 60 or 90 seconds. The time interval can be (p. 153)). set in MY CAR under Settings Car The time interval for this lighting can be set settings Light settings Home safe by pressing MY CAR and going to Car light duration. See My Car – introduction settings Light settings Approach light (p. 76) for a description of the menu system. duration. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) 1. Remove the key from the ignition slot to for a description of the menu system. 0 Rear reading lights put the ignition in mode (see Ignition Related information modes (p. 79) for information about the Home safe lighting (p. 97) Cargo area lighting ignition modes). • The cargo area lighting comes on automati- 2. Pull the turn signal lever as far as possible cally when the tailgate is opened. towards the steering wheel and release it. Related information 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. • Front interior lighting (p. 96) Related information • Approach lighting (p. 97)

18 Factory setting

97 03 Instruments and controls

Windshield wipers Windshield wipers off Rain sensor* Move the lever toward the steering wheel to Move the lever to position 0 to The rain sensor automatically regulates wiper start the windshield and headlight washers. switch off the windshield wipers. speed according to the amount of water on After the lever is released the wipers make Single sweep the windshield. several extra sweeps. Move the lever upward from posi- The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be tion 0 to sweep the windshield one adjusted moving the thumb wheel up (the stroke at a time for as long as the wipers will sweep the windshield more fre- lever is held up. quently) or down (the wipers will sweep the 03 Intermittent wiping windshield less frequently). With the lever in this position, you can set the wiper interval by twisting NOTE the thumb wheel upward to increase The wipers will make an extra sweep each wiper speed or downward to decrease the time the thumb wheel is adjusted upward. speed. Continuous wiping When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol The wipers operate at normal will illuminate in the instrument panel. speed. Windshield wipers and washers Activating and setting the sensitivity The wipers operate at high speed. Rain sensor* on/off When activating the rain sensor, the vehicle must be running or in ignition mode II and the Thumb wheel sensitivity/frequency Windshield wiper service position windshield wiper lever must be in position 0 The windshield wipers must be in the service or in the single sweep position. CAUTION position before the wiper blades can be cleaned or replaced. See Wiper blades – Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but- • Use ample washer fluid when washing service position (p. 343) for additional infor- ton . The windshield wipers will make the windshield. The windshield should mation. one sweep. be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Related information Press the lever up for the wipers to make an extra sweep. The rain sensor returns to active Engine compartment – washer fluid • Before using the wipers, ice and snow • mode when the stalk is released back to should be removed from the wind- (p. 345) position 0. shield/rear window. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place.

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Deactivating Windshield washer every five times the windshield is washed Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the Move the lever toward the steering wheel to within a 10-minute period. button or press the lever down to start the windshield and headlight washers. • Parking lights on. Optional Active Bend- another wiper position. After the lever is released the wipers make ing Lights will be washed once for every several extra sweeps. five times the windshield is washed. Nor- The rain sensor is automatically deactivated mal halogen headlights will not be when the key is removed from the ignition washed. slot or five minutes after the ignition has been switched off. CAUTION 03 CAUTION • Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should The rain sensor should be deactivated be thoroughly wet when the wipers are when washing the car in an automatic car in operation. wash, etc. If the rain sensor function is left on, the wipers will start inadvertently in the • When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of car wash and could be damaged. washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no longer be washed. A text message will also be displayed to remind the driver to fill the Washing function washer fluid reservoir. Heated washer nozzles* The washer nozzles are heated automatically Related information in cold weather to help prevent the washer • Engine compartment – washer fluid fluid from freezing. (p. 345) High-pressure headlight washing* High-pressure headlight washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlights are washed using two alternatives: • Low/high beam headlights on. The headlights will be washed the first time the windshield is washed. Thereafter, the headlights will only be washed once for

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 03 Instruments and controls

Tailgate wiper/washer Tailgate wiper and reverse gear Power windows The tailgate wiper operates at two speeds: If the windshield wipers are on and the trans- All power windows can be operated using the intermittent and continuous. mission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate control panel in the driver's door. The control wiper will go into intermittent wiping func- panels in the other doors only operate the tion19. This function is deactivated when a dif- window in the respective doors. ferent gear is selected.

NOTE 03 On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining.

If the tailgate wiper is in the normal (continuous) wiping mode, selecting different gears Move the lever forward to start the tailgate will not affect its function. washer. Related information Intermittent wiping • Engine compartment – washer fluid Driver's door control panel Switch for power child safety locks* and Normal (continuous) wiping (p. 345) disengaging rear power window buttons, see Child safety locks (p. 61) NOTE Rear window controls The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off function, which means that it will not oper- Front window controls. ate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions).

19 Consult your Volvo retailer if you would like to have this function deactivated.

100 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

WARNING vehicle has been running, the power windows 3. Raise the front section of the button again can be operated for several minutes after the for one second. • Always remove the ignition key when remote key has been removed from the igni- the vehicle is unattended to put the tion slot, or until a door has been opened. Laminated glass* ignition in mode 0 (see Ignition modes This glass is reinforced to help pro- (p. 79) for information about the igni- NOTE vide protection against break-ins tion modes). and improved sound insulation in • Never leave children unattended in the • Movement of the windows will stop if the passenger compartment. vehicle. they are obstructed in any way. The windshield, laminated panoramic roof 03 • Make sure that the windows are com- • To reduce buffeting wind noise if the and other windows have laminated glass. pletely unobstructed before they are rear windows are opened, also open operated. the front windows slightly.

Operating Manual up/down – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Auto up/down – Move one of the controls up/down as far as possible and release it. > The window will open or close completely. Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the Operating the power windows auto open function must be reset so that it Manual up/down will work properly.

Auto up/down. 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for For the power windows to function, the igni- one second. tion must be in at least mode I. When the 2. Release the button briefly.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 03 Instruments and controls

Power door mirrors Retractable power door mirrors* To activate this function, select reverse gear The control on the driver's door is used to The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driv- and press the L or R mirror control button to adjust the position of the door mirrors. ing in narrow spaces: tilt the mirror down. 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the The function can be activated/deactivated in same time. MY CAR under Settings Car settings 2. Release them after approximately one Side mirror settings Tilt left mirror or Tilt second. The mirrors automatically stop in right mirror. See My Car – introduction the fully retracted position. (p. 76) for a description of the menu system. 03 Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L The door mirror will reset to its normal posi- and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors tion: automatically stop in the fully extended posi- • after 10 seconds when reverse is disen- tion. gaged and the car remains stopped. Storing the position* • immediately when reverse is disengaged The mirror positions are stored in the key and the vehicle's forward speed exceeds Door mirror controls memory when the vehicle has been locked approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). with the remote key. When the vehicle is • immediately if you press the correspond- Adjusting unlocked with the same remote control the ing L or R button again. L 1. Press the button for the left door mirror mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored R • when the engine is turned off. or the button for the right door mirror. positions when the driver's door is opened. The light in the button comes on. • when the side mirrors are folded in. The function can be activated/deactivated in 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the MY CAR under Settings Car settings NOTE center. Car key memory Personal settings in Only one mirror can be tilted down at a 3. Press the L or R button again. The light key memory. See My Car – introduction time. should no longer be on. (p. 76) for a description of the menu system. WARNING Tilting the door mirrors when parking* Home safe and approach lighting The door mirrors can be tilted down to help The light on the door mirrors comes on when Objects seen in the mirrors may appear give the driver a better view along the sides of approach lighting or home safe lighting is further away than they actually are. the vehicle, for example when parallel park- selected, see Approach lighting (p. 97) and ing. Home safe lighting (p. 97).

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Related information Power door mirrors – automatic Resetting to neutral • Interior rearview mirror (p. 104) tilting/retraction Mirrors that have been moved out of position • Heated windshield*, rear window and The control on the driver's door is used to by an external force must be electrically reset door mirror defrosters (p. 104) adjust the position of the door mirrors. to the neutral position for electric retracting/ extending to work. • Power door mirrors – automatic tilting/ Automatically tilting the door mirrors retraction (p. 103) • Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- when parking tons. The door mirrors can tilt down automatically L R to help give the driver a better view along the • Fold them out again with the and buttons. 03 sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. When the transmission is no The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. longer in reverse, the mirrors will automati- Related information cally return to their original position. • Interior rearview mirror (p. 104) This function can be activated/deactivated in • Heated windshield*, rear window and MY CAR under Settings Car settings door mirror defrosters (p. 104) Side mirror settings In reverse gear tilt left mirror or In reverse gear tilt right mirror. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for information about the MY CAR menu system. Automatic retraction when locking When the vehicle is locked/unlocked with the remote key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. The function can be activated/deactivated in MY CAR under Settings Car settings Side mirror settings Retract side mirrors when locking. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103 03 Instruments and controls

Heated windshield*, rear window and Climate settings Automatic rear Interior rearview mirror door mirror defrosters defroster. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim The heating function is used to defrost/de-ice for a description of the menu system. function that helps reduce glare from follow- the windshield and/or the rear window and ing vehicle's headlights. door mirrors. Auto-dim function The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward (located on the forward-facing 03 side of the mirror, which monitors the amount of ambient light) and one pointing rearward (located on the side of the mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which senses the strength of following vehicles' headlights), and work together to help eliminate glare.20

NOTE Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., Max. defroster/heated windshield (1), rear window and door mirror defroster (2) parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear sensor by loading the cargo area or Press button (1) to defrost/de-ice the wind- the rear seat in such a way that light is shield and/or button (2) to defrost the rear prevented from reaching the sensor will window and door mirrors. The indicator lights reduce the auto-dim function in the interior in the respective buttons indicate that the rearview mirror and optional auto-dim function in the door mirrors. function is active. Switch the function off when then windshield/rear window/mirrors have cleared to help avoid battery drain. The Related information heating function will also switch off automati- • Power door mirrors (p. 102) cally after a certain amount of time. Auto-defrosting for the rear window and door mirrors (if the vehicle is started when the ambient temperature is below 45 °F (7 °C) can be selected in MY CAR under Settings

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Digital compass* Calibration 4. Press and hold the button for 3 seconds The rear-view mirror has an integrated display North America is divided into 15 magnetic until the number of the current magnetic that shows the compass direction in which zones and the compass will need to be cali- zone is displayed. the vehicle is traveling. brated if the vehicle is driven into a new one 5. Press the button repeatedly until the (see the magnetic zones on the map in the number of the desired magnetic zone Operation following section "Selecting a magnetic (1-15) is displayed. See the magnetic zone"). To do so: zones on the map in the following section 1. Stop the vehicle in a large open area, "Selecting a magnetic zone"). safely out of traffic and away from steel 6. Wait until C is again displayed in the mir- 03 structures and high-tension electrical ror. wires. 7. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no 2. Start the vehicle. more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that cali- NOTE bration is complete. • For best calibration results, switch off 8. Drive around in a circle an additional two all electrical equipment in the vehicle times to fine-tune the calibration. (climate system, windshield wipers, Rearview mirror with compass. audio system, etc.) and make sure that 9. Vehicles with an electrically heated Eight different directions are shown with the all doors are closed. windshield:* if C is displayed when the heating function is activated, perform abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E • Calibration may not succeed or be (east), SE (southeast), S (south), SW (south- incorrect if the vehicle's electrical step 7 with the heating function on. See west), W (west) and NW (northwest). equipment is not switched off. also Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* (p. 132) for additional The compass is displayed automatically when information about the heated windshield. the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To 3. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, switch the compass on/off use a pen, paper- press and hold the button on the under- Repeat the calibration procedure if neces- clip or similar object and press in the button side of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until sary. on the underside of the mirror. C is displayed in the mirror.

20 The auto-dim function is also available as an option on the door mirrors. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 105 03 Instruments and controls

|| Selecting a magnetic zone Panoramic roof* – introduction vehicle's ignition must be in mode I or II 1 The laminated panoramic roof is divided into before the laminated panoramic roof/sun two sections. The rear glass section is fixed in shade can be operated. 2 15 place and cannot be moved but the front 14 glass section can be slid horizontally to the CAUTION 3 open or closed positions or its rear edge can • Remove ice and snow before opening 13 be raised and lowered to allow ventilation. 4 the laminated panoramic roof. 12 Introduction • Do not operate the laminated panor- 03 5 8 amic roof if it is frozen closed. 11 All references in this section to opening or 9 10 closing the panoramic roof pertain to the front • Never place heavy objects on the lami- 6 7 glass section. nated panoramic roof. G018632 The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun Magnetic zones. shade made of perforated fabric that is Wind blocker The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. located below the sections of glass. This The correct zone must be selected for the shade can be opened or closed, for example compass to work correctly. when driving in bright sunlight. 1. Put the ignition in mode II. 2. Using a pen or similar object, press and hold the button on the rear side of mirror for at least 3 seconds. The number for the current area will be shown. 3. Press the button repeatedly until the number for the required geographic area (1 – 15) is shown. 4. The display will revert to showing the The laminated panoramic roof is equipped compass direction after several seconds. with a wind blocker that folds up when the roof is open. Both the laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade are operated by the controls in the ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The

106 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Panoramic roof* – operation WARNING Quick open/close The laminated panoramic roof is divided into The laminated panoramic roof and the sun During manual closing, if the laminated two sections. The rear glass section is fixed in • shade can be opened/closed at the same panoramic roof is obstructed, immedi- place and cannot be moved but the front time: ately open it again. glass section can be slid horizontally to the Open - pull the control back (to the auto • Never open or close the laminated • open or closed positions or its rear edge can open position) twice in quick succession be raised and lowered to allow ventilation. panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way. and release it. Close Operation Never allow a child to operate the • - push the control forward (to the • 03 laminated panoramic roof. auto close position) twice in quick succession and release it. • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignition is in mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the various ignition modes) to disable the laminated panoramic roof. Never leave the remote key/PCC* in the vehicle. • Never extend any object or body part though the open laminated panoramic roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. Auto open (arrow points toward the rear of the vehicle) Automatic operation Manual open 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the control as far back as possible (to the Manual close auto open position) and release it. Auto close 2. To fully open the laminated panoramic roof, pull the control as far back as possible a second time (to the auto open position) and release it.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107 03 Instruments and controls

|| Manual operation Tilt position 2 in. (5 cm) from the point at which it was 1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control blocked (or will open fully to the tilt position). back to the first stop (the manual open The auto-stop feature also functions when position) and hold it until the sun shade the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is has opened to the position of your being opened. choice. The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the 2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., panoramic roof: Pull the control back to due to ice around the laminated panoramic 03 the first stop (the manual open position) a roof) by pressing and holding the control for- second time to open the rear edge of the ward/down until the roof is closed. laminated panoramic roof. 3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the control back to the first stop (the Tilt position, raised at the rear edge manual open position) a third time and Open (raise the rear edge of the front hold it until the laminated panoramic roof glass section) by pressing the rear edge has opened to the position of your of the control upward. choice. Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- Perform this procedure in reverse order to trol downward and holding it until the close the laminated panoramic roof and/or laminated panoramic roof has closed sun shade. completely. If the sun shade is completely closed, it will NOTE open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the For manual opening, the sun shade must laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt first be fully open before it will be possible position. to open the laminated panoramic roof. When closing, the laminated panoramic Auto-stop roof must be fully closed before the sun The laminated panoramic roof has an auto- shade can be closed. stop feature that is triggered if the glass section of the roof or the sun shade is blocked in any way when being closed. In this case, the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade will stop and reverse automatically approximately

108 03 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System* WARNING Retain the original transmitter of the RF – introduction device you are programming for use in other • If you use HomeLink® to open a vehicles as well as for future HomeLink pro- HomeLink® can be used to open garage garage door or gate, be sure no one is gramming. It is also suggested that upon the doors, gates, etc. near the gate or door while it is in sale of the vehicle, the programmed Home- motion. Link buttons be erased for security purposes. • When programming a garage door Refer to “Resetting HomeLink Buttons” in opener, it is advised to park outside of HomeLink® Wireless Control System* – pro- the garage. gramming (p. 110). 03 • Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety Using HomeLink stop and reverse features as required To operate, simply press and hold the pro- by U.S. federal safety standards (this grammed HomeLink button until the trained includes any garage door opener device begins to operate (this may take sev- model manufactured before April 1, eral seconds). Activation will now occur for 1982). A garage door that cannot the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, detect an object - signaling the door to gate operator, security system, entry door stop and reverse - does not meet cur- lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For conven- rent U.S. federal safety standards. For ience, the hand-held transmitter of the device more information, contact HomeLink may also be used at any time. In the event at: www.homelink.com. that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at: The HomeLink®21 Wireless Control System www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ provides a convenient way to replace up to HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) trans- 1–800–355–3515. mitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door NOTE locks, security systems, even home lighting. If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink Additional information can be found on the will function for 30 minutes after the driv- Internet at, www.homelink.com/ er's door has been opened. www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515.

21 HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 03 Instruments and controls

HomeLink® Wireless Control System* 2. Simultaneously press and hold both the 3. Firmly press, hold for five seconds and – programming chosen HomeLink and hand-held trans- release the programmed HomeLink but- The HomeLink Wireless Control System pro- mitter buttons until the HomeLink indica- ton up to two separate times to activate vides a convenient way to replace up to three tor light changes from a slow to a rapidly the door. If the door does not activate, hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters blinking light. Now you may release both press and hold the just-trained HomeLink used to activate devices such as gate opera- the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter button and observe the indicator light. buttons. tors, garage door openers, entry door locks, • If the indicator light stays on con- security systems, even home lighting. Addi- stantly, programming is complete NOTE 03 tional information can be found on the Inter- and your device should activate when net atwww.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ Some devices may require you to replace the HomeLink button is pressed and HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at this Programming Step 2 with procedures released. 1–800–355–3515. noted in the “Gate Operator / Canadian • If the indicator light blinks rapidly for Programming” section. If the HomeLink two seconds and then turns to a NOTE indicator light does not change to a rapidly constant light continue with “Pro- blinking light after performing these steps, gramming” steps 4-6 to complete the Some vehicles may require the ignition to contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com/ programming of a rolling code equip- be switched on or be in the “accessories” www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by position for programming and/or operation phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. ped device (most commonly a garage of HomeLink. It is also recommended that door opener). a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When this has been completed, Homelink is in learning mode so that you can perform programming.

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (5–14 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

110 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Gate Operator/Canadian Programming 2. Release both buttons. Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans- > HomeLink is now in the training (or mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after sev- learning) mode and can be pro- eral seconds of transmission – which may not grammed at any time beginning with be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the “Programming” - step 1. signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are Reprogramming a Single HomeLink designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Button To program a device to HomeLink using a If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- 03 HomeLink button previously trained, follow culties programming a gate operator or 4. At the garage door opener receiver these steps: (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate garage door opener by using the “Program- the “learn” or “smart” button. This can ming” procedures, replace “Programming 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink usually be found where the hanging HomeLink” step 2 with the following: button. DO NOT release the button. antenna wire is attached to the motor- • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after head unit. button while you press and release - 20 seconds. Without releasing the Home- 5. Firmly press and release the “learn” or every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand- Link button, proceed with “Programming” “smart” button. (The name and color of held transmitter until the HomeLink indi- - step 1. the button may vary by manufacturer.) cator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release For questions or comments, contact Home- There are 30 seconds to initiate step 6. both the HomeLink and hand-held trans- Link at: www.homelink.com/ 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, mitter buttons. www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1–800–355–3515. hold for two seconds and release the pro- Proceed with “Programming” step 3 to com- grammed HomeLink button. Repeat the plete. This device complies with FCC rules part 15 “press/hold/release” sequence a second and Industry Canada (IC) RSS-210. Operation time, and, depending on the brand of the Resetting HomeLink Buttons is subject to the following two conditions: (1) garage door opener (or other rolling code Use the following procedure to reset (erase This device may not cause harmful interfer- equipped device), repeat this sequence a programming) from the three HomeLink but- ence, and (2) This device must accept any third time to complete the programming tons (individual buttons cannot be reset but interference that may be received including process. can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the fol- interference that may cause undesired opera- HomeLink should now activate your rolling lowing section): tion. code equipped device. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash.

}} 111 03 Instruments and controls

NOTE Volvo Sensus Pressing the MY CAR button on the center Volvo Sensus is the core of the contact inter- console displays all of the settings related to The transmitter has been tested and com- face with your vehicle. Sensus provides infor- driving and operating the vehicle, such as plies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or City Safety, lock and alarm functions, auto- modifications not expressly approved by mation, entertainment and offers access to the party responsible for compliance could functions that make owning and operating a matic blower speed, setting the clock, etc. void the user’s authority to operate the Volvo easier. Pressing the source buttons on the center 22 device. console (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL, , NAV* and CAM*, etc.) make it possible to select e.g., 03 AM or FM radio, play a CD or DVD, use the Bluetooth® hands-free feature, the navigation system* or the park assist camera*. See your on-board owner’s manual or the separate printed supplements for detailed information about the functionality offered by Volvo Sensus. Volvo Sensus is the operating system in your vehicle and it enables you to interact intui- tively with the vehicle’s various features and functions, including accessing the Internet, when it suits you. Volvo Sensus uses the center console screen to display information and menus, and to offer a user interface that enables you to make personalized settings for e.g., vehicle, infotainment and climate system functions. The buttons on the center console or the steering wheel keypad are used to activate/ deactivate functions and change numerous settings.

22 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Information display – menu controls The controls on the left steering wheel lever are used to access the menus (p. 114) that are displayed in the instrument panel (p. 68). The menus displayed depend on the current ignition mode (p. 79).

Center console control panel Digital Instrument panel* and menu controls Volvo Navigation System (VNS)* – NAV: OK: access to the list of mes- see the separate VNS manual for operat- sages (p. 114) and message confirma- ing instructions. tion. Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL) Thumb wheel: browse among menus and options in the list of functions. Vehicle-related settings - MY CAR. Analog Instrument panel and menu controls RESET: reset the active function. Used in Internet connected vehicle. certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each Climate system. respective function. Park assist camera - CAM*. The menus shown on the information displays in the instrument panel are controlled with the Related information left lever. The menus displayed depend on • My Car – introduction (p. 76) ignition mode. Press OK to erase a message and return to the menus. • Climate – general information (p. 125) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduction (p. 236)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113 03 Instruments and controls

Information display – menu overview Information display – messages Message Description The menus displayed depend on the current The controls on the left steering wheel lever ignition mode (p. 79). are used to scroll among messages displayed Stop Stop and switch off the in the instrument panel and to confirm selec- engineA engine as soon as possi- The following menu alternatives may vary, tions. ble. Serious risk of dam- depending on the equipment installed in the age. Contact an author- vehicle. When information, indicator or warning sym- ized Volvo workshop. bols illuminate, an explanatory message will Analog instrument panel be displayed in the instrument panel. Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the 03 Digital speed engine. Serious risk of When a warning (p. 74), information (p. 72) or Trip comp. opt. damage. Contact an indicator symbol (p. 72) comes on, a corres- authorized Volvo work- Service status ponding message appears in the information shop. panel. An error message is stored in a mem- 23 Messages (##) ory list until the fault is rectified. Service Have the vehicle checked A OK urgent by an authorized Volvo Digital instrument panel* Press to acknowledge and scroll among the messages. workshop immediately. Settings Service Have the vehicle checked Themes NOTE requiredA by an authorized Volvo Contrast mode/Color mode If a warning message appears while you workshop as soon as possible. Service status are using the trip computer, the message must be read and confirmed by pressing Messages OK before the previous activity can be See man- Read the owner's manual. resumed. ualA Trip computer reset Book time Time to book service at an Related information for mainte- authorized Volvo retailer. • Information displays – introduction (p. 68) nance • Information display – menu controls (p. 113) • Information display – messages (p. 114)

23 Number of messages in parentheses

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Message Description • Information display – menu controls Trip computer – introduction (p. 113) The content and appearance of the trip com- Time for Time for regular service at puter varies depending on whether the vehi- regular an authorized Volvo work- cle is equipped with an Analog or Digital mainte- shop. The timing is deter- instrument panel. nance mined by the number of miles driven, number of months since the last service, engine running 03 time.

Mainte- If the service intervals are nance over- not followed, the warranty due does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop for service.

Temporarily A function has been tem- Analog information display and controls OFFA porarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Low battery The audio system is Power save switched off to save cur- mode rent. Charge the battery.

A There will also be a system-specific part of this message Related information • Information displays – introduction (p. 68) • Information display – menu overview (p. 114) Digital information displays and controls

}} 115 03 Instruments and controls

|| The instrument panel illuminates as soon as the vehicle is unlocked and trip computer settings can be made. If none of the trip computer's controls are used within 30 seconds after the driver's door has been opened, the instrument panel lighting will go out and the trip computer cannot be used again until: • the ignition is put in mode II24 03 • the engine is started

NOTE If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged in order to return to the trip computer function. Acknowl- edge a message by pressing OK.

Related information • Trip computer – functions, analog instrument panel (p. 117) • Trip computer – functions, digital instrument panel (p. 120) • Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122) • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

24 See Ignition modes (p. 79) for information about the various ignition modes.

116 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – functions, analog OK–press to access the trip computer's 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer instrument panel functions or acknowledge/confirm/erase controls are being used in a command a message sequence; reset them by pressing RESET Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of twice. trip computer information headings and 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. to scroll among the alternatives 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- functions and select/confirm your choice tion after a selection has been made by pressing OK. The trip computer has two different menu 03 4. After completing your selection, exit by groups: pressing RESET twice. Trip computer functions • The following table lists the analog trip com- • Trip computer information headings in the puter's functions: instrument panel Information display and controls Functions To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:

}} 117 03 Instruments and controls

|| Function Description

Digital speed This displays the vehicle's speed digitally in the center of the instrument panel – km/h • Open by pressing OK, scroll using the thumb wheel, confirm by pressing OK and exit by pressing ENTER. – mph – None

Trip comp. opt. Selections among the trip computer information headings are made here. The symbols that have already 03 been selected have a check mark and are displayed in white. Those not selected are not checked and – Distance to empty are displayed in gray: – Fuel consumption 1. Open the function by pressing OK and scroll to the desired heading using the thumb wheel. – Average speed 2. Confirm by pressing OK. The symbol will change colors from gray to white and will be checked. – Trip odometer T1 and total dist. 3. Continue this procedure or exit by pressing RESET. – Trip odometer T2 and total dist.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Messages (##) For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 113).

Information headings 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- Any of the information headings in the following the information headings. Stop on the ing table can be displayed. To do so: desired heading. 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. sequence; reset them by pressing RESET twice.

118 03 Instruments and controls

Information headings in the instrument Description panel Trip odometer T1 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. Trip odometer T2 and total dist. • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. Distance to empty See Distance to empty in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122).

Fuel consumption Current fuel consumption. 03 Average speed Press and hold RESET to reset Average speed.

- No information will be displayed. This also indicates the beginning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information headings at any time by turning the thumb wheel until the desired heading is displayed. Related information • Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) • Trip computer – functions, digital instrument panel (p. 120) • Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122) • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123)

119 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – functions, digital OK–press to access the trip computer's 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer instrument panel functions or to activate a selection controls are being used in a command Thumb wheel–turn to access the list of sequence; reset them by pressing RESET trip computer information headings and twice. to scroll among the alternatives 2. Press OK to open the list of functions. RESET–press to cancel/reset/exit a func- 3. Use the thumb wheel to scroll among the tion after a selection has been made functions and select/confirm your choice The trip computer has two different menu by pressing OK. 03 groups: 4. After completing your selection, exit by • Trip computer functions pressing RESET twice. • Trip computer information headings in the The following table lists the digital trip com- instrument panel puter's functions: Functions Information displays and controls To open and make settings in the trip computer functions:

Function Description

Trip computer reset NOTE: This function does not reset the trip odometers, see Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122) for a description of how this is done. – Average fuel consumption – Average speed

Messages For additional information, see Information display – menu controls (p. 113).

Themes Set the way in which information is displayed in the instrument panel, see Information displays – introduction (p. 68).

Settings* Select Auto On or Off.

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Function Description

Contrast mode/Color mode Adjust the instrument panel's contrast and color.

Service status Shows the number of months and mileage until the next scheduled service.

Information headings 1. Ensure that none of the trip computer 3. See the table for an explanation of the Three trip computer headings can be dis- controls are being used in a command heading or the actions that can be taken. sequence; reset them by pressing RESET 03 played at the same time; one in each of the Scroll among the combinations of trip com- twice. displays (see the previous illustration). One of puter information headings at any time by the combinations of information headings in 2. Turn the thumb wheel to begin display- turning the thumb wheel until the desired the following table can be displayed. To do ing the combinations of information head- combination is displayed. so: ings. Stop on the desired combination.

Heading combinations Description Average fuel consump- Trip odometer T1 + mile- Average speed • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T1. tion age Current fuel consumption Trip odometer T2 + mile- Distance to empty • Press and hold RESET to reset trip odometer T2. age

Current fuel consumption Mileage mph<>km/h Change between mph<>km/h – see "Digital speed display" in Trip computer – Supplementary information (p. 122).

- No trip computer informa- - No information will be displayed. This also indicates the begin- tion displayed ning/end of the list of information headings.

Scroll among the trip computer information Related information • Trip computer – Supplementary informa- headings at any time by turning the thumb • Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) tion (p. 122) wheel until the desired heading is displayed. • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123) ment panel (p. 117)

121 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – Supplementary driving style will generally increase this dis- 2. Select one of the following alternatives information tance. using the thumb wheel and press OK: General information for both Analog and Digi- See Economical driving (p. 280) for informa- • mpg tal trip computer functions. tion about driving economically. • mph Average fuel consumption Digital speed display* • Reset both Fuel consumption since the last time this Speed is expressed in the unit not used by 3. Finish by pressing RESET. function was reset. the instrument panel's speedometer e.g., if the normal speedometer is in mph, the trip Changing units 03 Average speed computer will display in the speed in km/h To change the unit (miles/km) used to meas- The vehicle's average speed since the last and vice versa. ure distance and speed, go to MY CAR time this function was reset. Resetting an analog instrument panel Settings System options Distance Current fuel consumption and fuel units. Current fuel consumption is calculated Trip odometer(s) and average speed approximately once a second. When the vehi- 1. Display trip odometer T1 or T1, or Aver- NOTE cle is moving at low speed, fuel consumption age speed. In addition to changing units in the trip is displayed per unit of time. At higher 2. Press and hold RESET until selected computer, this also changes the units used speeds, it is displayed in terms of distance. function is reset. in the Volvo Navigation System (VNS)*. Miles or kilometers can be displayed, see the Each trip computer heading must be reset heading "Changing units". individually. Related information • Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) Distance to empty Resetting a digital instrument panel This function shows the approximate dis- • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- Trip odometer tance that can be driven on the fuel remaining ment panel (p. 117) thumb wheel in the tank. When Distance to empty shows 1. Turn the to select the com- • Trip computer – functions, digital instru- "----", there is very little useable fuel remain- bination of headings containing the trip ment panel (p. 120) odometer to be reset. ing in that tank; refuel as soon as possible. • Trip computer – Trip statistics (p. 123) The calculation is based on average fuel con- 2. Press and hold RESET until selected trip sumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of odometer is reset. driving and the amount of fuel remaining in Average speed and fuel consumption the tank (the accuracy of this figure may vary 1. Select Trip computer reset and press if your driving style changes). An economical OK.

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 03 Instruments and controls

Trip computer – Trip statistics MY CAR My XC60 Trip statistics: Trip information from previous trips regarding • Start new trip: press ENTER to erase all average fuel consumption and average speed pervious statistics. Exit the menu by is stored and can be displayed in the form of pressing EXIT. a bar chart. • Reset for every driving cycle: select by Function pressing ENTER. Exit the menu by pressing EXIT. Selecting Reset for every driving cycle era- 03 ses all trip statistics automatically if the ignition is switched off for at least 4 hours. When the engine is restarted, new statistics will be stored. To get new statistics if the engine is restarted before 4 hours have elapsed, the existing ones have to be erased manually by selecting Start new trip. For additional information, see Information Trip statistics25 display – menu controls (p. 113). Each bar represents a driving distance of See also the information about Eco Guide in 1 mile or 10 miles, depending on the current Eco Guide* and Power Meter* (p. 71). scale; the bar at the far right shows the value Related information for the current mile/10 miles. • Trip computer – introduction (p. 115) TUNE Use to change between 1 mile and • Trip computer – functions, analog instru- 10 miles; the marker at the right will also ment panel (p. 117) change according to the scale selected. • Trip computer – functions, digital instru- Settings ment panel (p. 120) Settings can be made in the MY CAR menu • Trip computer – Supplementary informa- system as follows: tion (p. 122)

25 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 CLIMATE 04 Climate

Climate – general information Temporary shut-off of the air Climate – sensors The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Cli- conditioning The climate system utilizes a number of sen- mate Control (ECC) (p. 129) that cools, heats The air conditioning (p. 132) is momentarily sors to help regulate the temperature and or dehumidifies the air in the passenger com- disengaged during full acceleration or when humidity level in the passenger compartment. partment. driving uphill with a trailer. This may result in a temporary increase in cabin temperature. Sensor location Air conditioning • The sunlight sensor is located on the top Ice and snow side of the dashboard. NOTE Always keep the air intake grille at the base of the windshield free of snow. NOTE • The air conditioning can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible cli- Climate system maintenance The sunlight sensor monitors which side of mate comfort in the passenger com- Special tools and equipment are required to the car that is most exposed to sunlight. partment and to prevent the windows This can mean that the temperature may maintain and carry out repairs on the climate 04 from misting, it should always be on. differ between the right and left-side air system. Work of this type should only be vents, even if the temperatures set for both • In warm weather, a small amount of done by a trained and qualified Volvo service sides of the passenger compartment are water may accumulate under the car technician. the same. when it has been parked. This water is condensation from the A/C system Refrigerant The temperature sensor for the passen- and is normal. Volvo cares about the environment. The air • conditioning system in your car contains a ger compartment is located below the climate control panel. CFC-free refrigerant – R134a. This substance Side windows and laminated panoramic will not deplete the ozone layer. The air con- • The outside (ambient) temperature sensor roof ditioning system contains 1.76 lbs (800 g) of is located on the door mirror. To ensure that the air conditioning works R134a. The systems uses PAG oil. • The humidity sensor* is located in the optimally, the side windows, and the lamina- interior rearview mirror. ted panoramic roof should be closed. Related information • Climate – sensors (p. 125) Fog on the inside of the windows NOTE • Climate – menu settings (p. 127) The defroster function (p. 132) should be Do not cover or block the sensors with used to remove fog or mist from the inside of clothing or other objects. the windows. Keeping the windows clean with a commercially available window wash- Related information ing spray will also help prevent fogging or Climate – general information (p. 125) misting. •

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 125 04 Climate

Air quality NOTE Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* The passenger compartment has been The Air Quality System (IAQS) consists of a Contact your Volvo retailer for IAQS air fil- designed to be pleasant and comfortable, ter replacement intervals. multifilter and an air quality sensor. The filter even for people with asthma and contact helps remove gases and particles from the allergies. incoming air, thereby reducing the amounts of Materials used in the cabin odors and contaminants entering the vehicle. Passenger compartment filter The materials used in the cabin have been Replace the cabin air filter with a new one at developed to help minimize the amount of The air quality (p. 126) sensor detects the recommended intervals. Please refer to dust and make the cabin easier to keep increased levels of contaminants in the out- your Warranty and Service Records Informa- clean. All floor mats can be easily removed side air. When the air quality sensor detects tion booklet, or consult a trained and qualified for cleaning. Use car cleaning products rec- contaminated outside air, the air intake closes Volvo service technician for these intervals. ommended by Volvo. See also the informa- and the air inside the passenger compart- The filter should be replaced more often when tion in Cleaning the interior (p. 363). ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters 04 driving under dirty and dusty conditions. The the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated filter cannot be cleaned and therefore should Related information passenger compartment air. When the always be replaced with a new one. • Climate – general information (p. 125) AUTO (p. 131) button is depressed the air • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* quality sensor is always engaged. NOTE (p. 126) Activate or deactivate this function in Climate There are different types of cabin air filters. • Climate – menu settings (p. 127) settings Interior air quality system. Ensure that the correct type is installed. NOTE Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) • The air quality sensor should always A multifilter helps reduce gases and particles be engaged in order to obtain the best in the incoming air, thereby reducing the lev- air in the passenger compartment. els of odors and contaminants entering the Recirculation is limited in cold weather vehicle. The air quality sensor detects • to avoid fogging. increased levels of contaminants in the outside air. When the air quality sensor detects • If the insides of the windows start fog- contaminated outside air, the air intake closes ging, disengage the air quality sensor. and the air inside the passenger compart- Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear win- ment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters dows. the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air.

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Related information Climate – menu settings Air distribution – general • Climate – general information (p. 125) The default settings for four of the climate The incoming air is distributed through a • Max. defroster and electrically heated system's (p. 125) functions can be changed in number of different vents in the passenger windshield* (p. 132) the menu system. compartment. • Blower speed (p. 131) in automatic mode (p. 131). • Recirculation timer (p. 134) for passenger compartment air. • Automatic rear window defrosting (p. 104). • The optional Interior Air Quality Sys- tem (p. 126) (IAQS). 04 The functions can also be returned to factory settings in the menu system. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system. Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO Related information mode (p. 131). • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129) If desired, air distribution can be controlled manually, see Air distribution – function (p. 133).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127 04 Climate

|| Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars

04 Open Closed

Closed Open

Horizontal airflow Horizontal airflow

Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Direct the outer air vents toward the side win- Direct the outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. dows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain the desired temperature in the rear seat. Related information • Climate – general information (p. 125) • Air distribution – table (p. 135) • Air distribution – recirculation (p. 134) • Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* (p. 132)

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Electronic climate control (ECC) set separately on the driver's and passenger's The AUTO function (p. 131) automatically ECC (Electronic Climate Control) helps main- sides. regulates the temperature, air conditioning, tain the selected temperature in the passen- blower speed, recirculation and air distribu- ger compartment and the temperature can be tion.

Temperature control (p. 131), driver's Heated rear window and door mir- side rors (p. 104) Heated driver's seat* (p. 130) Heated front passenger's seat* (p. 130)

Defroster (maximum effect), electrically Temperature control (p. 131), passeng- heated windshield* (p. 132) er's side Blower (p. 131) Recirculation (p. 134)

Manual air distribution (p. 127)—floor AUTO (p. 131)

Manual air distribution—dashboard air A/C (p. 132) on/off vents Manual air distribution—defroster Related information • Climate – general information (p. 125)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129 04 Climate

Heated seats Lowest heat level – one indicator light. Heat control for the outboard seating positions is done in the same way as for the front The front seat heating has three levels to If no indicator lights are illuminated, the seat seats. increase comfort for the driver and passenger heating is switched off. in cold weather. Seat heating will automatically switch off Related information The rear outboard seat heating has three lev- when the engine is switched off. • Climate – general information (p. 125) els to increase comfort for the passengers in • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129) cold weather. Starting the seat heating automatically This setting starts heating the driver's seat (at Heated front seats* the highest level) automatically when the engine is started if the ambient temperature is below approx. 50° F (10° C). Activate/deactivate this function in the 04 MY CAR menu system, under Settings Climate settings Auto start driver seat heater.

Heated rear seats*1

The current seat temperature setting is shown in the center console display Press the lower section of the button repeatedly until the desired number of indicator lights illuminate: Highest heat level – three indicator lights. Medium heat level – two indicator lights.

1 Not available on models equipped with the optional integrated booster cushions

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

Temperature and blower control NOTE Automatic climate control When the vehicle is started, the most recent The Auto function automatically controls tem- If the blower is turned off completely, the setting is resumed. air conditioning is disengaged, which may perature (p. 131), air conditioning (p. 132), blower speed (p. 131), recirculation (p. 134) The blower should always be activated to result in fogging on the windows. and air distribution (p. 127). help avoid condensation and fogging on the windows. Related information If you select one or more Climate – general information (p. 125) manual functions, the other Temperature control • functions continue to be The temperatures on the • Electronic climate control (ECC) (p. 129) controlled automatically. The driver and passenger sides Air conditioning (p. 132) • air quality (p. 126) sensor is can be set separately. • Climate – sensors (p. 125) engaged and all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO 04 CLIMATE. NOTE Blower speed in automatic mode can be set under Climate settings Automatic blower Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal by selecting a higher/lower temperature High than the actual temperature required. or . NOTE Blower control Turn the control clockwise to Selecting the lowest blower speed may increase or counterclockwise increases the risk of fog forming on the windows. to decrease the blower speed. If AUTO (p. 131) is selected, blower speed will Related information be regulated automatically • Climate – general information (p. 125) and this will override manual adjustment.

131 04 Climate

Air conditioning Max. defroster and electrically heated Models without an electrically heated wind- The air conditioning function cools and dehu- windshield* shield midifies the air in the passenger compart- The heated windshield and max. defroster • Press the button once to start ment. functions are used to clear the windshield and defrosting/de-icing the windshield and front side windows of condensation and ice front side windows. The indicator light (2) When the indicator light in as quickly as possible. in the defroster button illuminates when the button is on, the air con- the function is active. ditioning is controlled automatically. This cools/heats • Press the button twice to switch off the defroster (the indicator light will switch and dehumidifies the incom- off). ing air. When the indicator light in the button is off, the Models with an electrically heated wind- air conditioning is disengaged. Other func- shield* 04 tions are still controlled automatically. When • If this feature is switched off, press the maximum defroster (p. 132) is selected, the button once to start heating the wind- air conditioning system is set for maximum shield2. Symbol (1) will illuminate in the blower speed and dehumidifies the cabin as center console display. quickly as possible. • Press the button twice to start both the Related information defroster and the windshield heating. The selected settings are shown in the center • Climate – general information (p. 125) Symbols (1) and (2) will illuminate in the console display center console display. • Automatic climate control (p. 131) Electrical heating* • If these features are on, press the button Max. defroster to switch them off. The symbols will no longer be displayed.

2 If a "C" appears in the rear-view mirror when the button is pressed, the compass* has to be recalibrated, see Digital compass* (p. 105).

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 04 Climate

NOTE Related information Air distribution – function • Climate – general information (p. 125) The air distribution function consists of three Triangular areas at the far sides of the • buttons. windshield are not heated electrically • Automatic climate control (p. 131) and will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice. • The heated windshield may affect the performance/range of e.g., transponders used to automatically pay highway tolls or other communication equipment.

The following occurs when the defroster/ windshield heating functions have been acti- 04 vated: • Blower speed increases automatically and the air conditioning (p. 132) will Manual air distribution—defroster switch on (if not already on and if the passenger compartment blower is not turned Manual air distribution—dashboard air off) to dehumidify the air in the passenger vents compartment. Air conditioning can be Manual air distribution—floor switched off by pressing the AC button. When a button is pressed, the corresponding Recirculation (p. 134) will not function • figure will appear in the display with an arrow while defrost is engaged. indicating which manual air flow has been The climate system will return to its previous selected (see the following illustration). See settings when the defroster/windshield heat- also the air distribution chart (p. 135). ing function is switched off. See also Heated windshield*, rear window and door mirror defrosters (p. 104) for additional information.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 04 Climate

|| Air distribution – recirculation Related information Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust • Climate – general information (p. 125) fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger com- • Air distribution – general (p. 127) partment. • Air distribution – function (p. 133) The air in the passenger • Air distribution – table (p. 135) compartment is then recirculated, i.e., no air from outside the car is taken into the car when this function is activated. The indicator light in the button will illuminate Air distribution is shown in the center console when recirculation is selected. 04 display If the air in the car recirculates for too long, Related information there is a risk of condensation forming on the • Climate – general information (p. 125) insides of the windows, especially in winter. • Air distribution – general (p. 127) Timer • Air distribution – recirculation (p. 134) The timer function minimizes the risk of fogging, or stale air when the recirculation function is selected by automatically switching off the function after a certain length of time, depending on the ambient temperature. Acti- vate/deactivate the function under Climate settings Recirculation timer. See My Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of the menu system.

NOTE When Defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

134 04 Climate

Air distribution – table Air distribution (p. 127) is selected using the buttons in the center console climate panel.

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use

Air to windows. Some air To remove de-fog/de- Air to the floor and To ensure comfortable flows from the dashboard air ice the front side win- windows. Some air conditions and good de- vents. The air is not recircula- dows and windshield flows from the dash- fogging in cold or humid ted. Air conditioning is always quickly. board air vents. weather. engaged.

Air to windshield and side win- In cold or humid Air to floor and from In sunny weather with 04 dows. Some air flows from the weather (blower dashboard air vents. cool outside tempera- air dashboard vents. speed should be tures. moderate to high).

Airflow to windows and from To ensure good com- Air to floor. Some air To warm or cool the dashboard air vents. fort in warm, dry flows to the dashboard feet. weather. air vents and windows.

Airflow to the head and chest To ensure efficient Airflow to windows, To cool the feet or pro- from the dashboard air vents. cooling in warm from dashboard air vide warmer air to the weather. vents and to the floor. upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

}} 135 04 Climate

|| Related information • Climate – general information (p. 125) • Air distribution – function (p. 133) • Max. defroster and electrically heated windshield* (p. 132)

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE 05 Loading and storage

Storage spaces The following is an overview of the storage compartments in the passenger compartment.

138 05 Loading and storage

Compartment in door panel

Storage pocket on the front edge of the front seat cushions Glove compartment (p. 141)

Storage compartment (p. 140), 12-volt socket (p. 140) and AUX input/USB connector* Rear seat cup holders

Storage pocket

Related information • Vanity mirror (p. 141) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 05 Loading and storage

Tunnel console Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets The tunnel console is located between the The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt front seats. accessories such as cell phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the ignition must be in at least mode I (p. 79). The sockets are located between the cup holders in the tunnel console and on the rear side of the tunnel console (p. 140) for rear seat passengers. G021440

12-volt socket in the rear center console The maximum current consumption is 10A (120W) if only one of the 12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment is in use. If both Storage compartment (for CDs, etc.) the front and rear sockets are used at the 05 under armrest, AUX input/USB connec- same time, the maximum current consump- tor. tion per socket is 7.5A (90W). Includes cup holder for driver and pas- The auxiliary sockets can also be used to senger, 12-volt socket (p. 140) and a power a cigarette lighter. Accessory cigarette small storage compartment. 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console lighters and ashtrays can be purchased from Related information your Volvo retailer. • Storage spaces (p. 138) WARNING Always keep the sockets covered when not in use.

Related information • Storage spaces (p. 138) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

140 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 05 Loading and storage

Glove compartment Vanity mirror 12-volt socket in the cargo area* The glove compartment provides a lockable The vanity mirrors are located on the upper The 12-volt socket can be used e.g., to con- storage compartment for small items. side of the sun visors. nect the tire sealing system's compressor (certain models) and other 12-volt accessories.

Vanity mirror with lighting The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. There are also holders for pens and fuel The light comes on automatically when the 05 cards. The glove compartment can be locked cover is lifted. Fold down the cover to access the electrical manually with the key blade, see Locking/ socket. Related information unlocking – glove compartment (p. 165). Storage spaces (p. 138) • NOTE Related information • Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 342) • Storage spaces (p. 138) The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery.

Related information • Storage spaces (p. 138) • Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 140)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141 05 Loading and storage

Loading – general WARNING Loading – roof load carriers The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is Stop the engine, put the gear selector determined by factors such as the number of • Using load carriers in P, and apply the parking brake passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight Load carriers are available as Volvo accesso- when loading or unloading long of any accessories that may be installed, etc. ries. Observe the following points when in objects. use: To increase loading space, the rear seat • The vehicle's driving characteristics To avoid damaging your vehicle and to backrests can be folded down, see Rear may change depending on the weight • achieve maximum safety when driving, seats – folding backrest (p. 86). and distribution of the load. we recommend using the load carriers When loading the cargo area, keep the fol- • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a that Volvo has developed especially for lowing in mind: force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a your vehicle. head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). Load objects in the cargo area against • Volvo-approved removable roof racks are • The cargo area and rear seat should the backrest whenever possible. • designed to carry the maximum allowable not be loaded to a level higher than roof load for this vehicle: 220 lbs (100 kg). • Unstable loads can be secured to the 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of For non-Volvo roof racks, check the man- load anchoring eyelets with straps or web the rear side windows. Objects placed ufacturer's weight limits for the rack. lashings to help keep them from shifting. higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. • Never exceed the rack manufacturer's 05 • Stop the engine and apply the parking weigh limits and never exceed the maxi- brake when loading or unloading long mum rated roof load of 220 lbs (100 kg). objects. The gear selector can be Related information • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads knocked out of position by long loads, • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143) which could set the vehicle in motion. evenly. • Steel cargo grid (p. 147) • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the • Loading – roof load carriers (p. 142) load. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof.

142 05 Loading and storage

• The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel Load anchoring eyelets WARNING consumption will increase with the size of The load anchoring eyelets on both sides of Cover sharp edges on long loads to the load. the vehicle are used to fasten straps, etc., to • help prevent injury to occupants. Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast help anchor items in the cargo area. • Secure the load to help prevent shift- cornering and hard braking. ing during sudden stops. WARNING Related information • Always secure large and heavy objects • Loading – general (p. 142) The two upper hooks shown in the illustra- with a seat belt or cargo retaining tion are for holding grocery bags only. straps. • Load anchoring eyelets (p. 143) They are not intended for anchoring heavy objects. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle.

Related information 05 • Loading – general (p. 142)

143 05 Loading and storage

Grocery bag holder Cargo net – general information Your vehicle can be equipped with a cargo The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags The cargo net helps protect passengers from net made of strong nylon fabric that helps in place. objects in the cargo area in the event of a prevent objects in the cargo area from mov- sudden stop or hard braking. ing forward into the passenger compartment. The net can be attached in two different pla- The cargo net is available in two versions. ces: • Rear position: behind the rear seat backrest • Front position: behind the front seat backrests

WARNING • Be sure that the cargo net's upper G017745 attachment hooks are properly inserted in the brackets and that the Grocery bag holder under the floor of the cargo lower straps are correctly attached area G034213 05 and pulled taut. The grocery bag holder holds shopping bags Version 1 A damaged cargo net should never be in place. • used. 1. Open the hatch in the floor of the cargo • Objects in the cargo area should be area. securely anchored, even if the cargo 2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap. net is correctly installed and in use.

Related information Related information • Loading – general (p. 142) • Cargo net – mounting/removing (p. 145)

Version 2

144 05 Loading and storage

Cargo net – mounting/removing 4. Mounting in the rear position: With the CAUTION net's rod attached to the rear upper Mounting the cargo net (version 1) brackets, hook the lower straps in the Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and/or its The cargo net is easiest to put in place floor eyelets in the cargo area. Pull the net brackets. through one of the rear doors. strap taut.

1. Fold out the cargo net and be sure that 5. Pull the net strap taut. the upper hinged rod is straight and locked in position. Mounting the cargo net (version 2) 2. Insert one end of the rod into the front or The easiest way to mount the cargo net is rear bracket (near the ceiling). Be sure through one of the rear doors. that the lock on the lower strap is facing toward you. 3. Insert the other end of the rod in the opposite bracket. – Be sure to press the end hooks on the rod as far forward as possible in the brackets. Cargo net in front position 05 Mounting in the front position: With the net's rod attached to the front upper brackets, hook the lower straps in the eyelets in the front seat rails. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests Cargo net in rear position are upright and the seats are moved 1. Fold out the cargo net. slightly forward. 2. Insert one of the net's upper attachments If the front seats are moved rearward, into the front or rear bracket near the roof they should not press hard against the liner with the net's storage pockets facing net. rearward.

Cargo net in rear position

}} 145 05 Loading and storage

|| 3. Insert the net's other attachment into the CAUTION Removing and storing the cargo net bracket on the opposite side of the vehi- (version 2) cle. It is spring-loaded to help make Pressure from the front seats against the mounting easier. cargo net could damage the net and/or its Release the lower hooks. brackets. Be sure to press the hooks as far forward Remove the net's upper attachments into the brackets as possible. Removing and storing the cargo net from the ceiling brackets. 4. Mounting in the rear position: With the (version 1) Fold the net. net's hooks inserted into the rear upper brackets, attach the lower hooks to the When not in use, the cargo net can be stored floor eyelets in the cargo area. under floor of the cargo area. Related information • Cargo net – general information (p. 144)

Press the release buttons on the locks on the straps and pull out a small section of Cargo net in front position the strap. Mounting in the front position: With the Press in the catches on the straps' hooks net's upper attachments in front upper brack- and remove the hooks from the eyelet. ets, attach the lower hooks to the eyelets in Fold up the net's rod at the center and the front seat rails. Attaching the net is easier roll up the net. if the front seat backrests are upright and the seats are moved slightly forward. When not in use, the cargo net can be stored under floor of the cargo area. If the front seats are moved rearward, they should not press hard against the net.

146 05 Loading and storage

Cargo area cover 3. Press both sides of the cover until they Steel cargo grid The cargo area cover can be used to conceal click into place . The red mark will no Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid objects in the cargo area. longer be visible. that helps prevent objects in the cargo area 4. Check that both ends of the cover are from moving forward into the passenger com- securely locked in place. partment. Removing the cover 1. Press one of the end pieces of the cover inward. 2. Pull the cover carefully upward and outward. The other end will release automatically from its retaining bracket. Folding down the cargo area cover's

G031977 rear flap The cargo area cover's rear flap points hori- Use zontally when the cover is retracted (rolled G031978 05 • Pull the cover over the cargo and hook it up). To fold it down: into the holes in the rear cargo area pil- – Pull the flap slightly rearward past its sup- Folding the grid up/down lars. ports and fold it down. Grasp the lowering edge of the grid and pull it • To retract (roll up) the cover, release it rearward/upward, or push it downward/ from the holes and guide it toward the NOTE forward. rear seat backrest. On models equipped with this cover, it NOTE Installing the cover should be removed before a child seat is 1. Press the end piece on one side of the attached to the child restraint anchors. If the steel grid is to be used with the cargo area cover into the retaining optional cargo area cover, the grid must be folded down before the cargo area bracket in the side panel of the cargo Related information cover is put in place. area . • Loading – general (p. 142) 2. Do the same on the opposite side .

}} 147 05 Loading and storage

|| Installing the steel cargo grid For information about the necessary tools and procedures for installing/removing the steel cargo grid, please refer to the assembly instructions1 that were included when the grid was purchased. Related information • Cargo area cover (p. 147)

1 Assembly instruction no. 30715972.

148 LOCKS AND ALARM 06 Locks and alarm

Remote key and key blade Remote key – loss FCC ID:KR55WK49264 + Siemens VDO Two remote keys are provided with your vehi- If either of the remote keys (p. 150) is lost, the 5WK49236 cle. They enable you to unlock the doors and other should be taken with the vehicle to a FCC ID:KR55WK49236, 5WK49266 tailgate, and also function as ignition keys to Volvo retailer. As an anti-theft measure, the start the vehicle or operate electrical compo- code of the lost remote key must be erased FCC ID:KR55WK49266 + Siemens VDO nents. The remote keys contain detachable from the system. 5WK49233 metal key blades for manually locking or FCC ID:KR55WK49233 unlocking the driver's door and the glove NOTE This device complies with part 15 of the FCC compartment. The visible ends of these key Additional or duplicate remote control keys rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to blades are unique to make it easier to identify can be obtained from any authorized Volvo the following conditions: (1) This device may "your" remote key. Up to six remotes can be retailer. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this programmed for use on the same vehicle. You can also obtain additional or duplicate device must accept any interference remote control keys from certain inde- WARNING received, including interference that may pendent repair facilities and locksmiths cause undesired operation. Never leave the remote key in the ignition that are qualified to make remote control slot if children are to remain in the vehicle. keys. Each key must be programmed to Canada-5WK49264 work with your vehicle. IC:267T-5WK49264 + Siemens VDO For more information on the various ignition California Only: 5WK49236 modes, see Ignition modes (p. 79). A list of independent repair facilities and/or IC:267T-5WK49236, 5WK49266 locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut Related information and code replacement keys can be found: IC:267T-5WK49266 + Siemens VDO 5WK49233 06 • Remote key – functions (p. 153) • on the Volvo website at • Remote key – functions (p. 153) http://www.volvocars.com/us/keys IC:267T-5WK49233 • Remote key – range (p. 154) • by calling Volvo Customer Care at Operation is subject to the following condi- 1-800-458-1552 tions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any The number of registered keys for the vehicle interference, including interference that may can be found by pressing MY CAR and going cause undesired operation of the device. Settings Information Number of into Related information keys. For a description of the menu system, Remote key – functions (p. 153) see My Car – introduction (p. 76). • USA-5WK49264

150 06 Locks and alarm

Key memory NOTE Locking/unlocking confirmation The memory in the remote key makes it possi- Settings can be made in the menu system for If the vehicle is locked with the remote key ble to store certain personal settings. or is left unlocked for more than 30 audible and visual confirmation when the minutes, the key memory function will be vehicle has been locked or unlocked. With The position of the side door mirrors, power deactivated. these functions activated, the following will driver's seat* and the selected instrument occur when the vehicle is locked/unlocked: panel theme1 are stored in the remote keys To reactivate the key's memory: when the vehicle is locked. The next time the • Press the unlock button on the remote Locking confirmation driver's door is unlocked with the same key. • The turn signals flash once, an audible remote key and the door is opened within signal sounds and the door mirrors will fold* in. 2 minutes, the power driver's seat and side For information regarding vehicles with the door mirrors will automatically move to the optional keyless drive, see Keyless drive*– Confirmation will only be given when all doors position that they were in when the doors locking/unlocking (p. 159). and the tailgate are properly closed and were most recently locked with the same locked. remote key. If the seat/mirrors have not been Related information readjusted since the vehicle was locked, they • Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 151) NOTE will already be in the position stored in that particular remote key and will not move. For If you do not receive confirmation when more information on this feature, see Front locking the vehicle, check whether a door or the tailgate is ajar, or if this feature has seats – power seat (p. 81). been turned off in the menu. This feature can be activated or deactivated MY CAR in the vehicle's menu by pressing Unlocking confirmation 06 and going into Settings Car settings • The turn signals will flash twice and the Car key memory. For a description of the door mirrors will fold* out. menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 76).

1 Optional digital instrument panel only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 06 Locks and alarm

|| Making a setting A flashing indicator light at the base of the Immobilizer (start inhibitor) Different alternatives for locking/unlocking windshield verifies that the vehicle is locked. The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps confirmation can be selected in the menus by Related information prevent unauthorized persons from starting pressing MY CAR on the center console con- the engine. trol panel. • Locking/unlocking – from the outside (p. 163) Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle To activate visual confirmation: go to • • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164) contains a coded transponder. The code in Settings Car settings Light the key is transmitted to an antenna in the Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166) settings and select Door lock • ignition slot where it is compared to the code confirmation light and/or Unlock stored in the start inhibitor module. The vehi- confirmation light by pressing OK/ cle will start only with a properly coded key. If MENU. you misplace a key, take the other keys to a • To activate audible confirmation: go to trained and qualified Volvo service technician Settings Car settings Lock for reprogramming as an anti-theft measure. settings and select Audible The following messages (which may appear in confirmation by pressing OK/MENU. the instrument panel display) are related to the immobilizer: For a description of the menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 76). Lock indicator

Lock/alarm indicator light

152 06 Locks and alarm

Message Meaning interference that may cause undesired opera- Remote key – functions tion. The remote key is used e.g., to unlock the Insert car Remote key not recognized Canada–IC: 3659A-WFS125VO doors and start the engine. key during start. Try to start the vehicle again. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- Car key Vehicles with keyless drive* ence, and (2) this device must accept any not found only. Remote key not recog- interference, including interference that may nized during start. Try to cause undesired operation of the device. start the vehicle again. For information on starting the vehicle, see If the problem continues, Starting the engine (p. 247). insert the remote key into the ignition slot and try to start the vehicle again.

Immobil- Remote key fault during izer Try start. Contact an authorized Remote key start Volvo workshop. Lock again Unlock

CAUTION Approach lighting Never use force when inserting the remote 06 Tailgate unlock key in the ignition slot. The vehicle cannot be started if the transponder is damaged. Panic alarm

USA–FCC ID: LTQWFS 125VO Buttons on the remote This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Lock – Press the Lock button on the rules. Operation is subject to the following remote once to lock all doors and the tailgate. condition: (1) This device may not cause The turn signals will flash once to confirm harmful interference, and (2) this device must locking. accept any interference received, including Unlock – Press the Unlock button on the remote once to unlock the driver's door.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 153 06 Locks and alarm

|| After a short pause, press the Unlock button NOTE Remote key – range a second time within 10 seconds to unlock The remote key has a range of approximately the other doors and the tailgate. As an added safety precaution, the parking lights will come on automatically for a 60 ft. (20 m) from the vehicle. This function can be changed so that all short period when the tailgate has been doors unlock at the same time by pressing opened. NOTE My Car and going to Settings Car Buildings or other obstacles may interfere settings Lock settings Change doors After closing, the tailgate will not automati- with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked unlock setting. For a description of the menu cally relock. Press Lock to relock it and rearm the alarm. with the key blade, see Alarm-related func- system, see My Car – introduction (p. 76). tions (p. 171). Approach lighting – As you approach For information on opening the tailgate from the vehicle, press the button on the remote the passenger compartment, see Locking/ If the remote key is removed from the vehicle key to light the interior lighting, parking lights, unlocking – tailgate (p. 166) while the engine is running or if the ignition is license plate lighting and the lights in the door Panic alarm – This button can be used in mode I or II and all of the doors are closed, mirrors*. to attract attention during emergency situa- a message will appear in the instrument panel display and there will be an audible signal. These lights will switch off automatically after tions. 30, 60 or 90 seconds. For a description of the To activate the panic alarm, press and hold When the remote key is returned to the vehi- menu system, see My Car – introduction this button for at least 3 seconds or press it cle, the message will be erased and the audi- (p. 76). twice within 3 seconds. The turn signals and ble signal will stop after one of the following has been done: Unlock tailgate – Press the button twice horn will be activated. The panic alarm will stop automatically after 2 minutes and The remote key is inserted in the ignition 06 within several seconds to disarm the alarm • system (the alarm indicator light on the dash- 45 seconds. slot board will go out), and unlock only the tail- To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds • The vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph gate. and press the button again. (30 km/h) Pressing this button for several seconds also The Panic alarm button will not unlock the • The OK button on the left steering wheel opens the tailgate on models equipped with vehicle. lever is pressed the optional power tailgate. Related information Related information • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164) • Remote key – functions (p. 153) • Locking/unlocking – from the outside (p. 163) • Locking/unlocking confirmation (p. 151)

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade – general Detachable key blade – detaching/ Related information information reinserting • Detachable key blade – unlocking Each remote key contains a detachable metal The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be (p. 156) key blade (p. 150) for mechanically locking or removed or reinserted in the remote key as • Child safety locks (p. 61) unlocking the driver's door and the glove follows: compartment. The key blades have a unique code, which is used if new ones need to be Removing the key blade produced. This code is available at an authorized Volvo retailer. The visible ends of these key blades are unique to make it easier to identify "your" remote key.

Related information • Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156) • Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting (p. 155) Slide the spring loaded catch to the side.

Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. 06 Reinserting the blade 1. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up. 2. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. 3. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place.

155 06 Locks and alarm

Detachable key blade – unlocking 3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in Private locking Your vehicle's remote key (p. 150) contains a the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade By utilizing the remote key with the key blade metal, detachable key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's door. This will trig- removed, the private locking feature enables to unlock the driver's door, lock the glove ger the alarm. you to block access to the glove compart- compartment, etc. 4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote ment and disconnect the tailgate from the key in the ignition slot. This also applies central locking system for e.g., valet parking to vehicles equipped with the optional or when the vehicle is brought to the retailer keyless drive. for service. 5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked. Related information • Remote key and key blade (p. 150) • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157)

Driver's door keyhole cover

If the remote key does not function normally G017869 (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be Normal locking/unlocking points 06 unlocked with the detachable key blade. 1. Remove the detachable key blade (p. 155) from the remote key. 2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward.

156 06 Locks and alarm

Activating the private locking function Remote key – replacing the battery The remote key can be opened if the battery needs to be replaced.

The battery should be replaced if: • The information symbol illuminates and Low battery in remote control. Please change batteries. is shown in the display and/or • if the locks do not react after several

G017870 attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking points with private locking activated. NOTE Insert the key blade in the glove compart- With the private locking function activated: The remote key's range is normally ment lock. approximately 60 ft (20 m) from the vehi- The vehicle's doors can be locked or • Turn the key blade180 degrees clock- cle. unlocked with the remote wise. • The engine can be started Remove the key blade from the lock. A • The glove compartment cannot be message will appear in the instrument unlocked panel display. • The tailgate cannot be unlocked or 06 opened with the remote Deactivating the private locking • The rear floor hatch cannot be opened function Turn the key blade 180 degrees counterclockwise in the glove compartment lock to deactivate private locking. For information on locking the glove compartment normally, without activating the private locking function, see Locking/unlocking the glove compartment (p. 165).

}} 157 06 Locks and alarm

|| Opening the remote key To open the remote key 3. Carefully slide the key blade into its groove. Slide the spring loaded catch to the side. 4. Gently press the key blade in the groove until it clicks into place. Pull the key blade straight out of the remote key. NOTE Insert a small screwdriver in the hole Volvo recommends that the batteries used behind the spring loaded catch and care- in the remote control meet the UN Manual fully pry up the cover. Turn the remote of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section key with the buttons upward so that the 38.3. battery does not fall out when the cover is Batteries installed in the key from the fac- removed. tory and batteries exchanged by an Inserting a new battery authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria. CAUTION Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo When handling batteries, avoid touching retailer. their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key. Related information • Remote key – functions (p. 153) Note the position of the battery's (+) or (–) 06 sides. 1. Use a screwdriver to pry out the old battery. 2. Insert a new one with the (+) side downward. Closing the remote key 1. Press the remote key's cover into place. The remote key has one CR 2430, 3V battery only 2. Hold the remote key with the slot for the key blade up.

158 06 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking Both of the remote keys provided with the Unlocking the vehicle This system makes it possible to unlock and vehicle have the keyless function, and addi- • A keyless drive remote key must be on lock the vehicle without having to press any tional ones can be ordered. The system can the same side of the vehicle as the door buttons on the remote key. It is only neces- accommodate up to six remote keys. to be opened, and be within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the door's lock or the tail- sary to have a keyless drive remote key in The red rings in the illustration indicate the gate (see the shaded areas in the illustra- your possession to operate the central locking area around the vehicle that is within range of tion). system. the keyless drive antennas. • Pull a door handle to unlock and open the Locking the vehicle door or pull the tailgate opening control. The number of doors that are unlocked at the same time can be set in the vehicle's menu system. Press MY CAR and go to Car settings Lock settings Keyless entry. For a description of the menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 76). Related information • Alarm indicator (p. 170)

Range of the keyless drive remote key–5 ft (1.5 meters) Models with keyless drive have a button on the outside door handles 06 NOTE The doors and the tailgate can be locked by • The gear selector must in the P posi- pressing the lock button in any of the outside tion before the vehicle can be locked door handles. and the alarm can be armed. • The buttons on the keyless drive NOTE remote key can also be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. For more infor- On keyless drive vehicles, the gear selector must be in the Park (P) position, all mation, see Remote key and key blade doors and the tailgate must be closed and (p. 150). the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be locked.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 06 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive* – unlocking with key 4. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote Keyless drive* – key memory blade key in the ignition slot. This also applies When you leave the vehicle with a remote key If the remote key does not function normally to vehicles equipped with the optional in your possession and lock any door, the (weak battery, etc.), the vehicle can be keyless drive. unlocked with the detachable key blade. 5. Press the cover back into place after the door has been unlocked. Related information • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159) • Alarm – general information (p. 169)

Driver's door keyhole cover 1. Remove the key blade from the remote key (see Detachable key blade – detach- 06 ing/reinserting (p. 155) for instructions). 2. Press the key blade approx. 0.5 in. (1 cm) straight up in the hole on the underside of the keyhole cover. > The cover will come off due to the pressure exerted when the key blade is pushed upward. 3. Insert the key blade as far as possible in the driver's door lock. Turn the key blade to unlock the driver's door. This will trigger the alarm.

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm position of the driver's seat2 and door mirrors NOTE Keyless drive* – messages will be stored in the remote key's memory. If all of the remote keys are removed from the If the vehicle is locked by pressing the but- vehicle while the engine is running or if the The next time a door is opened by a person ton on one of the door handles or by ignition modes (p. 79) is in mode II and all of with the same remote key in his/her posses- pressing the lock button on the remote the doors are closed, a message will appear sion, the driver's seat and door mirrors will key, or if it is left unlocked for more than 30 minutes, the key memory function will in the instrument panel display and an audible automatically move to the position that they be deactivated. signal will sound. were in when the door was most recently To reactivate the key's memory: locked. When at least one remote key has been • Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door returned to the car, the message will be NOTE handle with the remote key in your erased in the display and the audible signal possession or by pressing the unlock will stop when: If several people carrying remote keys button on the remote key. approach the vehicle at the same time, the • A door has been opened and closed driver's seat and door mirrors will assume The remote key has been inserted in the the positions they were in for the person Related information • ignition slot who opens the driver's door. • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159) • The OK button has been pressed. For the • Remote key – functions (p. 153) location of this button, see Information See also power seats (p. 81) for information display – menu controls (p. 113) on adjusting and storing the seat's position in the seat memory.

2 Power seats only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 06 Locks and alarm

CAUTION For Automobile Use Keyless drive* – antenna locations The keyless drive system has a number of Keyless drive remote keys should Canada – IC:267T-5WK48952, • antennas located at various points in the vehi- never be left in the vehicle. In the event 267T-5WK48964, 267T-5WK48891 cle. of a break-in, a remote found in the NOTE vehicle could make it possible to start the engine. This device complies with RSS -210 of Indus- try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol- Electromagnetic fields or metal • lowing two conditions: (1) This device may obstructions can interfere with the not cause harmful interference, and (2) this keyless drive system. The remote key should never be placed closer than device must accept interference received, approximately 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) to including interference that may cause unde- cell phones, metallic objects or e.g., sired operation. stored in a metal briefcase. CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly USA – FCC ID:KR55WK48952, approved by the manufacturer could void the KR55WK48964 user's authority to operate the equipment. NOTE On the tailgate, near the wiper motor This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Left rear door handle Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause Under the floor of the cargo area, near 06 harmful interference, and (2) this device must the rear seat accept interference received, including inter- Right rear door handle ference that may cause undesired operation. CAUTION Under the rear section of the center console Changes or modifications not expressly Under the front section of the center con- approved by the manufacturer could void the sole user's authority to operate the equipment. Siemens VDO 5WK48891 Tested To Comply With FCC Standards

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 06 Locks and alarm

WARNING Locking/unlocking – from the outside In this case the vehicle can be unlocked with The remote key (p. 150) is used to lock/unlock the detachable key blade (p. 156). People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer all of the doors and the tailgate at the same Related information time. Different settings for unlocking the vehi- than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the keyless • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164) drive system's antennas. This is to help cle can be selected, see Remote key – func- prevent interference between the pace- tions (p. 153). maker and the keyless drive system. Before the vehicle can be locked from the outside with the remote key, the driver's door Related information must be closed. If the tailgate or any other • Keyless drive*– locking/unlocking (p. 159) door is open, it will be locked and the alarm will be armed.

NOTE Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless drive system, all doors/tailgate must be closed before the vehicle can be locked. 06 The first press on the unlock button unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the tailgate (see also remote key and key blade (p. 150)). This setting can be changed in the menu system. See MY CAR (p. 76) for a description. If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the battery in the remote, see Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 06 Locks and alarm

Manual locking In the horizontal position, the door cannot Locking/unlocking – from inside In certain situations (e.g., if there is no electri- be opened from the outside. The lock buttons on the door panel can be cal current in the vehicle), the doors can be In the vertical position, the door can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tail- locked manually. opened from the inside and the outside. gate at the same time. Press to lock and to unlock. The detachable key blade (p. 155) can be NOTE used in the lock cylinder in the driver's door From inside the vehicle (central locking to lock that door. If the manual child safety lock (p. 61) is activated for a rear side door and that door button) The other doors do not have lock cylinders is also locked manually, the door cannot and the slot on the rear edge of each door be opened from the outside or inside. The has to be used to lock it. This will lock the door can only be unlocked with the remote door from the outside but it can still be key or the central locking button. opened from inside the vehicle. To do so: Related information • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157)

Central locking button 06 The lock buttons on the door panel can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. Press to lock and to unlock. Manually locking a door Unlocking – Insert the key blade into the slot and turn it 90 degrees to lock that door (the slot in The vehicle can be unlocked from inside the a particular door locks that door only). vehicle in two ways: • By pressing the unlock button . • The door can be unlocked by pulling the door handle once and opened by pulling the handle again.

164 06 Locks and alarm

Locking Automatic locking Locking/unlocking – glove • Press the lock button after the front When the vehicle starts to move, the doors compartment doors have been closed. and tailgate can be locked automatically. This The glove compartment can only be locked • Each door can be locked individually with feature can be turned on or off by pressing and unlocked using the detachable key blade the lock button on the respective doors. MY CAR and going to Car settings Lock in the remote key. For information on remov- The door must be closed first. settings Automatic door locking. ing the key blade from the remote key, see Alternative locking when parking Detachable key blade – detaching/reinserting Related information (p. 155). The central locking button on the driver's • Locking/unlocking – from the outside door can also be used to lock the vehicle (p. 163) when you leave it. To do so: • Alarm – general information (p. 169) 1. Open the door. • Remote key – functions (p. 153) 2. Press the lock section of the button. 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm.

NOTE Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on Insert the key blade in the glove compart- 06 the remote key. ment lock. If the vehicle is locked using the central Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. locking button, be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the Remove the key blade from the lock. door.

Automatic relocking If the doors are unlocked, the locks will automatically reengage (re-lock) and the alarm will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or the tailgate has been opened.

165 06 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking – tailgate NOTE NOTE The tailgate can be opened, locked and If the doors are locked while the tail- The taillights will illuminate automatically unlocked in several ways. • gate is open, the tailgate will remain for a short period when the tailgate has unlocked until the vehicle is relocked been opened. by pressing the Lock button on the remote key. Locking the tailgate with the remote • On keyless drive vehicles, the gear key selector must be in the Park (P) posi- Press the lock button ( ) on the remote. tion, all doors and the tailgate must be See also (p. 150). closed and the ignition must be switched off before the vehicle can be The alarm indicator on the dashboard will locked. begin flashing to show that the vehicle is locked and that the alarm has been armed. Unlocking the tailgate from the driver's Opening that tailgate manually seat Tailgate unlock button on the remote key Unlocking the tailgate with the remote key – Press the tailgate unlock button on the remote key to unlock (but not open3) the 06 tailgate. See Remote key and key blade (p. 150) for more information. > The alarm indicator light on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the alarm is not monitoring the entire vehicle. The tailgate is held closed by an electronic – Press the button on the lighting panel (1) locking mechanism. To open: to unlock (but not open4) the tailgate.

3 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 167). 4 This button also opens, but does not close, the tailgate on models equipped with the optional power tailgate (p. 167).

166 06 Locks and alarm

1. Press lightly on the rubberized plate Power tailgate – automatic opening/ CAUTION under the handle to release the lock. closing Be sure that there is adequate space 2. Lift the handle to open the tailgate. The power tailgate can be opened/closed above and behind the vehicle before open- using a button on the lighting panel or on the ing the tailgate automatically. remote key. CAUTION The vehicle should not be driven or moved When pressing the rubberized plate, Automatic opening with the tailgate in the open position. How- • ever, if the vehicle is moved with the tail- only light pressure is necessary to The power tailgate can be opened automati- gate in the open position, the automatic release the tailgate's electronic locking cally in the three ways: closing function will be inoperative until mechanism. • one of the following occurs: By pressing and holding the but- • When opening the tailgate, pull it up • The tailgate is closed manually using the handle. Too much pressure ton on the lighting panel until the tailgate on the rubberized plate can damage begins to open. • The ignition is switched off and the key its electrical connections. • is removed for approximately 10 By pressing and holding the but- minutes (the tailgate will function again ton on the remote key until the tailgate after restart). Related information begins to open. • Locking/unlocking – from inside (p. 164) • By pressing the rubber-covered button NOTE • Locking/unlocking – from the outside under the outer handle on the tailgate. (p. 163) If the tailgate has been opened and closed The taillights illuminate automatically when continuously too long, the automatic func- the automatic open function is used. tion will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic 06 function can be used again after approximately 2 minutes. If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be opened and closed once manually to reset the system.

}} 167 06 Locks and alarm

|| Automatic closing Power tailgate – programming Power tailgate – interruption The power tailgate can be closed by pressing The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be Automatic opening or closing the tailgate can programmed, which can be useful, for exam- be interrupted in four ways: the -button on the tailgate (see the ple, if the tailgate has to be opened in a illustration) or by pressing it down. • garage with a low ceiling. By pressing the button on the lighting panel. WARNING To do so: • Be sure that no one is near the tailgate • Open the tailgate manually, hold it at the By pressing the button on the when it is opened or closed automatically. desired maximum opening angle and remote key. The tailgate should never be obstructed in press the tailgate's closing button for at any way when it is operated. • By pressing the button on the lower edge least 3 seconds. When the tailgate is of the tailgate. released, programming is complete. By pressing the rubber-covered button Related information • • To remove this programming, open the under the outer handle on the tailgate. • Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166) tailgate manually to a higher opening angle and press the tailgate's closing but- If one of these actions is taken, the tailgate ton for at least 3 seconds. will stop and reopen. Related information Pinch protection • Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166) If the tailgate is obstructed while it is being operated, the pinch protection function is activated. • If the tailgate is being opened, the electri- 06 cal function will be switched off and the tailgate will stop. • If the tailgate is being closed, it will stop and reopen. Related information • Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166)

168 06 Locks and alarm

Power tailgate – manual opening/ Alarm – general information Related information closing The alarm system provides a warning if an • Alarm – turning off (p. 171) The power tailgate can be disconnected from attempt is made to break into the vehicle. • Alarm signal (p. 171) the vehicle’s electrical system. The alarm is automatically armed (p. 170) • Alarm indicator (p. 170) This is done by quickly pulling the outer han- whenever the vehicle is locked with the dle twice. The tailgate can then be opened/ remote key. closed manually. When armed, the alarm continuously monitors a number of points on the vehicle. The follow- Related information ing conditions will trigger the alarm: • Locking/unlocking – tailgate (p. 166) • The hood is forced open. • The tailgate is forced open. • A door is forced open. • The ignition slot is tampered with. • An attempt is made to start the vehicle with a non-approved key (a key not coded to the car's ignition). • The battery is disconnected (while the alarm is armed). • The siren is disconnected when the alarm is disarmed. 06 A message will appear in the information display if a fault should occur in the alarm system. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

NOTE Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself. This could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle.

169 06 Locks and alarm

Alarm indicator Alarm – arming/disarming Disarming the alarm The status of the alarm system is indicated by The alarm system provides a warning if an – Press the Unlock button on the remote the red indicator light on the dashboard (see attempt is made to break into the vehicle. key. illustration): > Two short flashes from the car's direc- Arming the alarm tion indicators confirm that the alarm – Press the Lock button on the remote key. has been deactivated and that all One long flash of the turn signals will con- doors are unlocked. firm that the alarm (p. 169) is armed. Related information Alarm confirmation settings can be changed • Alarm indicator (p. 170) in MY CAR, under Car settings Lock Alarm signal (p. 171) settings Keyless entry. For a description • of the menu system, see My Car – introduc- • Alarm – turning off (p. 171) tion (p. 76). • Alarm-related functions (p. 171) USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following • Indicator light off: the alarm is not conditions: (1) This device may not cause armed (p. 170) harmful interference, and (2) this device must • The indicator light flashes at one-second accept any interference received, including intervals: the alarm is armed interference that may cause undesired opera- 06 • The indicator light flashes rapidly before tion. the remote key is inserted in the ignition slot and the ignition is put in mode I: the Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) alarm has been triggered. This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer- Related information ence, and (2) this device must accept any • Alarm – general information (p. 169) interference, including interference that may • Alarm – turning off (p. 171) cause undesired operation of the device. • Alarm signal (p. 171)

170 06 Locks and alarm

Alarm signal Alarm – turning off Alarm-related functions An audible (p. 169) signal is given by a battery The alarm system provides a warning if an The following is general information regarding powered siren. The alarm cycle lasts for attempt is made to break into the vehicle. the alarm system in your vehicle. 30 seconds. If the alarm is sounding, it can be stopped by Automatic re-arming The visual alarm signal is given by flashing all pressing the Unlock button on the remote key If the doors are unlocked, the locks will auto- turn signals for approximately 5 minutes or or by inserting the remote key in the ignition matically re-engage (re-lock) and the alarm until the alarm is turned off. slot. Two short flashes from the car's turn sig- will re-arm after 2 minutes unless a door or nals confirm that the alarm has been turned the tailgate has been opened. Related information off. • Alarm indicator (p. 170) Remote key not functioning • Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 170) Related information If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle • Alarm – turning off (p. 171) • Alarm indicator (p. 170) can be started as follows: • Alarm – arming/disarming (p. 170) 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. • Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157) > This will trigger the alarm.

2. To turn off the alarm, insert the remote key into the ignition slot (also on vehicles with the optional keyless drive). 3. Start the engine.

}} 171 06 Locks and alarm

|| Related information • Detachable key blade – unlocking (p. 156) • Detachable key blade – general information (p. 155) • Starting the engine (p. 247)

172 DRIVER SUPPORT 07 Driver support

Active chassis* (Four C) Comfort Stability system – introduction Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Comfort mode offers a somewhat softer ride The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system Controlled Chassis Concept), regulates the and the transmission shifts gears at lower consists of a number of functions designed to characteristics of the shock absorbers so that rpm. This mode is particularly suitable for help reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding the vehicle's driving characteristics can be long-distance highway driving. The indicator and to generally help improve directional sta- adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, light in the button will be on when this mode bility. Sport and Advanced. is selected. A pulsating sound will be audible Sport Operation when the system is actively operat- In this mode, the vehicle's body sway is ing and is normal. Acceleration will reduced during cornering and steering also be slightly slower than normal. response is more immediate. The transmission shifts up at higher rpm for sportier driv- WARNING ing. The indicator light in the button will be on to indicate that Sport mode has been ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot selected. deal with all situations or road conditions. Advanced The driver is always responsible for oper- In this mode, body sway in curves is minimal ating the vehicle in a safe manner in and steering response is very direct. Gear accordance with current traffic regulations. shifting is done at high rpm in each gear for dynamic and active driving. ESC consists of the following functions: Chassis settings Related information • Traction control Use the buttons in the center console to • Adjustable steering force* (p. 179) • Spin control change setting. The setting in use when the • Active Yaw Control engine is switched off is activated the next Engine Drag Control time the engine is started. • 07 • Corner Traction Control NOTE • Trailer Stability Assist This system is available on Canadian models only.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Traction Control (TC) were to stop, power steering would not func- Stability system – operation This function is designed to help reduce tion, making the vehicle more difficult to wheel spin at low speeds by transferring steer. Operation power from a drive wheel that begins to lose Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)1 Sport mode traction to the wheel on the opposite side of The TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is tow- The stability system is always activated and the vehicle (on the same axle). ing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have cannot be switched off. Spin Control (SC) begun to sway. See Trailer Stability Assist However, the driver can The SC function is designed to help prevent (TSA) (p. 284) for more information. select Sport mode, which the drive wheels from spinning while the vehi- This system is automatically deactivated if the offers more active driving cle is accelerating. driver selects Sport mode. characteristics. Active Yaw Control (AYC) Sport mode can be selected This function helps maintain directional stabil- Related information in the MY CAR menus, see ity, for example when cornering, by braking • Stability system – operation (p. 175) My Car – introduction (p. 76). one or more of the wheels if the vehicle • Stability system – symbols and messages shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. (p. 177) In Sport mode, the engine management system monitors movement of the accelerator Corner Traction Control (CTC) • Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 284) pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving CTC compensates for understeering and by allowing more lateral movement of the rear helps provide additional stability when accel- wheels before ESC is activated. erating through a curve by preventing the inside wheel from spinning. This is particularly Under certain circumstances, such as when useful when accelerating on a curving high- driving with snow chains, or driving in deep way on-ramp. snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum CTC is most effective if the stability system's tractive force. Sport mode is selected. See the section about Sport mode. If the driver releases pressure on the acceler- 07 Engine Drag Control (EDC) ator pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the vehicle. EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when To switch to Sport mode: shifting down in the Geartronic manual shift- Sport mode remains active until the driver ing mode or while using the engine's braking switches it off in the menu or until the engine function on a slippery surface. If the engine

1 Included when a Volvo trailer hitch is installed }} 175 07 Driver support

|| is switched off. ETC will return to normal mode when the engine is restarted. Related information • Stability system – introduction (p. 174) • Stability system – symbols and messages (p. 177)

176 07 Driver support

Stability system – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the main instrument panel A text message can be erased by pressing briefly the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

ESC Temporarily OFF The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly. • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. • If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected.

"Message" Read the message in the instrument panel.

and

07 Steady glow for The system is performing a self-diagnostic test. 2 seconds.

}} 177 07 Driver support

|| Symbol Message Description

Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid.

Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated. Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced.

WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions.

Related information • Stability system – introduction (p. 174) • Stability system – operation (p. 175)

178 07 Driver support

Adjustable steering force* Road Sign Information (RSI)* – Related information Steering force increases with the speed of the introduction • Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation vehicle to give the driver enhanced sense of RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road (p. 180) control and stability. At low speed the vehicle signs with the posted speed limit. • Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations is easy to steer in order to facilitate parking, (p. 180) etc. Introduction Adjustable steering force* Steering force can be changed under MY CAR Car settings Steering wheel force. Select Low, Medium or High. For a description of the menu system, My Car – introduction (p. 76).

NOTE This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion. Examples of readable road signs If the vehicle passes a sign showing the NOTE speed limit, this will be displayed in the center In certain situations, the power steering console. may become too warm and will have to be temporarily cooled down. While this is WARNING happening, the power steering effect will be reduced slightly and somewhat more RSI does not function in all situations and effort may be required to turn the steering is only intended to provide supplementary 07 wheel. information. If this occurs, a message will be displayed The driver is always responsible for oper- in the instrument panel. ating the vehicle safely.

Related information • Active chassis* (Four C) (p. 174)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 07 Driver support

Road Sign Information (RSI) – Displaying the speed limit indication can be Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation deactivated. To do so: limitations • Deselect the alternative in MY CAR RSI's camera has the same limitations as the Settings Car settings Road Sign human eye. See The camera’s limitations Information or cancel by pressing EXIT. (p. 217) for more information about the cam- Speed alert era's limitations. The driver can opt to be alerted if the vehicle Signs that indirectly indicate the speed limit exceeds the posted speed limit by more than (such as a sign with a town's name and the 3 mph (5 km/h). The alert is given when the permitted speed limit) will not be registered symbol with the posted speed limit in the by RSI. instrument panel begins to flash. Other factors that may interfere with RSI To activate speed alert: include: • Check the Speed alert box in MY CAR • Faded signs Speed limit information Settings Car settings Speed alert or cancel by pressing EXIT. • Signs located in a curve When RSI registers a road sign showing the • Twisted or damaged signs speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol Related information • Obstructed signs on the instrument panel. • Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction (p. 179) • Signs that are partially covered by snow, Settings in MY CAR ice, etc. • Road Sign Information (RSI) – limitations (p. 180) Related information • My Car – introduction (p. 76) • Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduction (p. 179) • Road Sign Information (RSI) – operation 07 (p. 180) • The camera’s limitations (p. 217)

Possible settings in MY CAR

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Cruise control (CC) – introduction Related information Cruise control (CC) – engaging and Cruise control is designed to assist the driver • Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set- setting speed by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily ting speed (p. 181) Cruise control is designed to assist the driver intended for use on long straight roads in • Cruise control (CC) – deactivating by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily steady traffic, such as on highways and other (p. 183) intended for use on long straight roads in main roads. steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads. Operation Engaging the cruise control function

Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode Steering wheel-mounted controls and display Standby mode Resume set speed Resume set speed Deactivating Deactivating Activate/set speed 07 Activate/set speed Selected speed (gray symbol indicates standby mode) Selected speed (gray symbol indicates Cruise control active: white symbol (gray standby mode) symbol indicates standby mode) Cruise control active: white symbol (gray symbol indicates standby mode)

}} 181 07 Driver support

|| Before a speed can be set, the cruise control Adjusting the set speed Related information system must be engaged (put in standby After a speed has been set, it can be • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181) mode). increased or decreased by using the or • Cruise control (CC) – deactivating – Press the CRUISE button (1). buttons. (p. 183) > The symbol illuminates and the text 1. Press or briefly and release the (---) mph (5) indicates that cruise con- button to increase or decrease vehicle trol is in standby mode. speed by approximately 1 mph or 1 km/h. > This will become the set speed when NOTE the button is released. Putting cruise control in standby mode 2. Press and hold one of these buttons to does not set a cruising speed. increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or 1-km/h increments. Release the button Setting a speed when you have reached the desired Use the or buttons set the vehicle's speed. current speed. The set speed is shown in the display. NOTE • A temporary increase in speed by NOTE pressing the accelerator pedal, for less than 1 minute (e.g. when passing Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h). another car), does not affect the current cruise control setting. The vehicle will automatically return to the previously set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. 07 • If one of the cruise control buttons is kept depressed for more than approx. 1 minute cruise control is disengaged. The engine must then be switched off in order to reset cruise control.

182 07 Driver support

Toggling between ACC and CC completely." The next time the system is Cruise control (CC) – deactivating (standard Cruise Control) switched on, ACC will be reactivated. Cruise control is designed to assist the driver Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) helps the Related information by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily driver maintain a safe distance/time interval to intended for use on long straight roads in • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction the vehicle ahead. steady traffic, such as on highways and other (p. 184) main roads. Switching from ACC to CC • Adaptive Cruise Control – function This may be useful if, for example, the radar (p. 185) Automatic deactivation sensor is obstructed in some way. See The cruise control is automatically deacti- Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) vated temporarily if one of the following for additional information. occurs: • Press and hold the button; the symbol • If the speed drops below approximately in the instrument panel will switch from 20 mph (30 km/h). to . • When the brake pedal is depressed. > This activates the standard cruise control • If the gear selector is moved to position function (see Cruise control (CC) – intro- N. duction (p. 181)). • During wheel spin or wheel lock-up. • If the vehicle's speed is increased by WARNING using the accelerator pedal for more than Switching from ACC to CC means that: 1 minute. Engine speed (rpm) is too high or too low. • Your vehicle will no longer automati- • cally maintain a set distance to a vehi- The currently set speed will be saved in the cle ahead. system's memory. • Only the set speed will be maintained Temporary deactivation and the driver will have to apply the The driver can temporarily deactivate the 07 brakes when needed. cruise control by pressing 0. The saved speed is shown in brackets in the information Switching from CC to ACC display. Switch off cruise control by pressing once or twice as needed according to the instructions in the previous section "Turning ACC off

}} 183 07 Driver support

|| Resume set speed Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction WARNING If the cruise control has been deactivated ACC is an optional system designed to assist Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover temporarily, it can be reactivated by pressing the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set • all driving situations and traffic, time interval to the vehicle ahead. It is primar- . The vehicle's speed returns to the most weather and road conditions. The recently set speed. ily intended for use on long straight roads in "Function" section provides informa- steady traffic, such as on highways and other tion about limitations that the driver WARNING main roads. must be aware of before using this feature. There may be a significant increase in When the driver has set the desired speed speed after the button has been and the time interval to the vehicle ahead, • This system is designed to be a sup- pressed. ACC functions as follows: plementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's • If there are no other vehicles in the lane attention and judgement. The driver is Deactivation ahead of you, your vehicle will travel at responsible for maintaining a safe dis- The Cruise control is disengaged by pressing the set speed. tance and speed and must intervene if or by switching off the engine. The set • If ACC's radar sensor detects a slower Adaptive Cruise Control does not speed is cleared. moving vehicle in the lane ahead, the sys- maintain a suitable speed or suitable tem will adapt your vehicle's speed to distance to the vehicle ahead. WARNING help maintain the set time interval to the • Maintenance of ACC components may vehicle ahead. When there are no longer only be performed by a trained and Cruise control should not be used in heavy slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehi- qualified Volvo technician. traffic or when driving on wet or slippery cle will accelerate to resume the set roads. Cruise control may not maintain set speed. speed on steep downgrades. If ACC is switched off completely or in standby mode and your vehicle comes too Related information close to another vehicle ahead, the driver will • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181) be warned by the Distance Alert system (see 07 • Cruise control (CC) – engaging and set- Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)). ting speed (p. 181)

184 07 Driver support

Operation • Adaptive Cruise Control – troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control – function (p. 197) • Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and Function messages (p. 195) • Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time interval (p. 189) • Adaptive Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 188) • Radar sensor (p. 193) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Queue Assist (p. 191) • Adaptive Cruise Control – passing Controls and display another vehicle (p. 191) Resume previous settings. Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations • 2 (p. 193) Function overview Off/On/Standby mode • Adaptive Cruise Control – function Warning light, braking by driver required Decrease/increase time interval (p. 185) Controls in steering wheel Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging Put in active mode and set a speed (each • (p. 187) Radar sensor in front grille additional press increases/decreases speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) • Adaptive Cruise Control – deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control consists of: (p. 189) Set speed (shown in green when active, • A cruise control system to maintain a set shown in white when in standby mode) speed Time interval • A system to maintain a set distance to the vehicle ahead, which is expressed as a 07 ACC active (green symbol) or in standby time interval. For example, you can mode (white symbol) choose to remain approximately 2 seconds behind the vehicle ahead. The Related information actual distance required to maintain a • Toggling between ACC and CC (standard 2-second interval will vary according the Cruise Control) (p. 183) speed of the vehicles. • Cruise control (CC) – introduction (p. 181)

}} 185 07 Driver support

|| WARNING WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- The brake pedal moves when the adaptive When Adaptive Cruise Control is in sion avoidance system. The driver is cruise control system modulates the standby mode or is switched off com- always responsible for applying the brakes. Do not rest your foot under the pletely, the brakes will not be modulated brakes if the system does not detect brake pedal. automatically. The driver must assume full another vehicle. control over the vehicle. • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react The ACC system is designed to smoothly to people or animals, or small vehicles regulate speed. However, the driver must Warning light—driver braking required such as bicycles and motorcycles. It apply the brakes in situations that require Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force also does not react to slow moving, immediate braking. This applies when there that is equivalent to approximately 40% of parked or approaching vehicles, or are great differences in speed between vehi- the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situa- stationary objects. cles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. tions requiring more brake force than ACC • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in can provide and if the driver does not apply demanding driving conditions such as WARNING the brakes, an audible signal from the Colli- city driving or other heavy traffic situa- sion Warning system will sound and warning Due to limitations in the radar sensor, light will illuminate (see Collision warning* – tions, in slippery conditions, when braking may occur unexpectedly or not at there is a great deal of water or slush all, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita- function (p. 211)) in the windshield to alert on the road, during heavy rain or tions (p. 193). the driver to react. snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control can be put in active mode at any permitted speed. However, if the Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the vehicle's speed falls below 18 mph (30 km/h) contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. or if engine speed (rpm) becomes too low, driver is not looking straight ahead may Your vehicle's speed is regulated by acceler- ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. ating and braking. The brakes may emit a and will no longer modulate the brakes. The 07 sound when they are being modulated by the driver will then have to maintain a safe dis- adaptive cruise control system. This is nor- tance to the vehicle ahead. mal.

2 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control – engaging NOTE Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of Putting ACC in standby mode The driver's door must be closed and the vehicles detected by the radar sensor, see driver's seat belt must be fastened before Before ACC can be used to regulate speed Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- (p. 193). In some cases there may be no and/or the distance to a vehicle ahead, it er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's warning or the warning may be delayed. must first be put in standby mode. door is opened, ACC will return to standby The driver should always apply the brakes To do so: mode. when necessary. Related information Steep inclines and/or heavy loads • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction ACC is primarily intended for use on fairly (p. 184) level roads. The system may have difficulty maintaining the correct distance to a vehicle ahead on steep inclines, if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load or is towing a trailer. In these situations, the driver should always be prepared to apply the brakes if necessary. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 184) Controls and display Off/On/Standby mode

• Press (2). > The same symbol (7) appears (in white) in the instrument panel to indicate that ACC is in standby mode. 07

187 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting This symbol indicates that NOTE speed you are approaching a vehicle ahead. • If one of the Adaptive Cruise Control Setting a speed buttons is pressed for more than ACC will switch from main- Once ACC has been put in standby mode: approximately one minute, ACC will be taining a set speed to main- deactivated. The engine must then be taining a set distance from switched off and restarted to reset that vehicle. ACC. When this happens, a speed • In some situations Adaptive Cruise range will be indicated on Control cannot be put in active mode. the speedometer: Cruise control Unavailable is shown in the display, see Adaptive Cruise The higher speed (the cur- Control – symbols and messages rently set speed (5)) will be (p. 195). marked in green. The lower speed in the range is the speed of Related information the vehicle ahead. • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 184) Controls and display Changing the set speed Put in active mode and set a speed (each • After a speed has been set, it can be additional press increases/decreases increased or decreased by briefly press- speed by 1 mph (approximately 2 km/h)) ing the or buttons. Each time one of these buttons is pressed, the vehicle's • Press or (4). speed changes by 5 mph or 5 km/h. If the > The set speed, for example 60 mph (5), speed is increased by pressing the accel- will be magnified for several seconds and erator pedal, the vehicle's speed when the frame around the speed will change the button is pressed will be set. 07 colors from white to green to indicate • Press and hold one of these buttons to that this speed has been stored (set). increase/decrease the speed in 1-mph or When this symbol has changed col- 1-km/h increments. Release the button ors from white to green, ACC is in when you have reached the desired active mode and the vehicle will speed. maintain the set speed.

188 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – setting time Different time intervals can Adaptive Cruise Control – interval be selected and are shown in deactivating the instrument panel3 as 1–5 Setting a time interval horizontal bars. The greater Standby mode (temporary deactivation) the number of bars, the To temporarily deactivate ACC (put it in longer the time interval. One standby mode): bar represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. To set/change a time interval: • Press the / buttons (3). At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows Controls and display the time interval to vary considerably in cer- Decrease/increase time interval tain situations. Controls and display The set time interval to vehicles ahead can be WARNING increased by pressing and decreased by Resume previous settings. Only use a time interval that is suitable pressing . The current time interval is • Off/On/Standby mode in current traffic conditions. shown briefly in the display following adjust- A short time interval gives the driver • ment. • Press (2). limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. This symbol and the marking for the set speed with change colors from green to 07 white. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction The previously set speed and time interval are (p. 184) resumed by pressing (1).

3 The same symbol appears if Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198)) is activated }} 189 07 Driver support

|| WARNING Cruise control Cancelled is shown in the Turning ACC off completely instrument panel. The driver must then inter- The vehicle may accelerate quickly after vene and adapt the vehicle's speed to the has been pressed if its current speed is surrounding traffic and regulate the distance considerably lower than the set speed. to the vehicle ahead. An automatic switch to standby mode may be Standby mode due to action by the caused if: driver • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in The driver's door is opened standby mode: • • The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt • if the brakes are applied • the vehicle's speed goes below 18 mph • if the gear selector is moved to N (30 km/h) Controls and display • if the driver drives faster than the set • the wheels lose traction speed for more than 1 minute. Resume previous settings. • brake temperature is high In this happens, the driver will have to regu- Off/On/Standby mode late the vehicle's speed. • the radar sensor is obstructed by, for example, wet snow or rain. • From standby mode, press (2) once. NOTE Resuming the set speed • From active mode, press (2) twice. If ACC is in standby mode, it can be reactiva- If the accelerator pedal is only depressed The set speed and time interval are then for a short time, such as when passing ted by pressing the button on the steering cleared from the system's memory and can- another vehicle, ACC is deactivated tem- wheel keypad. The vehicle will return to the not be resumed by pressing (1) . porarily and is reactivated when the pedal most recently set speed. is released. Related information WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction 07 Automatic standby mode The vehicle may accelerate quickly after (p. 184) ACC is linked to other systems such as the stability system. If this system is not function- has been pressed if its current speed is considerably lower than the set speed. ing properly, ACC will switch off automatically. In the event of automatic deactivation, an audible signal will sound and the message

190 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – passing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) – Enhanced speed interval another vehicle Queue Assist Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is NOTE Passing another vehicle linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- If your vehicle’s speed is being regulated by The driver's door must be closed and the sion. driver's seat belt must be fastened before ACC and the driver indicates that he/she ACC can be put in active mode. If the driv- would like to pass the vehicle ahead by using Introduction er's seat belt is taken off or if the driver's the left turn signal, ACC can assist by accel- Queue Assist is an added ACC feature that is door is opened, ACC will return to standby erating briefly. linked to your vehicle's automatic transmis- mode. sion. This function is active at speeds above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). Queue Assist consists of the following func- Your vehicle can maintain the set time interval tions: to the vehicle ahead at any permissible speed, including a complete stop. WARNING • Enhanced speed interval (including when Please be aware that this function will also the vehicle is at a complete stop or is In order to activate ACC at speeds below cause the vehicle to accelerate briefly in moving at speed below 18 mph 18 mph (30 km/h): certain situations other than passing (30 km/h)) The vehicle ahead must be within a rea- another vehicle, for example using the left • • Automatic standby mode when ACC sonable distance (not farther away than turn signal to indicate a lane change or a changes target vehicles turn toward a highway exit at speeds approx. 100 ft/30 meters) above approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). • No automatic braking when at a standstill • The lowest speed that can be selected is • The parking brake is applied automati- 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC will also Related information cally help maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead at lower speeds, including Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction Please note that the lowest speed that can be • a complete stop. (p. 184) set is 18 mph (30 km/h), although ACC can maintain a set speed/distance to a vehicle During short stops (less than approximately ahead down to a standstill. Queue Assist 3 seconds) in slow-moving traffic, your vehi- 07 consists of the following features: cle will begin moving again automatically as soon as the vehicle ahead begins to move. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving, ACC will be automatically go into standby mode.

}} 191 07 Driver support

|| The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in The following only applies at speeds below This happens if: one of the following ways: approximately 18 mph (30 km/h): • The driver presses the brake pedal • By pressing If ACC changes target vehicles (the vehicle • The parking brake is activated that the radar sensor has detected) from a • By accelerating up to at least 3 mph The gear selected is moved to P, N or R moving vehicle to a stationary one, the sys- • (4 km/h). ACC will then resume following • the vehicle ahead. tem will apply the brakes in your vehicle. The driver presses the button to put ACC in standby mode Your vehicle will then resume following the WARNING vehicle ahead at the set time interval. The parking brake is applied At speeds above 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC automatically NOTE will not react to a stationary vehicle and In certain situations, ACC will apply the park- apply the brakes but will instead acceler- ing brake in order to continue keeping the ACC can remain active and keep your ate to the previously set speed. The driver vehicle at a standstill for up to 4 minutes. must actively apply the brakes to stop the vehicle at a standstill. After 4 minutes have elapsed, the parking vehicle. This happens if: brake will be engaged and ACC will go into standby mode. • The driver opens the door or takes off ACC disengages and goes into standby his/her seat belt To reactivate ACC, the driver must release mode if: the parking brake (see Parking brake – • The stability system is put in Sport mode general information (p. 269)). • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph (see Stability system – operation (p. 175)) (15 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill the target object is a stationary vehicle or for more than 2 minutes Automatic standby mode when ACC some other type of object such as e.g., a changes target vehicles speed bump. • The engine has been switched off • Your vehicle's speed goes below 10 mph • The brakes have overheated (15 km/h) and the vehicle ahead turns so Related information that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction 07 follow. • (p. 184) No automatic braking when at a standstill In certain situations, ACC will no longer apply the brakes and go into standby mode while If the vehicle ahead turns suddenly, there may be the vehicle is not moving. This means that the a stationary vehicle ahead driver will have to apply the brakes.

192 07 Driver support

Radar sensor heavy rain, or if snow or other objects are Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations The radar sensor is designed to help detect obscuring the radar sensor. The ACC cannot cover all driving situations cars or larger vehicles driving in the same and traffic, weather and road conditions. direction as your vehicle, in the same lane. NOTE Situations where ACC may not function The radar sensor and its limitations Keep the area in front of the radar sensor clean. optimally In addition to being used by the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), the radar sensor is also WARNING used by Distance Alert (see Distance Alert – • if the speed of vehicles ahead is signifi- introduction (p. 198)) and Collision Warning cantly different from your own speed. • The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detec- Related information tion (see Collision warning – introduction a vehicle later than expected or not • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction detect other vehicles at all. (p. 209)). (p. 184) • If ACC is not functioning properly, Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) WARNING • cruise control will also be disabled. • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198) • If there is visible damage to the front grille or you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged in any way, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. The radar sensor may only function partially (or not at all) if it is damaged or is not securely fastened in place. • Accessories or other objects, such as extra headlights, must not be installed in front of the grille. 07 • Modification of the radar sensor could make its use illegal.

The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded: • if the radar sensor is obstructed and cannot detect other vehicles, for example in

}} 193 07 Driver support

|| WARNING WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover • Adaptive Cruise Control is not a colli- all driving situations and traffic, sion avoidance system. The driver is weather and road conditions. The always responsible for applying the "Function" section provides informa- brakes if the system does not detect tion about limitations that the driver another vehicle. must be aware of before using this • Adaptive Cruise Control does not react feature. to people or animals, or small vehicles • This system is designed to be a sup- such as bicycles and motorcycles. It plementary driving aid. It is not, how- also does not react to slow moving, ever, intended to replace the driver's parked or approaching vehicles, or attention and judgement. The driver is stationary objects. responsible for maintaining a safe dis- • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in tance and speed and must intervene if demanding driving conditions such as Adaptive Cruise Control does not city driving or other heavy traffic situa- maintain a suitable speed or suitable tions, in slippery conditions, when distance to the vehicle ahead. there is a great deal of water or slush • Maintenance of ACC components may on the road, during heavy rain or only be performed by a trained and snow, in poor visibility, on winding qualified Volvo technician. roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Radar sensor's field of vision (shown in pink) In certain situations, the radar sensor Related information cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction for example a vehicle that suddenly (p. 184) enters the lane between your vehicle and 07 the target vehicle. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle.

194 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages in the display A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Green symbol A speed has been set.

White symbol ACC is in standby mode but no speed has been set.

- Standard cruise control has been selected manually.

- Set ESC to Normal to ACC cannot be put in active mode until the stability system is switched normal operating mode, see enable Cruise Stability system – introduction (p. 174) for more information.

- Cruise control Cancel- ACC has been automatically switched off. The driver has to regulate the vehicle’s speed/distance to the led vehicle ahead.

- Cruise control Unavail- ACC cannot be put in active mode. This may be due to: able • high brake temperature • the radar sensor is obstructed (by heavy rain, snow, etc.) 07 Radar blocked See ACC has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and cannot detect manual other vehicles. In this situation, the driver can switch to standard cruise control, see Toggling between ACC and CC (standard Cruise Control) (p. 183) See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

}} 195 07 Driver support

|| Symbol Message Description

- Cruise control Service ACC is not functioning. required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

- Press Brake To hold + The vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will release the brakes before the parking brake engages to keep an audible signal the vehicle stopped but a problem with the parking brake means that the vehicle may begin to roll. The driver will have to apply the brakes. The message will remain in the display and the audible signal will continue until the driver applies the brakes or presses the accelerator pedal.

- Below 30 km/h Only This is displayed if you try to activate ACC at speeds below approx. 18 mph (30 km/h) without a vehicle following ahead within range (approx. 100 ft/30 meters).

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 184)

196 07 Driver support

Adaptive Cruise Control – from the sensor have been obstructed and System with Auto-brake and Pedestrian troubleshooting that a vehicle ahead cannot be detected. Detection will not function. This, in turn, means that the functions of the The table lists possible causes for this mes- If the message Radar blocked See manual ACC, Distance Alert, and Collision Warning sage being displayed, and suitable actions. is displayed, this means that the radar signals

Cause Action

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some Clean the radar surface, or remove the object causing the obstruction. way.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.

Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect with the radar signals. the function of the radar.

The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that display. it is no longer obstructed.

Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control – introduction (p. 184)

197 07 Driver support

Distance Alert – introduction NOTE Distance Alert – operation Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- Distance Alert only monitors distance to trol and is a function that provides information the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise trol and is a function that provides information about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Control is in standby mode or off. about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. Introduction Distance Alert is active at speeds above WARNING approximately 18 mph (30 km/h). Time inter- Distance Alert only indicates the distance val information is only given for a vehicle that to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the is driving ahead of your vehicle in the same speed of your vehicle. direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill. Related information • Distance Alert – operation (p. 198) • Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199) • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 201) Press the button in the center instrument panel to switch this function on or off. The indicator light in the button illuminates when the function is on. Depending on the optional equipment selected, there may not be room for a Dis- tance Alert button in the center console. In this case, the function is controlled through Amber warning light4. 07 the menu system. Press MY CAR and go to An amber warning light in the windshield Settings Car settings Distance alert glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the On/Off. one ahead than the set time interval.

4 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

198 07 Driver support

Setting a time interval NOTE Distance Alert – limitations Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- The higher your vehicle’s speed, the • trol and is a function that provides information greater the distance to the vehicle about the time interval to the vehicle ahead. ahead, measured in feet (meters), for a given time interval. Limitations • The set time interval is also used by Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor Adaptive Cruise Control, see Adaptive used by Adaptive Cruise Control and the Col- Cruise Control – setting speed (p. 188). lision Warning system. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for more infor- WARNING mation on the radar sensor’s limitations. Only use a time interval that is suitable in NOTE current traffic conditions. Controls and display Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light Time interval: Increase/decrease contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the Related information driver is not looking straight ahead may Time interval On • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198) make the visual warning signal in the wind- Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199) shield difficult to see. Press to increase the interval or to • decrease it. • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 201) WARNING Five different time intervals can be selected and are • Bad weather or winding roads may shown in the display as 1–5 affect the radar sensor’s capacity to horizontal bars. The greater detect vehicles ahead. the number of bars, the • The size of the vehicle ahead, such as longer the time interval. One a motorcycle, may also make it difficult bar represents approximately to detect. This may result in the warn- 07 1 second to the vehicle ahead; 5 bars is ing light illuminating at a shorter dis- approximately 3 seconds. tance than the one that has been set, or that the light will not come on at all.

}} 199 07 Driver support

|| Related information • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198) • Distance Alert – operation (p. 198) • Distance Alert – symbols and messages (p. 201)

200 07 Driver support

Distance Alert – symbols and Symbols and text messages messages A text message can be erased by pressing Distance Alert is part of Adaptive Cruise Con- briefly on the OK button on the turn signal trol and is a function that provides information lever. about the time interval to the vehicle ahead.

Symbol Message Description

Radar blocked See Distance Alert has been temporarily disconnected because the radar is obstructed in some way and can- manual not detect other vehicles. See Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Serv- Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Full Auto-brake and Pedestrian Detection is not functioning prop- ice required erly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information • Distance Alert – introduction (p. 198) • Distance Alert – operation (p. 198) • Distance Alert – limitations (p. 199)

201 07 Driver support

City Safety – introduction which means that the system cannot help the WARNING City Safety™5 is a support system designed driver in all situations. • City Safety™ only reacts to vehicles to help the driver avoid low speed collisions City Safety™ should not be used to alter the traveling in the same direction as your when driving in slow-moving, stop-and-go way in which the driver operates the vehicle. vehicle and does not react to small traffic. The driver should never rely solely on this vehicles or motorcycles or to people or system to safely stop the vehicle. animals. City Safety™ is not active if your vehicle’s speed is below approximately 2 mph Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will • City Safety™ is not activated when (4 km/h). This means that City Safety™ will not be aware of City Safety™ except when your vehicle is backing up. not react if your vehicle approaches another the system intervenes when a low-speed col- • City Safety™ functions at speeds up vehicle at very low speed, for example, when lision is imminent. to 30 mph (50 km/h). This system can parking. If the vehicle is also equipped with the help prevent a collision if the difference in speed between your vehicle The function is active at speeds up to optional Collision Warning with Full Auto- and the vehicle ahead is less than approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and assists brake and Pedestrian Detection system, the 9 mph (15 km/h). If the difference in two systems interact. For more information the driver by applying the brakes automati- speed is greater, a collision cannot be about the Collision Warning with Auto-brake cally, thereby avoiding or helping to reduce avoided but the speed at which the system, see Collision warning – introduction the effects of a collision. collision occurs can be reduced. The (p. 209) . City Safety™ is designed to intervene as late driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes as possible to help avoid unnecessary activa- for full braking effect. WARNING tion. • City Safety™ will not intervene in a potential collision situation if the vehi- City Safety™ triggers brief, forceful braking if • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to cle is being driven actively. The driver a low-speed collision is imminent. However, the driver. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions is always responsible for maintaining a the system will not intervene in situations or his/her responsibility for operating safe distance to a vehicle or object where the driver actively steers the vehicle or the vehicle in a safe manner. ahead. applies the brakes, even if a collision cannot 07 be avoided. This is done in order to always • City Safety™ does not function in all give the driver’s actions highest priority. driving situations or in all traffic, Related information weather or road conditions. • City Safety – function (p. 203) City Safety™ activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, • City Safety – operation (p. 204) • City Safety – limitations (p. 204)

5 City Safety is a registered trademark of the Volvo Car Corporation

202 07 Driver support

• City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) City Safety – function tion display to indicate that the system is/has • City Safety – symbols and messages been active. (p. 207) Function • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208) NOTE • When City Safety™ applies the brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. • In cases where City Safety™ has stopped the vehicle, the system will then release the brakes. The driver must apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) Location of the laser sensor in the windshield6 • City Safety – operation (p. 204) City Safety™ monitors traffic ahead of you • City Safety – limitations (p. 204) using a laser sensor mounted in the upper • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) section of the windshield. If a collision is City Safety – symbols and messages imminent, City Safety™ will automatically • (p. 207) apply the brakes, which may feel like hard braking. • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208) If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is more than approximately 9 mph (15 km/h), City Safety™ alone cannot prevent a collision from taking 07 place. The driver must apply the brakes to help avoid a collision or reduce its effect. When the function activates and applies the brakes, a message will appear in the informa-

6 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model

203 07 Driver support

City Safety – operation Related information City Safety – limitations • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) Using City Safety™ • City Safety – function (p. 203) Limitations City Safety – limitations (p. 204) NOTE • WARNING • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) The City Safety™ function is activated The laser sensor has certain limitations automatically each time the engine has • City Safety – symbols and messages and its function may be reduced (or it may been switched off and restarted. (p. 207) not function at all) in conditions such as • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208) heavy rain or snowfall, or by dense fog or thick, blowing dust or snow. Condensa- On and Off • My Car – introduction (p. 76) tion, dirt, ice or snow on the windshield In certain situations, it may be desirable to may also interfere with the sensor’s func- switch City Safety™ off, such as when driving tion. in close quarters where leaves, branches, etc. may obscure the hood and windshield. The sensor used by City Safety™ is designed When the engine is running, City Safety™ can to detect cars and other larger motor vehicles be switched off as follows: ahead of your vehicle in both daylight and darkness. Press My Car in the center console control panel and go to Settings Car settings Objects such as warning flags hanging from long objects on the roof or accessories such Driver support systems City Safety. as auxiliary lights or protective arches on the Select Off. front of the vehicle that are higher than the If the engine is switched off, City Safety™ will hood may also impede the sensor’s function. reactivate when the engine is restarted. Braking distance to the vehicle ahead increases on slippery road surfaces, which may WARNING 07 reduce City Safety’s capacity to avoid a colli- The laser sensor emits light when the igni- sion. In situations like this, the stability sys- tion is in mode II or higher, even if City tem (see Stability system – introduction Safety™ has been switched off. (p. 174)) will help provide the best possible braking capacity and stability. To switch City Safety™ on again: City Safety™ emits a laser beam and meas- • Follow the same procedure as for switch- ures the way in which the light is reflected. ing City Safety™ off but select On.

204 07 Driver support

Therefore, vehicles or objects with low-reflec- City Safety – troubleshooting NOTE tive surfaces may not be detected. Normally, the license plate and taillight reflectors give Troubleshooting If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in the rear section of a vehicle ahead sufficient If Windscreen Sensors blocked appears in front the laser sensor, contact a trained reflective surfaces to be detected. the information display, this indicates that the and qualified Volvo service technician to City Safety™ laser sensor is obstructed in repair or replace the windshield (see the NOTE some way and cannot detect vehicles ahead illustration showing the location of the sen- of you, which means that the system is not sor in City Safety – function (p. 203)). Fail- • Keep the windshield in front of the functioning. ing to do so may result in reduced City laser sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, Safety™ functionality. etc., see City Safety – function However, this message will not be displayed (p. 203). in all situations in which the sensor is To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than obstructed. For this reason, the driver must 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sen- ensure that the area of the windshield in front • Volvo recommends that cracks, sor. Keep the hood free of ice and of the sensor is always kept clean. scratches or stone chips on the wind- snow. shield in front of the laser sensor The following table shows some of the situa- should not be repaired; in such cases, • Do not mount or in any way attach tions that can cause the message to be dis- the entire windshield should be anything on the windshield that could played and suggested actions. replaced. obstruct the laser sensor. • Before the windshield is replaced, Cause Action contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that Related information the correct windshield is ordered and The area of the wind- Clean the • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) installed. If the wrong type of windshield in front of the sen- windshield or • City Safety – function (p. 203) shield is used, this may cause City sor is dirty or covered by remove the ice/ Safety™ to function improperly or not • City Safety – operation (p. 204) ice or snow. snow. at all. Volvo recommends the use of City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) only Genuine Volvo Replacement • The laser sensor's field Remove the Windshields. • City Safety – symbols and messages of view is obstructed. obstruction. 07 (p. 207) • When replacing windshield wipers, use • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208) the same type or ones approved by Volvo.

}} 205 07 Driver support

|| Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) • City Safety – function (p. 203) • City Safety – operation (p. 204) • City Safety – limitations (p. 204) • City Safety – symbols and messages (p. 207) • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

206 07 Driver support

City Safety – symbols and messages main instrument panel may illuminate and its A text message can be erased by pressing associated message will be displayed. briefly on the OK button on the turn signal Symbols and messages in the display lever. When City Safety™ automatically applies the brakes, one or more of the symbols in the

Symbol Message Meaning/action required

Auto braking by City City Safety™ is applying/has applied the brakes automatically. Safety

Windscreen Sensors The laser sensor is temporarily not functioning due to an obstruction. blocked • Remove the obstruction and/or clean the windshield in front of the sensor(s). For more information on the sensor’s limitations, see City Safety – limitations (p. 204).

City Safety Service City Safety™ is not functioning. required • If this message remains in the display, have the system checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) • City Safety – function (p. 203) • City Safety – operation (p. 204) • City Safety – limitations (p. 204) 07 • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) • City Safety – Laser sensor (p. 208)

207 07 Driver support

City Safety – Laser sensor Maximum pulse energy 2.64 μJ WARNING

The laser sensor Maximum average output 45 mW Eye injury may occur if any of the following points are not followed: Pulse length 33 ns • It is essential that all pertinent instructions be followed when handling laser Divergence (horizontal × verti- 28° × 12° instruments. Testing, repairing, remov- cal) ing, adjusting and/or replacing any components in the laser sensor may NOTE only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The function of aftermarket laser detectors may be affected by City Safety's laser sen- • Do not remove the laser sensor sor. (including removal of the lenses). A laser sensor that has been removed belongs to laser class 3B according to WARNING standard IEC 60825-1. Devices in laser The upper decal describes the laser beam's class 3B present a risk of injury to the The laser sensor emits light when the igni- classification and contains the following text: tion is in mode II or higher, even if City eyes. Invisible Laser radiation – Do not view directly Safety™ has been switched off. • The laser sensor’s connector must be with optical instruments (magnifiers) – Class disconnected before the sensor is 1M laser product. removed from the windshield. The laser sensor must be mounted in The lower decal describes the laser beam's • place on the windshield before con- physical data and contains the text: necting the sensor’s connector. IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies with • Do not view the laser sensor (which FDA performance standards for laser prod- emits spreading, invisible laser beams) 07 ucts except for deviations pursuant to Laser with optical instruments from a dis- Notice No. 50, dated July 26th, 2001 tance of less than 4 inches (100 mm). The laser beam's physical data is listed in the following table: Related information • City Safety – introduction (p. 202) • City Safety – function (p. 203) • City Safety – operation (p. 204)

208 07 Driver support

• City Safety – limitations (p. 204) Collision warning – introduction ing the vehicle. If the driver relies entirely on • City Safety – troubleshooting (p. 205) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full the system, the chances of an accident even- tually occurring increase considerably. • City Safety – symbols and messages Auto Brake is designed to assist the driver if (p. 207) there is a risk of a collision with a pedestrian, The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full a cyclist, a vehicle ahead that is at a standstill Auto Brake and City Safety™ systems sup- or one that is moving in the same direction as plement each other. See City Safety – intro- your vehicle. duction (p. 202) for detailed information about City Safety™. This system consists of the following three functions: WARNING • Collision Warning warns the driver of a potential collision situation. No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. • Brake Support helps the driver brake For that reason, never test the Auto-brake efficiently in a critical situation. system by driving toward a person or • Auto-brake brakes the vehicle automati- object. This could result in serious injury or cally if a collision with a pedestrian, a death. cyclist or another vehicle cannot be avoided and the driver does not apply the brakes in time or steer around the person/vehicle. Auto-brake can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. Since Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is activated in circumstances where the driver should have begun braking much sooner, the system will not be able to 07 assist the driver in all situations. This system is designed to activate as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary interven- tion. The system should not be used in such a way that the driver changes his/her way of operat-

}} 209 07 Driver support

|| WARNING WARNING • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 213) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with • • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) Full Auto Brake does not work in all Full Auto Brake will not provide a • driving, traffic, weather and road con- warning or brake the vehicle for • The camera’s limitations (p. 217) ditions. It does not react to vehicles pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, • The camera’s limitations (p. 217) not traveling in the same direction as even if there is street lighting in the Collision warning – troubleshooting your vehicle. area. • (p. 218) Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with The auto-brake function can help pre- • • Collision warning – symbols and mes- Full Auto Brake does not react to ani- vent a collision or reduce the speed at • sages (p. 220) mals. impact but the driver should always • Warnings are only provided when the apply the brakes for the best possible risk of collision is high. The "Function" braking effect, even if auto-brake is section provides information about actively applying the brakes. limitations that the driver must be • Never wait for a collision warning. This aware of before using Collision Warn- system is designed to be a supple- ing. mentary driving aid. It is not, however, • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with intended to replace the driver's atten- Full Auto Brake will not provide a tion and judgement. The driver is warning or brake the vehicle for responsible for maintaining a safe dis- pedestrians or cyclists at speeds tance and speed, even when the colli- above 50 mph (80 km/h). sion warning system is in use. • Maintenance of the Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake system's components must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. 07

Related information • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 214)

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Collision warning* – function Brake Support • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection If the risk of collision continues to increase (p. 214) after the collision warning has been given, • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection Brake Support is activated. Brake Support (p. 213) prepares the brake system to react quickly, • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) and the brakes are applied slightly. This may be experienced as a light tug. • Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 218) If the brakes are applied quickly, full braking • Collision warning – symbols and mes- effect will be provided. Brake Support also sages (p. 220) increases brake force if the system determines that the driver has not applied adequate pressure on the brake pedal. Auto-brake Function overview If a collision is imminent and the driver has Audio-visual warning signals, collision risk not applied the brakes or begun to steer around the vehicle, pedestrian or a cyclist, Radar sensor the auto-brake function is activated without Camera the driver pressing the brake pedal. Full brake force is applied to help reduce the vehicle’s speed when the collision occurs or limited Collision Warning brake force is applied if this is sufficient to The radar sensor and the camera work avoid the collision. together to detect a pedestrian, a cyclist, stationary vehicles and vehicles that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. If there NOTE is a risk of collision with a vehicle, a cyclist or The auto-brake and brake support func- 07 a pedestrian, the driver is alerted by a flash- tions are always on and cannot be turned ing red warning light and an audible warning off. signal. The system is active at speeds above 3 mph (4 km/h). Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 07 Driver support

Collision warning* – operation ter console control panel and going to NOTE Settings Car settings Driver support MY CAR • When Adaptive Cruise Control is used, Settings are made by pressing on systems Warning sound if risk of the center console control panel and using the warning light and signal will be collision. the menus displayed. used by that function, even if the warnings provided by Pedestrian and Setting a warning distance Activating/deactivating both warning Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake This setting determines the distance at which signals have been deactivated by the driver. the visual and audible warnings are triggered. audible visual To switch the system's and Select Long, Normal or Short by pressing • In situations where traffic is moving at MY considerably different speeds, or if the signals on or off at the same time, press MY CAR on the center console control panel CAR on the center console control panel and vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, warn- and going to Settings Car settings go to Settings Car settings Driver ings may be considered to be late, Driver support systems Collision even if the setting Long has been support systems Collision Warning. If Warning Warning distance. selected. Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is on, the system will perform a The warning distance determines the level of self-test each time the engine is started by sensitivity used by the system. The warning Checking settings briefly illuminating the warning light. See My distance Long provides an earlier warning. The current system settings can be checked Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of Begin by using Long and if the system gives by pressing MY CAR on the center console the menu system. too many warnings, try changing to Normal. control panel and going to Settings Car When the engine is switched on, the system settings Driver support systems setting that was being used when it was WARNING Collision Warning. switched off will be the default setting. • The setting Short should only be used in situations where traffic is light and Related information NOTE moving at low speeds. • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) The auto-brake and pedestrian/cyclist • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) 07 detection features are always on, even if Full Auto Brake alerts the driver to the • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection the audible and visual warning signals risk of a collision but this function can- (p. 214) have been deactivated. not reduce the driver’s reaction time. • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection • For the system to be as effective as (p. 213) Activating/deactivating the audible possible, it is recommended that Dis- warning signal only tance Alert be set to 4 or 5, see Dis- • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) The audible warning signal can be activated/ tance Alert – operation (p. 198). • The camera’s limitations (p. 217) deactivated by pressing MY CAR on the cen-

212 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

• Collision warning – symbols and mes- Collision warning* – Cyclist detection sages (p. 220) The system can detect a cyclist and auto- • Collision warning – troubleshooting brake if certain parameters are fulfilled. (p. 218)

The function only detects cyclists from behind who are moving in the same direction as your vehicle The Cyclist Detection feature requires the fol- Optimal example of what the system considers lowing in order to function: to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours, straight from behind and directly in front of the vehicle • The cyclist must be an adult riding an "adult-size" bike In order to help detect a cyclist, the system has to receive clear information about the • The bike must be equipped with an contours of the cyclist's body and the bike. It approved and clearly visible rear-facing has to able to clearly detect the bike, the red reflector that is mounted at least cyclist's head, arms, shoulders, legs and 27 in. (70 cm) above the road surface upper and lower body combined with the per- • The feature can only detect a cyclist son's pattern of movement when cycling. straight from behind and who is moving in the same direction as your vehicle 07 • A cyclist who is to the left or right of your vehicle may be detected late or not at all. • The camera's capacity to see a cyclist at dawn or dusk is limited, much as it is for the human eye. • The camera's function is deactivated and will not detect a cyclist in darkness or in

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 07 Driver support

|| tunnels, even if there is street lighting in • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) Collision warning* – Pedestrian the area. • Collision warning – troubleshooting detection • For optimal cyclist detection, City (p. 218) Safety™ must be activated. • Collision warning – symbols and messages (p. 220) WARNING Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner.

The system cannot detect a bike/cyclist if: • He/she is wearing loose-fitting clothing The system cannot identify all pedestrians that may obscure body contours The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full • The bike is approaching your vehicle Auto Brake system can only identify and from the side detect a pedestrian who is standing upright. • The bike is not equipped with a rear- This person can be standing still, walking or facing red reflector running. • The bike is carrying large objects This means that the system has to be able to • Most of the cyclist's body or the bike identify a person's head, arms, shoulders, itself cannot be "seen" by the system's legs, the upper and lower parts of the body camera and a person's pattern of movement when 07 walking or running. Related information If parts of the body are not visible to the cam- • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) era, the system cannot detect the pedestrian. • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) The following conditions apply: • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) • In order to detect a pedestrian, the sys- • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection tem must have a full view of the person's (p. 214)

214 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

entire body and the person must be at • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection Collision warning* – limitations least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. (p. 213) • The system cannot detect a pedestrian • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the carrying a large object. Collision warning – troubleshooting • driver is not looking straight ahead may make The camera's capacity to see a pedes- (p. 218) • the visual warning signal in the windshield dif- trian at dawn or dusk is limited, much as • Collision warning – symbols and mes- ficult to see. For this reason, always activate it is for the human eye. sages (p. 220) the audible warning signal. • The camera's function is deactivated and will not detect a pedestrian in darkness or Slippery driving conditions increase braking in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in distance, which can reduce the system's the area. capacity to avoid a collision. In these conditions, the ABS and stability systems provide WARNING the best possible braking effect while helping to maintain stability. • Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is designed to be a NOTE supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driv- The visual warning signal may be tempo- er's attention and judgement. The rarily disengaged in the event of high pas- driver is always responsible for operat- senger compartment temperature due to ing the vehicle in a safe manner. strong sunlight, etc. If this occurs, the audible warning signal will be used, even if • The system cannot detect all pedes- it has been deactivated in the menu sys- trians in all situations, such as in dark- tem. ness/at night and cannot detect partially hidden pedestrians, people who are less than approx. 32 in. (80 cm) tall, or people wearing clothing that 07 obscures the contours of their bodies.

Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 215 07 Driver support

|| WARNING NOTE Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • In certain situations, the system can- If warnings are given too frequently, the not provide warnings or warnings may warning distance can be reduced (see Col- • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) be delayed if traffic conditions or other lision warning* – operation (p. 212)). This • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) external factors make it impossible for causes the system to provide later warnings, which decreases the total number of • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection the radar sensor or camera to detect a (p. 214) pedestrian, a cyclist or a vehicle warnings provided. ahead. • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 213) • Warnings may not be provided if the WARNING distance to the vehicle ahead is short, • The camera’s limitations (p. 217) The system is not activated at speeds or if movements of the steering wheel/ • • Collision warning – symbols and mes- under approx. 2 mph (4 km/h). There- brake pedal are great, such as during sages (p. 220) fore, it will not brake your vehicle if you active driving. approach a vehicle ahead at very low • Collision warning – troubleshooting • The sensor system has a limited range speed, such as when parking. (p. 218) for pedestrians/cyclists and provides The driver's actions always have high- warnings and braking effect most • est priority and override the Pedestrian effectively at speeds up to 30 mph and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-mov- Brake system. This means that the ing vehicles, the system functions best system will not intervene in situations if your vehicle’s speed is below where the driver is actively steering, approximately 45 mph (70 km/h). braking or pressing the accelerator • Warnings for stationary or slow-mov- pedal, even if a collision is imminent. ing vehicles may not be provided in When Auto-brake has prevented a col- dark conditions or in poor visibility. • lision with a stationary object, your vehicle will remain at a standstill for 07 The Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full approx. 1.5 seconds. If your vehicle Auto Brake system uses the same radar sen- has been braked for a moving vehicle sors as Adaptive Cruise Control. For more ahead, your vehicle's speed will be information on the radar sensor and its limita- reduced to the same speed as that tions, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limita- vehicle's. tions (p. 193).

216 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

The camera’s limitations WARNING • Collision warning – troubleshooting The camera has the same limitations as the (p. 218) The camera has the same type of limi- human eye. • Collision warning – symbols and mes- tations as the human eye, i.e., it can- • sages (p. 220) The camera is used by Pedestrian and Cyclist not see as well in heavy snowfall or Road Sign Information (RSI)* – introduc- Detection with Full Auto Brake Collision warn- rain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dust • tion (p. 179) ing – introduction (p. 209), Active High Beams or snow. In such conditions, systems (Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90)), Road Sign depending on the camera may experi- • Driver Alert System (p. 222) ence greatly reduced functionality or Information (Road Sign Information (RSI)* – • Active high beams (AHB)* (p. 90) may be temporarily deactivated. introduction (p. 179)) and Driver Alert System (Driver Alert System (p. 222)) with Lane • Never place any objects, decals, etc., Departure Warning or Lane Keeping Aid. on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the NOTE camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize • To help protect the camera in very hot the camera to stop functioning. conditions, it may be temporarily • Strong sunlight, reflections from the switched off for approximately 15 road surface, ice or snow covering the minutes after the engine has been road, a dirty road surface, or unclear started. lane marker lines may drastically • Keep the section of the windshield in reduce the camera’s capacity to front of the camera clean and free of detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, ice, snow, or condensation. a cyclist or another vehicle.

Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) 07 • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 214) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 213) • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217 07 Driver support

Collision warning – troubleshooting pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road marker Lane Keeping Aid will not have full functional- lines in front of the vehicle. ity. Fault tracing and actions This, in turn, means that Pedestrian and The table lists possible causes for this mes- Windscreen Sensors If the message Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake, Driver sage being displayed, and suitable actions. blocked is displayed, this means that the Alert Control, Lane Departure Warning or camera is obscured and cannot detect

Cause Action

The surface of the windshield in front of the camera is dirty or covered Clean or clear the section of the windshield in front of the camera. with ice or snow.

Fog, heavy rain or snow is interfering with the function of the camera. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the camera.

The surface of the windshield is clean but the message remains in the Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to regis- display. ter visibility.

The surface between the inside of the windshield and the camera is Contact an authorized Volvo retailer or service technician to have this dirty. surface cleaned.

218 07 Driver support

Maintenance • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) • The camera’s limitations (p. 217) • Collision warning – symbols and messages (p. 220)

Camera and radar sensor7. In order to function properly, the camera and radar sensor must be kept clean. Dirt, ice, snow, etc., will reduce the function of these components. Remove ice and snow when necessary and wash these areas regularly with a suitable car washing liquid. Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) 07 • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 214) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 213)

7 The illustration is generic; details will vary, depending on the model

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 219 07 Driver support

Collision warning – symbols and A text message can be erased by pressing messages briefly on the OK button on the turn signal The table lists possible causes for collision lever. warning-related messages being displayed, and suitable actions.

Symbol Message Description

Collis'n warning Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is switched off. This message is displayed when the OFF engine is started and will disappear after approx. 5 seconds. It can also be erased by pressing the OK button.

Collision Warning Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake cannot be activated. This message is displayed when Unavailable the driver attempts to activate the function. It will disappear after approx. 5 seconds or can be erased by pressing the OK button.

Auto braking was Auto-braking has been active. This message can be erased by pressing the OK button. activated

Windscreen Sen- The camera is temporarily not functioning. This message is displayed if the camera is obstructed by snow, sors blocked ice, dirt, etc., on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera, see The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for more information on the camera’s limitations.

Radar blocked See Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is temporarily not functioning. The radar sensor is manual blocked, for example by heavy rain or snow that has accumulated in front of the sensor, and cannot detect 07 other vehicles, see Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations (p. 193) for more information on the radar sensor’s limitations.

Collision warn. Pedestrian and Cyclist Detection with Full Auto Brake is partially or completely not functioning. Service required Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message remains in the display.

220 07 Driver support

Related information • Collision warning – introduction (p. 209) • Collision warning* – function (p. 211) • Collision warning* – operation (p. 212) • Collision warning* – Pedestrian detection (p. 214) • Collision warning* – Cyclist detection (p. 213) • Collision warning* – limitations (p. 215) • Collision warning – troubleshooting (p. 218)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221 07 Driver support

Driver Alert System Driver Alert Control (DAC) – NOTE The Driver Alert System is designed to help a introduction The camera has certain limitations, see driver who may be becoming fatigued or who DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her Adaptive Cruise Control – limitations is inadvertently leaving the lane. driving becomes erratic, such as if the driver (p. 193). is distracted or fatigued. Introduction The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- DAC is designed to help detect a slowly WARNING ent functions that can be switched on changing driving pattern. It is primarily DAC is not intended to extend the together or separately. intended to be used on main roads and is not • duration of driving. Always plan breaks meant for use in city traffic. • Driver Alert Control (DAC), see Driver at regular intervals to help remain alert. Alert Control (DAC) – introduction • A warning from DAC should not be (p. 222) ignored. A driver may not be aware of • Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see how fatigued he/she has become. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect duction (p. 227) the driver’s behavior. In situations of When one or both of the functions has been this type, no warning will be provided. switched on, it is in standby mode and is acti- Therefore, it is important to take vated when the vehicle exceeds a speed of breaks at regular intervals, regardless of whether or not DAC has given a 40 mph (65 km/h). warning. The function deactivates if the vehicle's speed goes under 37 mph (60 km/h). Related information Both functions use a camera that is depend- A camera monitors the painted lines marking • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function ent on the road/lane being clearly marked by the lane in which the vehicle is traveling and (p. 223) painted lines on each side. compares the direction of the road with the • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation 07 driver’s movements of the steering wheel. (p. 223) WARNING The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations follow the lane smoothly. The Driver Alert System does not function (p. 224) in all situations and is designed to be a • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and supplementary aid. It is not, however, messages (p. 225) intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgement.

222 07 Driver support

• Driver Alert System (p. 222) Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227) Operating DAC Function Settings are made using menu system and Driver Alert is activated when the vehicle the display in the center console. See My Car exceeds a speed of 40 mph (65 km/h) and will – introduction (p. 76) for more information on remain active as long as the speed is over the menu system. approx. 37 mph (60 km/h). On/Off If the vehicle is being driven errati- To put Driver Alert in standby mode: cally, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and the message In the MY CAR menu, scroll to Car • Driver Alert Time for a break is settings Driver support systems displayed. The warning will be repeated after Driver Alert and check the box. If the box a short time if the driving pattern remains the is not checked, the function is off. same. Related information Press the OK button to erase a message. • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 222) WARNING • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function (p. 223) • An alert should be taken seriously since it is sometimes difficult for a • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations driver to realize that he/she is fatigued. (p. 224) • In the event of a warning or if the • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and driver feels fatigued, stop as soon as messages (p. 225) possible in a safe place and rest. • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 222) Related information 07 • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction duction (p. 227) (p. 222) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 223) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations (p. 224)

}} 223 07 Driver support

• Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and Driver Alert Control (DAC) – messages (p. 225) limitations • Driver Alert System (p. 222) Limitations • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227) In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not become erratic: • in strong crosswinds • on grooved road surfaces. • if the driver is testing the LDW function, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227)

Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 222) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function (p. 223) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 223) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and messages (p. 225) • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – intro- 07 duction (p. 227)

224 07 Driver support

Driver Alert Control (DAC) – symbols and messages Depending on the situation, DAC may display certain symbols and text messages in the instrument panel or center console screen. Symbols and messages Instrument panel Symbol Message Description

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven erratically. The driver receives an audible signal and a text message. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of blocked the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the message required remains in the display.

}} 225 07 Driver support

|| Center console display Symbol Message Description

- Driver Alert OFF The function is not switched on.

- Driver Alert Available The function is active.

- Driver Alert Standby <65 The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph (65 km/h). km/h

- Driver Alert Unavailable The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – introduction (p. 222) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – function (p. 223) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – operation (p. 223) • Driver Alert Control (DAC) – limitations (p. 224) • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227) 07

226 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – WARNING Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction operation This feature is only intended to assist the The LDW function is designed to help reduce driver and does not function in all driving, Operation and function the risk of accidents in situations where the weather, traffic or road conditions. vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane and As the driver, you have full responsibility there is a risk of driving off the road or into the for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. opposite lane. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 230) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation (p. 227) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 229) LDW can be switched on or off by pressing the button on the center console. A light in the button illuminates when the function is on. This is supplemented by graphic displays in the instrument panel, for example: The illustration is generic LDW uses the camera located at the center, upper edge of the windshield to monitor the road's/lane’s side marker lines. If the vehicle crosses a side marker line or the road’s center dividing line, the driver will be alerted by 07 an audible signal.

}} 227 07 Driver support

|| WARNING • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227) The driver will only be warned once for each time the wheels cross a marker line. • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limita- No alarm will be given if a marker line is tions (p. 229) between the wheels.

Settings Settings for Lane Departure Warning can be made in the menu system by pressing My Car. Go to Settings Car settings Driver support systems Lane Departure LDW displayed in the instrument panel Warning. • The LDW symbol has white side marker There are two alternatives: lines: – the function is active and "sees" one or both of the road's side marker • On at start-up: This selection switches lines. LDW on each time the engine is started. Otherwise, the system will be in the mode • The LDW symbol has gray side marker that it was in when the engine was lines: – the function is active but cannot switched off. "see" one or both of the road's side marker lines. • Increased sensitivity: This selection increases the function’s sensitivity. Warn- or ings will be given at an earlier stage and • The LDW symbol has gray side marker fewer limitations apply. When this setting lines: – the function is in standby mode is being used, the system only needs to because the vehicle's speed is below monitor lane marker lines on one side of 07 40 mph (65 km/h). the vehicle to change status to Lane Depart Warn Available. • The LDW symbol has no side marker lines: – the function is deactivated. Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 230)

228 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations

Limitations The camera used by LDW has the same limitations as the human eye. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for more information about the camera's limitations.

NOTE No warning signal will be given in the certain situations, such as: • If the turn signal is being used • The driver’s foot is on the brake pedal8 • The accelerator pedal is pressed quickly8 • If the steering wheel is moved quickly8 • In sharp turns that cause the vehicle’s body to sway

Related information • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages (p. 230) 07 • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation (p. 227) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227)

8 When Increased sensitivity has been selected, a warning will be issued if a side marker line is crossed in this situation.

229 07 Driver support

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – symbols and messages

Symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever.

Symbol Message Description

Lane departure warning ON/ The function is switched on or off. The text disappears after 5 seconds. Lane departure warning OFF

- Lane Depart Warn Available The function is monitoring the road’s marker lines.

- Lane Depart. Warning The function has gone into standby mode because the vehicle's speed is below 40 mph Unavailable at this speed (65 km/h).

- Lane Depart Warn Unavaila- The road lacks clear marker lines or the camera is not functioning properly. See The camera’s ble limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera’s limitations.

Windscreen Sensors blocked The camera is temporarily not functioning, due to snow, ice, or dirt on the windshield. Clean the area of the windshield in front of the camera. See The camera’s limitations (p. 217) for information on the camera’s limitations.

07 Driver Alert Sys Service The system is not functioning. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if the mes- required sage remains in the display.

230 07 Driver support

Related information • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – operation (p. 227) • Driver Alert System (p. 222) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) – introduction (p. 227) • Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations (p. 229)

231 07 Driver support

Park assist – introduction • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist – function The park assist system is designed to assist (p. 237) you when driving into parking spaces, Signals from the park assist system garages, etc. An audible signal and symbols in the audio system’s display indicate the distance to the object.

The park assist system utilizes ultrasound sensors in the front bumper and rear bumper(s) to measure the distance to a vehicle or an object that may be close to the front or rear of your vehicle.

NOTE A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be View in the display (warning for objects front left/ included in the measurement of the availa- right rear) ble space behind the vehicle. Visual indicator The audio system’s display gives an overview WARNING of the vehicle’s position in relation to a detected object. Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed The marked sectors in the display indicate to be a supplementary aid when parking that one or more of the sensors has detected the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to an object. The closer the car symbol comes replace the driver's attention and judge- to a sector, the closer the vehicle is to the ment. 07 object. If the infotainment system is switched off, the Related information park assist system will not be able to provide • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) a visual indicator. An audible signal will still • Park assist – function (p. 232) be provided. • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

232 07 Driver support

Audible signal Rear park assist NOTE The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come close to • Rear park assist is deactivated auto- an object, and becomes constant when you matically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non- are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may object in front of or behind the vehicle. If be necessary to switch off the system there are objects within this distance both manually, see Park assist – operation behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone (p. 234). alternates between front and rear speakers. • The system will not detect high NOTE objects, such as a loading dock, etc. • Objects such as chains, thin shiny The level of the audible signal can be low- poles or low objects may temporarily ered/raised with the infotainment volume not be detected by the system. This control. The level can also be set in the MY The distance monitored behind the vehicle is may result in the pulsing tone unex- CAR menu system. See My Car – introduc- approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal tion (p. 76) for a description of the menu pectedly stopping instead of changing system. comes from the rear speakers. to a constant tone as the vehicle approaches the object. In such cases, The system must be deactivated when towing use caution when backing up or stop a trailer, carrying bicycles in a rear-mounted If the volume of another source from the the vehicle to help avoid damage. audio system is high, this will be automati- carrier, etc, which could trigger the rear park cally lowered. assist system's sensors.

}} 233 07 Driver support

|| Front park assist • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist – operation (p. 237) Function

The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible Park assist and CTA* button signal comes from the audio system's front speakers. The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. The indicator light in the It may not be possible to combine auxiliary button in the center console illuminates when headlights and front park assist since these the system is on. lights could trigger the system's sensors. • The front park assist system is active NOTE from the time the engine is started until the vehicle exceeds a speed of approxi- Front park assist is deactivated when the mately 6 mph (10 km/h). It is also active parking brake is applied and or when the when the vehicle is backing up. gear selector is in the P position. 07 • Rear park assist is active when the engine is running and reverse gear has been Related information selected. • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236)

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

Activating/deactivating Park assist – limitations Ice and snow covering the sensors may The system is activated automatically when cause incorrect warning signals. the vehicle is started. Cleaning the sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to – Press the Park assist button on the center NOTE ensure that they work properly. Clean them console to temporarily deactivate the sys- If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, with water and a suitable car washing deter- tem(s). snow, or ice, this could result in false gent. > The indicator light in the button will go warning signals from the park assist system. out when the system has been deactivated. Related information Park assist will be automatically reactivated • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) the next time the engine is started, or if the button is pressed (the indicator light in the • Park assist – function (p. 232) button will illuminate). • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236) NOTE • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function Park assist is disengaged automatically (p. 237) when the parking brake is applied. G031402

Related information Location of the front sensors • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) • Park assist – function (p. 232) • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function 07 (p. 237)

Location of the rear sensors

235 07 Driver support

Park assist – troubleshooting Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – WARNING introduction • PAC is designed to be a supplemen- Faults in the system The Park Assist Camera is designed to pro- tary aid when parking the vehicle. It is If the information symbol illuminates and vide the driver with a view of the area behind Park assist syst Service required is shown not, however, intended to replace the the vehicle when backing up. driver’s attention and judgment. on the information display, this indicates that the system is not functioning properly and Introduction • The camera has blind spots where it has been disengaged. Consult a trained and PAC uses the display in the center console to cannot detect objects or people qualified Volvo service technician. show the area behind the car while you are behind the vehicle. backing up. • Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. CAUTION PAC also shows guiding lines in the on- In certain circumstances, the park assist screen image to indicate the direction that the • Objects seen on the screen may be system may give unexpected warning sig- vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which closer than they appear to be. nals that can be caused by external sound helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a sources that use the same ultrasound fre- tight space or when attaching a trailer to the Related information quencies as the system. This may include vehicle. such things as the horns of other vehicles, • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, The images of vehicles in this section are tion (p. 237) motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does generic and may not depict your specific • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- not indicate a fault in the system. model. tions (p. 240)

Related information NOTE Park assist – introduction (p. 232) • A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) with the vehicle's electrical system will be • Park assist – function (p. 232) included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle. 07 • Park assist – operation (p. 234) • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function (p. 237)

236 07 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – ity to light is increased in dark conditions or in Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – function bad weather, which may affect image quality. operation If the image on the screen seems too dark, Function Activation brightness can be increased with the thumb wheel on the lighting panel.

NOTE In order to function properly, the camera lens should always be kept clean. This is particularly important in bad weather. Keep the lens free of dirt, ice or snow.

Related information • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – introduction (p. 236) Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- The driver sees what is behind the vehicle • PAC is activated when the gear selector is tion (p. 237) and if a person or animal should suddenly moved to R if the system is selected in the appear from the side. • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- MY CAR menu system or by pressing the tions (p. 240) CAM button in the center console. See My PAC is mounted on the tailgate, near the Car – introduction (p. 76) for a description of opening handle. the menu system. The camera has built-in electronics that help If PAC is not activated when the gear selector reduce the “fish-eye” effect so that the image is moved to R, press the CAM button on the shown on the screen is as natural as possi- center console. ble. This may cause some objects on the screen to “lean,” which is normal. PAC will automatically override the view cur- 07 Ambient lighting conditions rently on the screen and will display the camera's view behind the vehicle. The camera automatically monitors the ambient lighting conditions behind the vehicle and Trailer hitches constantly adjusts sensitivity to light. This The camera can be useful when attaching a may cause the brightness and quality of the trailer. With the camera zoomed in on the image on the screen to vary slightly. Sensitiv-

}} 237 07 Driver support

|| trailer hitch, a guiding line showing the hitch's 5 seconds after the gear selector has been Related information path toward the trailer will be projected. moved from R or until the vehicle's forward • Park assist – introduction (p. 232) speed exceeds 6 mph/10 km/h The guiding lines for the wheels and for the • Park assist – function (p. 232) (21 mph/35 km/h in reverse). The screen will trailer hitch cannot be displayed at the same then revert to the view that was displayed • Park assist – troubleshooting (p. 236) time. To select a view: before R was selected. • Park assist – limitations (p. 235) 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- displayed. NOTE duction (p. 236) 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to Tow bar If any button on the center console control trajectory guide line . panel is pressed, the camera image will 3. Confirm by pressing OK/MENU and disappear from the display. Pressing CAM press EXIT. will return the camera image to the display. Zoom When necessary, the camera view can be Settings zoomed: By default, PAC is set to activate when the gear selector is moved to R • PressCAM or turn TUNE. Pressing or turning again returns you to normal view. To change PAC settings when a camera view If there are additional alternatives, press/turn is displayed: until the desired camera view is displayed. 1. Press OK/MENU when a camera view is Automatic zoom on the screen. A menu will be displayed. Automatic zoom is a feature that is available 2. Turn TUNE to scroll to the desired set- on models equipped with a trailer hitch and ting. the optional (p. 232)Park assist system. With 3. Press OK/MENU to make the setting and this alternative selected, the camera will exit the menu by pressing EXIT. zoom in on the trailer hitch automatically if 07 the vehicle approaches an object/trailer. Summary Pressing CAM will activate the camera See also the "Settings" section below. • even if the gear selector is not in Reverse. Deactivation • Toggle between normal view and zoom Move the gear selector from R to another by pressing CAM or by turning TUNE. gear. The camera remains active for approx.

238 07 Driver support

Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – WARNING The "wheel tracks" (2) show where the wheels guiding and marker lines will roll and can extend up to approximately Keep in mind that the image on the screen 10.5 ft (3.2 m) behind the bumper if there are Guiding lines only shows the area behind the vehicle. no objects in the way. The driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides Vehicles equipped with Park Assist of the vehicle when turning while backing up.

Marker lines

The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground behind the Colored markers (one for each sensor) indicate vehicle and are directly affected by the way in distance which the steering wheel is turned. This ena- If the vehicle is equipped with the optional bles the driver to see path the vehicle will Park Assist system (see Park assist – intro- take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel The PAC system's lines duction (p. 232)), the distance to an object while backing up. The unobstructed area behind the vehicle will be indicated more exactly and colored markers in the display indicate which of the NOTE "Wheel tracks" sensor(s) has detected the object. When backing up with a trailer, the guiding The dashed line (1) indicates the clear zone of 07 lines show the path that the vehicle will approximately 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the Color Distance to object take, not the trailer. bumper. These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (door mirrors, cor- Pale yellow 2.3–5 ft (0.7–1.5 m ) ners of the body, etc.) extends out from the Yellow 1.6–2.3 ft (0.5–0.7 m) vehicle, even when it turns.

}} 239 07 Driver support

|| Color Distance to object Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – BLIS* – introduction limitations The Blind Spot Information System (BLIS) is Orange 1–1.6 ft (0.3–0.5 m) an information system that indicates the pres- Limitations ence of another vehicle moving in the same Red 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) Even if a fairly small section of the screen direction as your vehicle on roads with several image appears to be obstructed, this may lanes. Related information mean that a relatively large area behind the • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- vehicle is hidden and objects there may not tion (p. 237) be detected until they are very near the vehi- • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – limita- cle. tions (p. 240) NOTE Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of view.

Keep in mind • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and snow. Remove ice and snow care- Location of the BLIS indicator light9. fully to avoid scratching the lens. Indicator light • Clean the lens regularly with warm water and a suitable car washing detergent. BLIS symbol Related information BLIS and CTA10 are activated when the • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – intro- engine is started; this is confirmed when the duction (p. 236) indicator lights on the front door panels flash 07 • Rear Park Assist Camera (PAC) – opera- once. tion (p. 237) • Park assist – introduction (p. 232)

9 The illustration is generic; certain details may vary from model to model 10 Cross Traffic Alert

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

NOTE Related information BLIS* – function • BLIS* – function (p. 241) The door panel indicator light illuminates When does BLIS function on the side of the vehicle where the sys- • BLIS* – operation (p. 242) The system functions when your vehicle is tem has detected another vehicle. If your • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243) vehicle is passed on both sides at the moving at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). same time, both lights will illuminate. • BLIS* – limitations (p. 244) • BLIS* – messages (p. 245) The system helps provide information about: • Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind area" • Vehicles that are about to pass your vehicle in the left and/or right lanes • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary BLIS function intended to detect vehicles crossing behind your vehicle while you are backing up. Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for passing WARNING vehicles • BLIS and CTA are information sys- BLIS is designed to react to: tems, NOT warning or safety systems • Other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind and do not function in all situations. area" • BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the • Vehicles that are passing your vehicle need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a passing vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in for you to turn your head and should- 07 ers to make sure that you can safely the door panel will glow steadily. If the driver change lanes or back up. then uses the turn signal on the side on which the warning is given, the indicator light will • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes/backing up in a flash and become brighter. safe manner.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241 07 Driver support

|| WARNING BLIS* – operation When BLIS is deactivated/reactivated, the indicator lights will go out/illuminate (the indi- • BLIS does not function in sharp cators will also flash once when the function curves. Activating/deactivating BLIS is reactivated) and a message will appear in • BLIS does not function when your the instrument panel. vehicle is backing up. To erase the message: OK Related information • Press the button on the left steering wheel lever • BLIS* – introduction (p. 240) or • BLIS* – operation (p. 242) • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243) • Wait for approx. 5 seconds for the message to disappear • BLIS* – limitations (p. 244) • BLIS* – messages (p. 245) Related information • BLIS* – introduction (p. 240) Button for activating/deactivating BLIS • BLIS* – function (p. 241) • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243) BLIS and CTA11 are activated when the engine is started; this is confirmed when the • BLIS* – limitations (p. 244) indicator lights on the front door panels flash • BLIS* – messages (p. 245) once. BLIS can be deactivated/reactivated by pressing the button on the center console. The number or combinations of options on the vehicle may not leave a space available 07 on the center console for the BLIS button. If this is the case, BLIS can be deactivated/ reactivated in the MY CAR menu system, see My Car – introduction (p. 76) • Select Off or On in Settings Car settings BLIS.

11 Cross Traffic Alert

242 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) WARNING example, when backing out of a parking Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary space. 12 • BLIS and CTA are information sys- BLIS function intended to detect vehicles tems, NOT warning or safety systems It is primarily designed to detect another vehi- crossing behind your vehicle while you are and do not function in all situations. cle but in certain cases may also detect backing up. pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicy- BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the • cles. need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need CTA is only activated when the vehicle is for you to turn your head and should- backing up and is activated automatically ers to make sure that you can safely when the gear selector is put in reverse. change lanes or back up. • An audible signal indicates that CTA has • As the driver, you have full responsibil- detected something that is approaching ity for changing lanes/backing up in a from the side. The signal will come from safe manner. either the left or right audio system speakers, depending on which the side of When does CTA function your vehicle the approaching vehicle/ object has been detected. • CTA also provides a warning by illuminat- Park assist/CTA button ing the BLIS indicator lights. On vehicles equipped with the optional Park • An icon will also illuminate in the Park assist system (p. 232), Cross Traffic Alert assist graphic on the center console dis- (CTA) can be deactivated/reactivated by play. pressing the Park assist button on the center console. The BLIS indicator lights on the front Limitations doors will flash when CTA is reactivated by CTA has limitations in certain situations, for pressing the button. example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstruc- 07 tions. How CTA works The following are several examples where CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for and approaching vehicles cannot be detected until they are too close:

12 Blind Spot Information System }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 07 Driver support

|| Examples of other limitations include: BLIS* – limitations Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors • Maintenance may reduce the system's function or make it impossible to detect other vehicles or objects. • Do not attach tape, decals, etc., on the surface of the sensors (see the illustration in the following "Maintenance" section). • BLIS and CTA are deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space Related information CTA's blind area • BLIS* – introduction (p. 240) • BLIS* – function (p. 241) CTA's "field of vision" Location of the BLIS/CTA sensors13 • BLIS* – operation (p. 242) The BLIS/CTA14 sensors are located on the BLIS* – limitations (p. 244) • inside of the rear fenders/bumper. • BLIS* – messages (p. 245) The surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean for the system to function optimally.

CAUTION Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or repainting the rear bumper should only be 07 done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one side Related information However, as you back your vehicle out of a • BLIS* – introduction (p. 240) parking space, CTA's "field of vision" • BLIS* – function (p. 241) expands. • BLIS* – operation (p. 242)

244 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 07 Driver support

• BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243) BLIS* – messages Related information • BLIS* – messages (p. 245) • BLIS* – introduction (p. 240) 15 If BLIS/CTA are not functioning normally, a • BLIS* – function (p. 241) symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. Follow • BLIS* – operation (p. 242) any instructions that may be provided. • BLIS* – Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) (p. 243) These messages include: • BLIS* – limitations (p. 244)

Message System status

CTA OFF CTA has been switched off manually. BLIS remains active.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are tempo- CTA OFF rarily deactivated because Trailer a trailer's wiring has been attached connected to the vehicle's electrical system.

BLIS and BLIS and CTA are not CTA Serv- functioning normally. ice required • If this message recurs, the systems should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 07

Messages can be erased by pressing the OK button on the left steering wheel lever.

13 Generic illustration 14 Cross Traffic Alert 15 Cross Traffic Alert

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 STARTING AND DRIVING 08 Starting and driving

Starting the engine WARNING 3. Press and release the START/STOP The engine can be started/switched off using ENGINE button. The autostart function Never use more than one floor mat at the remote key and the START/STOP • will operate the starter motor until the a time on the driver's floor. Before ENGINE button. engine starts or until its overheating func- driving, remove the original mat from tion stops it. the driver's seat floor before using any other type of floor mat. Any mat used The starter motor operates for a maxi- in this position should be securely and mum of 10 seconds. If the engine has not properly anchored in the attaching started, repeat the procedure. pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or CAUTION brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impe- If the engine does not start after the third ded. try, wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying to start it again to give the • Volvo's floor mats are specially manu- battery time to recover its starting factured for your car. They must be capacity. firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become Ignition slot with remote key inserted (see Igni- trapped under the pedals on the driv- NOTE tion modes (p. 79) for more information on igni- er's side. tion modes) Keyless drive* To start a vehicle equipped with the key- WARNING 1. Press the remote key into the ignition slot less drive feature, one of the remote keys as far as possible, with the metallic key must be in the passenger compartment. Before starting the engine: blade pointing outward (not inserted into Follow the instructions in steps 2 and 3 to • Fasten the seat belt. the slot)1. start the vehicle. • Check that the seat, steering wheel 2. Depress the brake pedal2. and mirrors are adjusted properly. • Make sure the brake pedal can be depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary.

1 On vehicles with the optional keyless drive, it is only necessary to have a remote key in the passenger’s compartment. 2 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the vehicle. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 08 Starting and driving

|| WARNING NOTE CAUTION • Always remove the remote key from • After a cold start, idle speed may be • When starting in cold weather, the the ignition slot when leaving the vehi- noticeably higher than normal for a automatic transmission may shift up at cle and ensure that the ignition in short period. This is done to help bring slightly higher engine speeds than nor- mode 0 (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for components in the emission control mal until the automatic transmission information about the ignition modes). system to their normal operating tem- fluid reaches normal operating tem- • On vehicles with the optional keyless perature as quickly as possible, which perature. drive, never remove the remote key enables them to control emissions and • Do not race a cold engine immediately from the vehicle while it is being driven help reduce the vehicle's impact on after starting. Oil flow may not reach 3 or towed. the environment . some lubrication points fast enough to • Always place the gear selector in Park prevent engine damage. and apply the parking brake before • The engine should be idling when you leaving the vehicle. Never leave the move the gear selector. Never acceler- vehicle unattended with the engine ate until after you feel the transmission running. engage. Accelerating immediately after • Always open garage doors fully before selecting a gear will cause harsh starting the engine inside a garage to engagement and premature transmis- ensure adequate ventilation. The sion wear. exhaust gases contain carbon monox- • Selecting P or N when idling at a ide, which is invisible and odorless but standstill for prolonged periods of time very poisonous. will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid.

Related information • Switching off the engine (p. 249)

3 If the gear selector is in the D or R positions and the car is not moving, engine speed (rpm) will be lower and it will take longer for the engine to reach normal operating temperature.

248 08 Starting and driving

Switching off the engine Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – WARNING Switch off the engine by pressing the START/ introduction Keep the following in mind before using STOP ENGINE button. ERS is a feature that makes it possible to ERS: remotely start the engine using the remote If the gear selector is not in the P position or key to cool or heat the passenger compart- • The vehicle should be in view. if the vehicle is moving, press the START/ ment before driving. • The vehicle should be unoccupied. STOP ENGINE button twice or press and The vehicle must not be parked hold it in until the engine switches off. The climate/ and infotainment systems will • indoors or in an enclosed area. start using the same settings as when the Exhaust fumes are harmful to the Related information engine was switched off. • Ignition modes (p. 79) health. When the engine is started using ERS, it will run for a maximum of 15 minutes before Related information automatically switching off again. After 2 ERS • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the starts, the engine must be started in the nor- engine (p. 250) mal way before ERS can be used again. • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off the engine (p. 250) NOTE • Always adhere to applicable State, Province and/or Local laws regarding engine idling when using ERS. • The service life of the remote key's battery is affected by ERS use. If this feature is used frequently, the battery should be replaced once a year, see Remote key – replacing the battery (p. 157).

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 249 08 Starting and driving

Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting 1. The turn signals will flash several times. Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – the engine 2. The engine will start. switching off the engine 3. The turn signals will illuminate for Any of the following will switch off the engine 3 seconds to indicate that the engine has if it has been started with ERS: started. After the engine has started, the vehicle • Pressing the lock button (1) or the unlock remains locked but the alarm is disarmed. button (2) on the remote key • Unlocking the vehicle Active functions When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- • Opening a door lowing functions are activated: • Depressing the accelerator or brake pedal • The climate control system • Moving the gear selector from the P position • The infotainment system. • If there are less than approx. 2.5 gallons Deactivated functions (10 liters) of fuel in the tank Remote key buttons used for remote engine start When the engine is started with ERS, the fol- More than 15 minutes have elapsed. Lock lowing functions are deactivated: • If the engine has been started with ERS and Headlights Approach lighting • switches off, the turn signals will illuminate for • Parking lights 3 seconds. Starting the engine • License plate lights Message in the instrument panel The maximum range for ERS is approximately • Windshield wipers display 100 ft (30 meters) if the view of the vehicle is unobstructed. The vehicle must also be Related information If ERS is interrupted, a text message will be displayed in the instrument panel. locked. • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – switching off the engine (p. 250) To start the engine: Related information • Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – introduction 1. Press the lock button (1 ) briefly. • (p. 249) (p. 249) 2. Immediately press the approach lighting Engine Remote Start (ERS)* – starting the button (2) for approximately 2 seconds. • engine (p. 250) 08 If the requirements for ERS have been met, the following will occur:

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Jump starting 3. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) WARNING Follow these instructions to jump start your terminal on your vehicle's battery (2), Do not connect the jumper cable to vehicle's dead battery or to jump start another marked with a "+" sign, located under a • any part of the fuel system or to any vehicle's dead battery using your vehicle. folding cover. moving parts. Avoid touching hot 4. Connect the black jumper cable to the manifolds. auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3) • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, and to the ground point in your vehicle's which is flammable and explosive. engine compartment (right engine mount at the top, on the outer screw) (4). • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, 5. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If then start the engine in the vehicle with contact occurs, flush the affected area dead battery. immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affec- 6. After the engine has started, first remove ted. the negative (–) terminal jumper cable Never expose the battery to open G021347 (black). Then remove the positive (+) ter- • minal jumper cable (red). flame or electric spark. Connecting the jumper cables • Do not smoke near the battery. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in WARNING • Failure to follow the instructions for another vehicle, check that the vehicles are jump starting can lead to injury. not touching to prevent premature comple- PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! tion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump star- Battery posts, terminals, and related Related information ting instructions provided for the other vehi- accessories contain lead and lead com- Starting the engine (p. 247) cle. pounds, chemicals known to the state of • California to cause cancer and reproduc- To jump start your vehicle: tive harm. Wash hands after handling. 1. Switch off the ignition (set the ignition to mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)). CAUTION 2. First connect the red jumper cable to the Connect the jumper cables carefully to auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1). avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. 08

251 08 Starting and driving

Transmission – general information CAUTION Transmission – positions The transmission automatically shifts between The transmission’s temperature is moni- Park: position P the various forward gears, based on the level tored to help prevent damage to the trans- Select the P position when starting or park- of acceleration and speed. mission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning ing. symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)4 HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. G021351 The brakes will be released after several sec- Shiftgate positions onds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. Depress the button on the front of the gear selector knob to move the gear selector Related information between the R, N, D, and P positions. • Transmission – positions (p. 252) The gear selector can be moved freely • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254) between the Geartronic (manual shifting) and • Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256) Drive (D) positions while driving. • All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 264) • Fuel tank volume – specification and volume (p. 380)

4 Certain models only

252 08 Starting and driving

Shiftlock CAUTION Related information When P has been selected, the transmission • Transmission – general information is mechanically blocked in this position. The The vehicle must be stationary when posi- (p. 252) tion P is selected. brake pedal must be depressed and the igni- • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254) tion must be in at least mode II (see Ignition • Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256) modes (p. 79)) before the gear lever can be Gear indicator moved from the P position. The gear currently being • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- used is displayed on the right ume (p. 380) WARNING side of the instrument panel. Always apply the parking brake when the The "S" symbol turns orange vehicle is parked, particularly when park- if Sport mode is being used. ing on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline. Reverse: position R The vehicle must be stationary when position R is selected. Press the control to apply the parking brake, see Parking brake – general information Neutral: position N (p. 269). No gear is engaged and the engine can be started with the gear selector in this position. Apply the parking brake if the vehicle is stationary with the gear selector in position N. In order to move the gear selector from the N position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in at least mode II. Drive: position D D is the normal driving position. The car automatically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be at a standstill when shifting from position R to position D. 08

253 08 Starting and driving

Transmission – Geartronic This option indicates when to shift up or In order to move the gear selector from N to Geartronic allows you to manually shift among down to help conserve fuel. A white arrow will another gear position, the brake pedal must your vehicle's forward gears. The manual appear above or below the number of the be depressed and the ignition must be in at position (+S–) can be selected at any time. current gear to prompt the driver to shift up least position II, see Ignition modes (p. 79). or down. Geartronic: manual shifting (+S–) While driving To shift gears manually, move the If you select the manual shifting position gear selector to the side from D • while driving, the gear that was being +S– +S– toward . The symbol in the used in the Drive position will also initially instrument panel will change from be selected in the manual shifting posi- white to orange and the number of the gear tion. currently being used (1, 2, 3, etc.) will be dis- Move the gear selector forward (toward +) played (see the following illustration)5. • to shift to a higher gear or rearward • To return to automatic shifting mode from (toward –) to shift to a lower gear. +S–, move the gear selector to the side • If you hold the gear selector toward "–", toward D. the transmission will downshift one gear Gear shift indicator* at a time and will utilize the braking power of the engine. If the current speed is too high for using a lower gear, the downshift will not occur until the speed has decreased enough to allow the lower gear to be used. • If you slow to a very low speed, the transmission will automatically shift down. Shiftlock: Neutral (N) If the gear selector is in the N position and the vehicle has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. 6 08 Gear shift indicator in a digital instrument panel*

5 If Sport mode is being used, the symbol will change to "S". 6 Analog instrument panel: the gear shift indicator is displayed in the center of the speedometer.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Geartronic: steering wheel paddles* • Pull the paddle toward the steering wheel Geartronic: Sport mode (S)7 In addition to the manual gearshift function and release it. This transmission mode provides sportier using the gear selector, this option makes it Deactivating the paddles: shifting characteristics and enables a more possible to manually shift gears from the active driving style by making it possible to • Hold the "+" paddle for approximately steering wheel. drive at higher rpm in each gear before shift- 3 seconds. ing up. The engine also responds faster when the accelerator pedal is pressed. NOTE To access Sport mode from Drive (D), move If the gear selector was in D when paddle the gear selector to the left. The transmission shifting was activated (D changed to the number of the gear being used), the trans- will not switch to manual shifting mode until mission will automatically revert to D after the gear selector is moved forward or rear- approximately 5 seconds if the paddles ward toward + or –. are not used to shift gears. Sport mode can be selected any time. This will not occur: NOTE • during active driving (e.g., on a winding road, while accelerating, etc) • On vehicles equipped with Sport mode, the transmission symbol in the Steering-wheel mounted gear shift paddles • if the gear selector was in S when the paddles were activated main instrument panel will change "–": Shift down to a lower gear. from D to S when the gear selector is If the transmission reverts to D, the pad- moved to the manual shifting mode. If "+": Shift up to a higher gear. dles will have to be reactivated (pull either the gear selector is moved toward "+" paddle toward the steering wheel and In order to shift gears with the paddles, they release it) before they can be used to shift or "-", the number of the gear currently have to first be activated. The gear selector gears again. being used will be displayed, see Infor- can be in either the D or S position. mation displays – introduction (p. 68). The paddles can also be manually deacti- Activating the paddles: vated by pulling both paddles toward the • Please be aware that using Sport steering wheel and holding them until the mode may result in a slight decrease in • Pull either paddle toward the steering gear number shown in the instrument fuel economy. Driving in D can help wheel and release it; the D in the instru- panel changes to D. improve fuel economy. ment panel will change to the number of the gear currently being used. 08 Shifting gears:

7 Certain models only }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 08 Starting and driving

|| Geartronic: starting on slippery Transmission – shiftlock override Related information surfaces If the vehicle cannot be driven, for example • Transmission – general information Selecting 3rd gear in Geartronic’s manual because of a dead battery, the gear selector (p. 252) shifting mode can help provide better traction must be moved from the P position before the • Transmission – positions (p. 252) 8 when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do vehicle can be moved . • Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254) so: Shiftlock override • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the ume (p. 380) gear selector to the side from D toward +S–. 2. Press the gear selector forward and release it (this selects 2nd gear). Press the selector forward again and release it to select 3rd gear. The optional steering wheel paddles can also be used; see the previous section "Geartronic: steering wheel paddles." 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal. Related information Lift away the rubber mat on the floor of the storage compartment behind the cen- Transmission – general information • ter console to expose the small opening (p. 252) for overriding the shiftlock system. • Transmission – positions (p. 252) Insert the key blade into the opening. Transmission – shiftlock override (p. 256) • Press the key blade down as far as possi- • Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- ble and keep it held down. ume (p. 380) Move the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade, see Detachable key blade – general infor- 08 mation (p. 155).

8 If the battery is dead, the electric parking brake cannot be applied or released. Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 251).

256 08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop – introduction Start/Stop – function Start/Stop is a function that temporarily When starting on steep hills, HSA (see Trans- switches off the engine when the vehicle is Function and use mission – general information (p. 252)) retains not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a pressure on the brake pedal for several sec- traffic light to help reduce fuel consumption. onds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The Start/Stop is available with certain engines/ Start/Stop symbol in the instrument panel brakes will be released after several seconds transmissions. or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. The pedal will return to its normal posi- Related information tion somewhat slower than normal. • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) Related information Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) • • (p. 258) • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) Start/Stop button on the center console • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) (p. 259) Start/Stop is activated automatically each time the engine is started9. The symbol in the • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) • instrument panel will be displayed for several (p. 258) (p. 257) seconds when the engine starts and the indi- • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions • Start/Stop – symbols and messages cator light in the On/Off button will remain (p. 259) (p. 261) illuminated while the function is activated. • Start/Stop – symbols and messages (p. 261) All of the vehicle's systems will function while the engine is auto-stopped, although the function of certain systems may reduced at this time. For example, blower speed and high infotainment system volume may be reduced to help conserve the battery's capacity.

9 Not when the engine is started using the optional Engine Remote Start feature, Starting the engine (p. 247) }} 257 08 Starting and driving

|| Auto-stopping the engine Related information Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Normally, when Start/Stop is activated and • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) the brakes are applied until the vehicle comes • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) In certain situations or conditions, the engine to a standstill, the engine will auto-stop auto- may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions matically if the driver keeps the brake pedal • to a standstill, such as if: (p. 258) depressed. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions Condition/situation To remind the driver that the engine (p. 259) has been auto-stopped, the Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) The vehicle's speed has not reached a Start/Stop symbol will illuminate in • (p. 257) speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) after the the instrument panel and remain on most recent auto-start or after the driver until the engine restarts. • Start/Stop – symbols and messages (p. 261) has started the engine. If the ECO function* (ECO* (p. 262)) is activated, the The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt. engine may auto-stop before The main battery's charge is below the the vehicle comes to a com- minimum level. plete standstill. The engine has not reached its normal operating temperature. Auto-starting the engine The engine restarts as soon as the driver The ambient temperature is below approx. releases the brake pedal. 25°F (-4°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C). Deactivating Start/Stop The windshield's heating function* is acti- In certain situations (e.g., vated. driving in heavy, stop-and-go traffic), it may be preferable The climate system cannot keep the to deactivate Start/Stop. desired settings in the passenger compart- This is done by pressing the ment; the blower will operate at high button in the center console. speed. The indicator light in the button will go out. The vehicle is backing up. 08 Start/Stop will remain deactivated until the button is pressed again or until the engine is The main battery's temperature is below switched off and restarted by the driver. freezing or too high.

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

Condition/situation • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 257) The driver is turning the steering wheel • Start/Stop – symbols and messages In certain situations or conditions, the engine hard. (p. 261) may auto-start even though the driver is still pressing the brake pedal, such as if: The road's incline is very steep.

A trailer's electrical system is connected to Condition/situation the vehicle. Condensation forms on the windows. The hood has been openedA. The climate system cannot keep the The transmission has not reached its nor- desired settings in the passenger compart- mal operating temperature. ment.

Atmospheric pressure is below a level Electrical current consumption is tempo- equivalent to an altitude of approx. 4,900– rarily high or the main battery's charge is 8,200 ft (1500–2500 m) above sea level. below the minimum level. The actual pressure is also affected by current weather conditions. The brake pedal is pumped repeatedly.

The Adaptive Cruise Control's* Queue The hood has been openedA. Assist feature is activated. The vehicle begins to move or increases The gear selector is in the SB or "+/–" posi- speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped tion. before the vehicle was at a standstill (see ECO* (p. 262))). A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable) The driver unbuckles his/her seat belt while the gear selector is in the D or N positions. Related information • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) The steering wheel is turnedA. • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) 08 • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 259)

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 08 Starting and driving

|| Condition/situation Related information Start/Stop – settings • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) Settings for the Start/Stop function can be B • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) The gear selector is moved from D to S , R made in the MY CAR menu system. or "+/–". • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions The driver's door is opened with the gear • (p. 258) selector in D – an audible signal and a text message will inform the driver that • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) Start/Stop is active. (p. 257) • Start/Stop – symbols and messages A Certain engines only B Sport mode (where applicable) (p. 261)

WARNING Do not open the hood if the engine has auto-stopped. The engine could suddenly auto-start. Before opening the hood: Related information • Switch off the ignition using the • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) START/STOP ENGINE button. • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) • Be aware that if the engine has been • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions running, components in the engine (p. 258) compartment will be very hot. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 259) If the engine does not auto-start, this • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) could be due to: (p. 257) • The driver's seat belt is not fastened • Start/Stop – symbols and messages • The gear selector is in P and the driver's (p. 261) door is opened 08 In these cases, the driver will have to restart the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

260 08 Starting and driving

Start/Stop – symbols and messages Start/Stop function may also display messages in certain situations. Follow the instruc- Text messages tions provided in the message. The following Combined with the information sym- table gives several examples. bol in the instrument panel, the

Symbol Message Information/action

Auto Start/Stop Service Start/Stop is not functioning properly. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo required service technician.

Autostart Engine running + an This is triggered if the driver's door is opened while the engine is auto-stopped. audible signal

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Start the engine normally by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

- Select P or N to start Start/Stop has been deactivated. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

- Press Start button The engine will not auto-start. Move the gear selector to N or P and start the engine normally be pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button.

If the message does not disappear after the • Start/Stop – settings (p. 260) suggested action has been taken, contact a • Start/Stop – Auto-stop exceptions Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo (p. 258) service technician. • Start/Stop – Auto-start exceptions (p. 259) Related information 08 • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257) • Start/Stop – Hill Start Assist (HSA) • Start/Stop – function (p. 257) (p. 257)

261 08 Starting and driving

ECO* NOTE The ECO symbol will be displayed in the Eco is a function10 developed by Volvo to give instrument panel and the indicator light in the When Eco is activated, several climate ECO button will be on when Eco is activated. the driver the opportunity to actively drive system parameters are changed and the more economically and to help reduce fuel function of certain current-consuming sys- Eco on or off consumption. tems will be reduced. When ECO is deactivated, Introduction Some of these functions can be restarted the ECO symbol will not be manually but full functionality will not be displayed in the instrument When Eco is activated, the restored until Eco is deactivated. following functions are modi- panel and the indicator light fied: in the ECO button will be off. Function The function will remain deactivated until the button is pressed again.

• The automatic transmission's shifting Eco Coast points Eco Coast is an integral part of the Eco func- • The engine management system and tion and essentially deactivates engine brak- accelerator pedal response ing, allowing the vehicle to roll freely. • Stop/stop function (Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)): the engine can auto-stop NOTE before the vehicle has come to a full stop To function optimally, Eco Coast should • Eco Coast functionality is activated: primarily be used when the vehicle can engine braking is disabled coast as far as possible. • Climate system settings: certain functions ECO On/Off button in the center console (e.g., air conditioning) will be temporarily When the driver releases the accelerator ECO symbol in the instrument panel reduced or deactivated pedal, the transmission is automatically dis- When the engine is switched off, ECO is engaged from the engine and engine rpm will deactivated and must be reactivated each be reduced to the idle level time the engine is started (with the exception (approx. 700-800 rpm), which helps reduce of certain engines). fuel consumption. 08

10 Option on models equipped with certain 4-cylinder engines

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

This feature is primarily intended to be used • The vehicle's speed is between approxi- • The engine and/or transmission have not in driving situations where a decrease in mately 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). Always reached their normal operating tempera- speed is expected, such as when approach- observe posted speed limits ture ing an intersection or a traffic light. • The gradient of a down-slope is less than • The gear selector is moved from D to the Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as approximately 6% manual "S+/–" position little braking as possible. Deactivating Eco Coast • The vehicle's speed is not within the 40–85 mph (65–140 km/h). interval Combinations of On and Off In certain situations, it may be advisable to switch off the Eco Coast function, such as: Depending on the driving situation, Eco can Additional information and settings be used in different ways to help reduce fuel • When driving down steep hills, in order to consumption: utilize engine braking • With Eco activated: this enables Eco • Prior to passing another vehicle, in order Coast, which allows the vehicle to roll to do so as safely as possible freely for as far as possible when the Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g., engine braking) can be done in the following when approaching a traffic light or inter- ways: section). • Press the ECO button on the center con- or sole • With Eco deactivated: engine braking • Move the gear selector to the manual "S can be used when the vehicle will only +/–" position roll for a short distance (in heavy traffic, • Change gears using the steering wheel etc.) or when driving down hills. Other ECO-related settings can be made in paddles* the vehicle's MY CAR menu. See My Car – To help keep fuel consumption as low as • Press the brake or accelerator pedal possible, Eco Coast should not be used in introduction (p. 76) for more information. traffic situations where the brakes have to be Eco Coast limitations Related information used frequently. This function will not be available if: • Climate – general information (p. 125) Activating Eco Coast • Cruise control is activated • Transmission – general information Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator • The gradient of a down-slope is more (p. 252) pedal is released completely if: than approximately 6% 08 • Eco is activated • The steering wheel paddles* are used to • The gear selector is in D manually change gears

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 08 Starting and driving

All Wheel Drive (AWD) NOTE Hill Descent Control (HDC)12 – Your Volvo can be equipped with permanent introduction The message AWD disabled Service All Wheel Drive, which means that power is required will be appear in the information HDC is a type of automatic engine brake and distributed automatically between the front display if an electrical fault should occur in makes it possible to increase or decrease the and rear wheels. the AWD system. A warning light will also vehicle's speed on downhill gradients using illuminate in the instrument panel. If this only the accelerator pedal, without applying occurs, have the system checked by a the brakes. The brake system functions auto- trained and qualified Volvo service techni- matically to maintain a low and steady speed. cian. Introduction Related information Normally, when the accelerator pedal is • Transmission – general information released while driving down hills, the vehicle's (p. 252) speed slows as the engine runs at lower rpm (the normal engine braking effect). However, if • Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction (p. 264) the downhill gradient becomes steeper and if the vehicle is carrying a load, speed increases despite the engine braking effect. In this situation, the brakes must be applied to reduce the vehicle's speed. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front HDC is particularly useful when driving down wheels. However, if there is any tendency for steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the the front wheels to spin, an electronically road may have slippery patches. controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction. WARNING HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner.

12 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only.

264 08 Starting and driving

Related information Hill Descent Control (HDC)14 – NOTE • Hill Descent Control (HDC) – operation operation (p. 265) HDC cannot be activated if the gear selector is the D position. • Brakes – general (p. 266) Function Using HDC HDC allows the car to roll forward at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h), and 4 mph (7 km/h) in reverse. However, the accelerator pedal can be used to select any speed that is possible in first or reverse gears. When the accelerator pedal is released, speed is quickly reduced again to 6 mph (10 km/h) or 4 mph (7 km/h), depending on the gear selected, regardless of the hill's gradient. It is not necessary to apply the brakes.

• HDC can be switched on and off with the • The brake lights illuminate automatically button in the center console. An indicator when HDC is controlling the vehicle's light in the button illuminates when HDC speed. is activated. • The driver can slow or stop the vehicle at any time by applying the brakes. • The indicator light in the instrument panel illuminates and a message is dis- HDC is deactivated when: played when the system is controlling the • The button on the center console is vehicle's speed. pressed • HDC only functions when first or reverse • A gear higher than first gear is selected gears are selected (1 will be shown in the D is selected on vehicles with an auto- instrument panel display when first gear • matic transmission is selected). HDC can be deactivated at any time. If this is done while driving down a steep hill, the system's braking effect will decrease gradually. 08

14 Available on the V60 Cross Country in combination with certain engines only. }} 265 08 Starting and driving

|| NOTE Brakes – general Brake pad inspection The brake system is a hydraulic system con- On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condi- Engine response to pressure on the accel- tion of the brake pads can be checked by erator pedal may be slightly slower than sisting of two separate brake circuits. If a normal when HDC is activated. problem should occur in one of these circuits, raising the vehicle (see Changing a wheel – it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the removing wheel (p. 292) for information other brake circuit. about using the jack and removing a wheel) Related information and performing a visual inspection of the • Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction If the brake pedal must be depressed farther brake pads. (p. 264) than normal and requires greater foot pres- • Brakes – general (p. 266) sure, the stopping distance will be longer. WARNING A warning light in the instrument panel will • If the vehicle has been driven immedi- light up to warn the driver that a fault has ately prior to a brake pad inspection, occurred. the wheel hub, brake components, If this light comes on while driving or braking, etc., will be very hot. Allow time for stop immediately and check the brake fluid these components to cool before car- level in the reservoir. rying out the inspection. • Apply the parking brake and put the NOTE gear selector in the Park (P) position. Press the brake pedal hard and maintain • Block the wheels standing on the pressure on the pedal – do not pump the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or brakes. large stones.

WARNING If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. 08

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 08 Starting and driving

WARNING Water on brake discs and brake pads braking gently for a short period while the affects braking vehicle is moving. Use the jack intended for the vehicle • Driving in rain and slush or passing through when changing a tire. For any other Related information an automatic car wash can cause water to job, use stands to support the vehicle. Parking brake – general information collect on the brake discs and pads. This will • (p. 269) • The jack should be kept well-greased cause a delay in braking effect when the and clean, and should not be dam- pedal is depressed. To avoid such a delay • Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) aged. when the brakes are needed, depress the (p. 269) • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, pedal occasionally when driving through rain, • Brakes – general (p. 266) non-slippery surface. slush, etc. This will remove the water from the • Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 268) brakes. Check that brake application feels • No objects should be placed between Hill Descent Control (HDC) – introduction normal. This should also be done after wash- • the base of jack and the ground, or (p. 264) between the jack and the attachment ing or starting in very damp or cold weather. bar on the vehicle. Severe strain on the brake system The jack must correctly engage the • The brakes will be subject to severe strain jack attachment. when driving in mountains or hilly areas, or • Never allow any part of your body to when towing a trailer. Vehicle speed is usually be extended under a vehicle suppor- slower, which means that the cooling of the ted by a jack. brakes is less efficient than when driving on level roads. To reduce the strain on the Power brakes function only when the brakes, shift into a lower gear and let the engine is running engine help with the braking. Do not forget The power brakes utilize vacuum pressure that if you are towing a trailer, the brakes will which is only created when the engine is run- be subjected to a greater than normal load. ning. Never let the vehicle roll to a stop with Cleaning the brake discs the engine switched off. Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs If the power brakes are not working, consid- may result in delayed brake function. This erably higher pressure will be required on the delay is minimized by cleaning the brake lin- brake pedal to compensate for the lack of ings. power assistance. This can happen for exam- 08 Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet ple when towing your vehicle or if the engine weather, prior to long-term parking, and after is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The the vehicle has been washed. Do this by brake pedal feels harder than usual.

267 08 Starting and driving

Brakes – symbols Anti-lock braking system (ABS) Brake lights The ABS system helps to improve vehicle The brake lights come on automatically when Symbols in the instrument panel control (stopping and steering) during severe the brakes are applied. Symbol Specification braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. Adaptive brake lights Steady glow – Check the brake When the system "senses" impending lockup, The adaptive brake lights activate in the event fluid level. If the level is low, fill braking pressure is automatically modulated of sudden braking or if the ABS system is with brake fluid and check for in order to help prevent lockup that could activated. This function causes an additional the cause of the brake fluid lead to a skid. taillight on each side of the vehicle to illumi- loss. The system performs a brief self-diagnostic nate to help alert vehicles traveling behind. test when the engine has been started and Automatic function check: The adaptive brake lights activate if: driver releases the brake pedal. Another auto- steady glow for two seconds The ABS system activates for more than matic test may be performed when the vehi- • when the engine is started. approximately a half second cle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate • In the event of sudden braking while the WARNING several times and a sound may be audible vehicle is moving at speeds above from the ABS control module, which is nor- approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). If and come on at the mal. When the vehicle has come to a stop, the same time and the brake level is below the brake lights and additional taillights remain on MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake sys- Related information for as long as the brake pedal is depressed or tem-related message is shown in the infor- • Parking brake – general information until braking force on the vehicle is reduced. mation display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the (p. 269) vehicle towed to a trained and qualified • Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) Related information Volvo service technician and have the • Brakes – general (p. 266) brake system inspected. (p. 269) • Brakes – general (p. 266) • Parking brake – general information (p. 269) Related information • Brakes – general (p. 266) • Parking brake – general information (p. 269) 08

268 08 Starting and driving

Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA) Related information Parking brake – general information EBA is designed to provide full brake effect • Parking brake – general information The electric parking brake helps to keep the immediately in the event of sudden, hard (p. 269) vehicle stationary when it is parked. braking. • Brakes – general (p. 266) Electric parking brake Emergency Brake Assistance • Anti-lock braking system (ABS) (p. 268) The EBA system is activated by the speed with which the brake pedal is depressed. When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. Maintain full pressure on the brake pedal in order to utilize the system completely. EBA is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is released.

NOTE Parking brake control • When the EBA system is activated, the brake pedal will go down and pressure NOTE in the brake system immediately increases to the maximum level. You • A faint sound from the parking brake's must maintain full pressure on the electric motor can be heard when the brake pedal in order to utilize the sys- parking brake is being applied. This tem completely. There will be no brak- sound can also be heard during the ing effect if the pedal is released. EBA automatic function check of the park- is automatically deactivated when the ing brake. brake pedal is released. • The brake pedal will move slightly • When the vehicle has been parked for when the electric parking brake is some time, the brake pedal may sink applied or released. more than usual when the engine is started. This is normal and the pedal Low battery voltage 08 will return to its usual position when it If the battery voltage is too low, the park- is released. ing brake cannot be applied or released.

}} 269 08 Starting and driving

|| Connect an auxiliary battery if the battery Parking brake – applying NOTE voltage is too low, see Jump starting (p. 251). Applying the electric parking brake • In an emergency the parking brake can Parking on a hill be applied when the vehicle is moving • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the by holding in the control. Braking will front wheels so that they point away from be interrupted when the accelerator the curb. pedal is depressed or the control is • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the released. front wheels so that they point toward the • An audible signal will sound during this curb. procedure if the vehicle is moving at The parking brake should also be applied. speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).

Related information Related information • Parking brake – applying (p. 270) • Parking brake – general information • Parking brake – releasing (p. 271) (p. 269) • Parking brake – symbols and messages Parking brake control • Parking brake – releasing (p. 271) (p. 272) 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. • Parking brake – symbols and messages • Brakes – general (p. 266) 2. Push the control. (p. 272) > • Brakes – general (p. 266) The symbol in the instrument panel flashes while the parking brake is being applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied. 3. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is at a standstill. 4. When the vehicle is parked, the gear selector must be in position P.

270 08 Starting and driving

Parking brake – releasing NOTE • Parking brake – symbols and messages (p. 272) For safety reasons, the parking brake is Releasing the electric parking brake • Brakes – general (p. 266) only released automatically if the engine • is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt. • The electric parking brake will be released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R.

2. Fasten the seat belt. 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R and press the accelerator pedal. The parking brake will release when the vehi- Parking brake control cle begins to move. Manual release Heavy load uphill 1. Fasten the seat belt. A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the 2. Insert the remote key in the ignition slot vehicle to roll backward when the parking and press the START/STOP ENGINE brake is released automatically on a steep button (or press the START/STOP incline. To help avoid this: ENGINE button with a valid remote key in 1. Keep the electric parking brake lever the passenger compartment on vehicles pushed in with the left hand while shifting with the optional keyless drive). into Drive with the right. 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to 4. Pull the parking brake control. pull away, release the parking brake lever Automatic release only after the vehicle begins to move. 1. Start the engine. Related information • Parking brake – general information 08 (p. 269) • Parking brake – applying (p. 270)

271 08 Starting and driving

Parking brake – symbols and messages A text message can be erased by pressing briefly on the OK button on the turn signal lever. Symbol and messages in the instrument panel Symbol Message Description/action

"Message" Read the message in the information display

A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is being applied. If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.

- Park brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Try to apply the parking brake and release it sev- fully released eral times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake not A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. Try to apply the parking brake and release it several applied times. If the problem persists, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. If you drive off with this error message showing, a warning signal sounds.

- Parking brake A fault has occurred. Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains Service required

WARNING Related information • Parking brake – general information If the vehicle must be parked before the (p. 269) fault has been corrected, always put the gear selector in P and turn the wheels so • Parking brake – applying (p. 270) that they point away from the curb if the • Parking brake – releasing (p. 271) vehicle is pointing uphill or toward the curb 08 if it is pointing downhill. • Brakes – general (p. 266)

272 08 Starting and driving

Driving through water WARNING CAUTION The vehicle should be driven with extreme Avoid driving through standing or Engine damage will occur if water is caution if it is necessary to drive through • • rushing water. Doing so can be dan- drawn into the air cleaner. standing water. gerous and it may also be difficult to • If the vehicle is driven through water The vehicle can be driven through water up to determine the actual depth of the deeper than approximately 13 in. a depth of approximately 13 in. (35 cm) at water. (35 cm), water may enter the differen- walking speed to help prevent water from • If water cannot be avoided, after driv- tial and the transmission. This reduces entering the differential and the transmission. ing through the water, press lightly on the oil's lubricating capacity and may Water reduces the oil's lubricating capacity the brake pedal to ensure that the shorten the service life of these com- and may shorten the service life of these brakes are functioning normally. Water ponents. components. or mud can make the brake linings • Damage to any components, the slippery, resulting in delayed braking engine, transmission, turbo-charger, • Take particular care when driving through effect. flowing water. differential or its internal components caused by flooding, vapor lock or • Clean the electrical connections for trailer insufficient oil is not covered under wiring after driving in mud or water. warranty. • When driving through water, maintain low • Do not allow the vehicle to stand in speed and do not stop in the water. water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. • If the engine has been stopped while the vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water.

Related information • Towing the vehicle (p. 285) • Towing by tow truck (p. 286)

273 08 Starting and driving

Engine and cooling system Conserving electrical current Before a long distance trip Under special conditions, for example when Keep the following in mind to help minimize It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with battery drain: checked by a trained and qualified Volvo serv- heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and ice technician before driving long distances. cooling system will overheat. • When the engine is not running, avoid Your retailer will also be able to supply you II using ignition mode . Many electrical with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper systems (the audio system, the optional Proceed as follows to avoid overheating the blades for your use in the event that problems navigation system, power windows, etc) engine. occur. will function in ignition modes 0 and I. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a These modes reduce drain on the battery. trailer up long, steep hills. For informa- As a minimum, the following items should be tion, see Towing a trailer (p. 282) • Please keep in mind that using systems, checked before any long trip: accessories, etc., that consume a great • Check that engine runs smoothly and that • Do not turn the engine off immediately deal of current when the engine is not fuel consumption is normal. when stopping after a hard drive. running could result in the battery being completely drained. Driving or having the • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. WARNING engine running for approximately • Have the transmission oil level (p. 380) The cooling fan may start or continue to 15 minutes will help keep the battery checked. operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the charged. • Check condition of drive belts. engine has been switched off. • The optional 12-volt socket in the cargo • Check state of the battery's charge. area (p. 141) area provides electrical cur- • Examine tires carefully (the spare tire as Remove any auxiliary lights from in front rent even with the ignition switched off, • well), and replace those that are of the grille when driving in hot weather which drains the battery. worn (p. 291). Check tire pres- conditions. sure (p. 298). Do not exceed engine speeds of • • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and 4500 rpm if driving with a trailer in hilly steering gear should be checked by a terrain. The oil temperature could become trained and qualified Volvo service techni- too high. cian only. • Check all lights, including high beams. • Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. 08 • Have a word with a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you intend to

274 08 Starting and driving

drive in countries where it may be difficult Driving in cold weather therefore advisable to check the state of to obtain the correct fuel. Check your vehicle before the approach of charge more frequently and spray an anti- • Consider your destination. If you will be cold weather. rust oil on the battery posts. driving through an area where snow or ice • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires are likely to occur, consider snow The following advice is worth noting: on all four wheels for winter driving, see tires (p. 306). • Make sure that the engine cool- Snow tires/studded tires (p. 306). Related information ant (p. 332) contains 50 percent anti- • To prevent the washer fluid (p. 345)reser- freeze. Any other mixture will reduce voir from freezing, add washer solvents Changing a wheel – removing wheel • freeze protection. This gives protection containing antifreeze. This is important (p. 292) against freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C). since dirt is often splashed on the wind- • Bulbs – introduction (p. 335) The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not shield during winter driving, requiring the approved by Volvo. Different types of frequent use of the washers and wipers. antifreeze must not be mixed. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted • Volvo recommends using only genuine as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C): helps prevent the formation of condensa- 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water tion in the tank. In addition, in extremely Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer cold weather conditions it is worthwhile solvent and 1 part water. to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. • The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) • Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can improves cold-weather starting as well as cause damage to the locks. decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures. • The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the bat- 08 tery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is

275 08 Starting and driving

Refueling – fuel requirements result in loss of emission warranty coverage. Volvo allows the use of the following "oxy- Volvo recommends the use of detergent gas- State and local vehicle inspection programs genated" fuels; however, the octane rat- oline to control engine deposits. will make detection of misfueling easier, pos- ings (p. 277) listed must still be met. sibly resulting in emission test failure for mis- Alcohol – Ethanol Deposit control gasoline (detergent fueled vehicles. Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by vol- additives) ume may be used. Ethanol may also be refer- Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping NOTE red to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines con- Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to use of deposit control gasolines will help tain an octane enhancing additive called ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If methyl-cyclopentadienyl manganese tri- 15% MTBE may be used. you are not sure whether the gasoline con- carbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, Methanol tains deposit control additives, check with the your Emission Control System perform- service station operator. ance may be affected, and the Check Do not use gasolines containing methanol Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice NOTE located on your instrument panel may can result in vehicle performance deteriora- light. If this occurs, please return your tion and can damage critical parts in the fuel Volvo does not recommend the use of vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo system. Such damage may not be covered external fuel injector cleaning systems. service technician for service. under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Unleaded fuel Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic con- "Oxygenated fuels" verter and must use only unleaded gasoline. Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing U.S. and Canadian regulations require that "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be ethers. In some areas, state or local laws labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps require that the service pump be marked indi- have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler cating use of alcohols or ethers. However, inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel there are areas in which the pumps are into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is only". Leaded gasoline damages the three- alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, way catalytic converter and the heated oxy- check with the service station operator. To gen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded meet seasonal air quality standards, some 08 gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. emission control system (p. 280) and could

276 08 Starting and driving

Refueling – octane rating ard jointly established by leading automotive Fuel Formulations Volvo recommends premium fuel for best per- manufactures to meet the needs of today’s Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a formance, but using 87 octane17 or above will advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retail- knock inhibitor, and do not use lead addi- not affect engine reliability. ers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their tives. Besides damaging the exhaust emis- gasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Deter- sion control systems on your vehicle, lead Minimum octane gent Gasoline” standards. has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. NOTE Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Information about TOP TIER Detergent Unburned benzene has been strongly linked Gasoline is available at to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an www.toptiergas.com. area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: Demanding driving • standing upwind away from the filler noz- In demanding driving conditions, such as zle while refueling operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a • refueling only at gas stations with vapor trailer, or driving for extended periods at recovery systems that fully seal the G028920 higher altitudes than normal, it may be advis- mouth of the filler neck during refueling able to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or Typical pump octane label wearing neoprene gloves while handling a higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully • fuel filler nozzle. utilize your engine's capacity, and for the NOTE smoothest possible operation. Use of Additives Vehicles equipped with the high perform- With the exception of gas line antifreeze dur- ance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and NOTE ing winter months, do not add solvents, thick- B4204T10) require premium fuel18. When switching to higher octane fuel or eners, or other store-bought additives to your changing gasoline brands, it may be nec- vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline essary to fill the tank more than once Overuse may damage your engine, and some Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Deter- before a difference in engine operation is of these additives contain organically volatile gent Gasoline” where available to help main- noticeable. chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself tain engine performance and reliability. TOP to these chemicals. TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new stand- 08

17 AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. 18 Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information. }} 277 08 Starting and driving

|| WARNING Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler • Be sure the fuel filler door is not obstruc- door ted and is completely closed after refuel- Never carry a cell phone that is switched ing. on while refueling your vehicle. If the The fuel filler door is located on the right rear phone rings, this may cause a spark that fender (indicated by an arrow beside the fuel • Open the fuel filler cap slowly during hot could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in tank symbol on the information display ) weather. fire and injury. Close the fuel filler door by pressing it; a click indicates that it is closed. WARNING CAUTION Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, color- less, and odorless gas. It is present in all Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust addition to causing damage to the environ- fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the ment, gasolines containing alcohol can passenger compartment is ventilated, and cause damage to painted surfaces, which immediately return the vehicle to a trained may not be covered under the New Vehicle and qualified Volvo service technician for Limited Warranty. correction. Manually opening the fuel filler door Related information • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276) With the ignition switched off, press and release the button on the lighting panel to unlock the fuel filler door. Please note that the fuel filler door will remain unlocked until the vehicle begins to move forward. An audible click will be heard when the fuel filler door relocks. • If you intend to leave your vehicle while it is being refueled, this feature enables you to lock the doors/tailgate while leaving the fuel filler door unlocked. 08 • You can also keep the vehicle locked if 1. Open the side hatch in the cargo area (on you remain inside it during refueling. The the same side as the fuel filler door). central locking button does not lock the fuel filler door. 2. Grasp the handle on the green cord.

278 08 Starting and driving

3. Gently pull the cord straight rearward until Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap CAUTION the fuel filler door clicks open. If necessary, the fuel filler door can be Do not refuel with the engine run- opened manually. • Related information ning19. Turn the ignition off or to posi- • Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap Opening/closing the fuel cap tion I. If the ignition is on, an incorrect (p. 279) reading could occur in the fuel gauge. • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276) • Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not • Refueling – octane rating (p. 277) press the handle on the filler nozzle more than one extra time. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems.

Related information • Refueling – fuel requirements (p. 276) • Refueling – octane rating (p. 277) Fuel vapor expands in hot weather. Open the filler cap slowly. After refueling, close the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it clicks into place.

19 If the fuel filler cap is not closed tightly or if the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. Use only Volvo original or approved fuel filler caps.

279 08 Starting and driving

Emission controls or removing components, and/or repea- Economical driving ted use of leaded fuel. Better driving economy may be obtained by Three-way catalytic converter thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain NOTE stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle engine malfunctions, particularly involving to immediate traffic conditions. the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters. systems, may cause unusually high three- Economical driving conserves natural way catalytic converter temperatures. Do resources not continue to operate your vehicle if Heated oxygen sensors Observe the following rules: you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxy- of power or other unusual operating con- gen content of the exhaust gases. Readings • Bring the engine to normal operating tem- ditions, such as engine overheating or are fed into a control module that continu- perature as soon as possible by driving backfiring. A properly tuned engine will ously monitors engine functions and controls with a light foot on the accelerator pedal help avoid malfunctions that could dam- fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the for the first few minutes of operation. A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject age the three-way catalytic converter. engine is continuously adjusted for efficient to increased wear. • Do not park your vehicle over combusti- combustion to help reduce harmful emis- ble materials, such as grass or leaves, sions. • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehi- which can come into contact with the hot cle for driving short distances. This does exhaust system and cause such materials Related information not allow the engine to reach normal to ignite under certain wind and weather • Information displays – warning symbols operating temperature. conditions. (p. 74) • Drive carefully and avoid rapid accelera- • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of • Engine and cooling system (p. 274) tion and hard braking. one minute), or an intermittently firing or • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position flooded engine can cause three-way cat- as often as possible and avoid using kick- alytic converter or exhaust system over- down. heating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system 08 overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components or location

280 08 Starting and driving

• Using the engine's optional Eco func- • Dirty air cleaner with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in 20 tion can help improve fuel economy. For • Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter the cargo area, the less the tendency to additional information, see ECO* (p. 262). understeer. • Dragging brakes • Using the transmission's Sport mode21 • Incorrect front end alignment • Vehicle load, tire design and inflation may increase fuel consumption some- pressure all affect vehicle handling. what. Use the transmission's Drive (D) Some of the above mentioned items and oth- Therefore, check that the tires are inflated position as often as possible. For addi- ers are checked at the standard maintenance to the recommended pressure according tional information about Sport mode, see intervals. to the vehicle load. Loads should be dis- Transmission – Geartronic (p. 254). tributed so that capacity weight or maxi- • Do not exceed posted speed limits. WARNING mum permissible axle loads are not exceeded. • Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra Driving with the tailgate open: Driving load) in the vehicle. with the tailgate open could lead to poi- • At the specified curb weight your vehicle sonous exhaust gases entering the pas- has a tendency to understeer, which Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire • senger compartment. If the tailgate must means that the steering wheel has to be pressure regularly (when tires are cold). be kept open for any reason, proceed as turned more than might seem appropriate • Remove snow tires when threat of snow follows: for the curvature of a bend. This ensures or ice has ended. • Close the windows good stability and reduces the risk of rear • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, wheel skid. Remember that these proper- • Set the ventilation system control to air ties can alter with the vehicle load. The increase air resistance and also fuel con- flow to floor, windshield and side win- sumption. heavier the load in the cargo compart- dows and the blower control to its ment, the less the tendency to under- At highway driving speeds, fuel consump- • highest setting. steer. tion will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the Handling and roadholding Related information air conditioning off and the windows • Climate – general information (p. 125) open. At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that Using the onboard trip computer's fuel • the steering wheel has to be turned more consumption modes can help you learn than might seem appropriate for the curva- how to drive more economically. ture of a bend. This ensures good stability Other factors that decrease gas mileage and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. are: Remember that these properties can alter 08

20 Available on certain 4-cyl. engines 21 Models with the T6 turbo engine only.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281 08 Starting and driving

Towing a trailer • If the automatic transmission begins to NOTE When towing a trailer, always observe the overheat, a message will be displayed in When parking the vehicle with a trailer legal requirements of the state/province. the text window. • on a hill, apply the parking brake Avoid overload and other abusive opera- • before putting the gear selector in P. NOTE tion. Always follow the trailer manufactur- For the maximum trailer and tongue • Hauling a trailer affects handling, durabil- er's recommendations for wheel weights recommended by Volvo, see ity, and economy. chocking. Weights (p. 374). • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes • When starting on a hill, put the gear with the towing vehicle brakes to provide selector in D before releasing the park- • All Volvo models are equipped with a safe stop (check and observe state/ ing brake. local regulations). energy-absorbing shock-mounted bump- • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift ers. Trailer hitch installation should not • Do not connect the trailer's brake system positions while towing a trailer, make interfere with the proper operation of this directly to the vehicle's brake system. sure the gear you select does not put bumper system. • More frequent vehicle maintenance is too much strain on the engine (using Trailer towing does not normally present any required. too high a gear). particular problems, but take into considera- • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch tion: not being used. may be rated for trailers heavier than • Increase tire pressure to recommended the vehicle is designed to tow. Please full pressure, see Tire inflation – pressure adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer table (p. 301). weights. • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines heavy trailers during the first 620 miles of more than 15%. (1,000 km). • Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched when driving in hot climates or 08 hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range.

282 08 Starting and driving

CAUTION WARNING Detachable trailer hitch Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer The maximum trailer weights listed are Bumper-attached trailer hitches must • hitches that are specially designed for the only applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft not be used on Volvos, nor should vehicle. (1000 m) above sea level. With increasing safety chains be attached to the altitude the engine power and therefore bumper. the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle maximum trailer weight has to be reduced rear axle must not be used. accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic trailer must be reduced by 10% for every brake system directly to the vehicle further 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof). brake system, nor a trailer's lighting When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill incli- C system directly to the vehicle lighting nation is restricted to 14%. system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installa- D tion. E B When towing a trailer, the trailer's

• A G010496 safety chains or wire must be correctly fastened to the attachment points pro- Ball holder vided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety chain or wire must never be Locking bolt fastened to or wound around the towing ball. Cotter pin Hitch assembly Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer Safety wire attachment hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved Installing the ball holder by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from on the ground. the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. Related information • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 283) 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assem- 08 bly. • Loading – general (p. 142)

}} 283 08 Starting and driving

|| 3. Align the hole in the ball holder with the Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle one in the hitch assembly. Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer to compensate for the swaying motion by 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch moving the steering wheel rapidly assembly/ball holder. when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the stability system. For How TSA works 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end information on the stability system, see Stabil- of the locking bolt. Once swaying has begun, it can be very diffi- ity system – introduction (p. 174) cult to stop, which makes it difficult to control Removing the ball holder Function the vehicle and trailer. 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway The TSA system continuously monitors the bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the for various reasons. Normally this only occurs vehicle's movements, particularly lateral ball holder/hitch assembly. at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer movement. If the system detects a tendency 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch is overloaded or if the load is unevenly dis- to sway, the brakes are applied individually assembly. tributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing at speeds between approximately 45-55 mph effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often NOTE (70-90 km/h). enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. A cover for the hitch assembly is also Swaying may be caused by factors such as: included in the kit. • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sud- If this is not adequate to stop the swaying den, strong crosswind motion, the brakes are applied to all of the Related information wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an equipped with brakes, and engine power is Towing a trailer (p. 282) uneven road surface or drive over a bump • temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion • Sudden movements of the steering wheel begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have once again become stable, TSA will now Facts about TSA stop regulating the brakes/engine power and TSA intervenes at speeds above approxi- • the driver regains control of the vehicle. mately 40 mph (60 km/h) • The stability system symbol in the instru- Related information ment panel will flash when TSA is working • Towing a trailer (p. 282) • If the driver switches off the stability sys- • Loading – general (p. 142) 08 tem's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started)

284 08 Starting and driving

Towing the vehicle CAUTION Towing eyelet Always check with state and local authorities When used, the towing eyelet should always General towing precautions: before attempting to tow another vehicle be securing attached. because this type of towing is subject to reg- • Please check with state and local ulations regarding maximum towing speed, authorities before attempting this type length and type of towing device, lighting, etc. of towing, as vehicles being towed are subject to regulations regarding maxi- 1. With the remote key fully pressed into the mum towing speed, length and type of ignition slot22, press START/STOP towing device, lighting, etc. ENGINE for approximately 2 seconds to • If the vehicle's battery is dead, see activate ignition mode II. Jump starting (p. 251) to provide cur- 2. The remote key must remain in the igni- rent for releasing the electric parking brake and to move the gear selector tion slot23 for the entire time that the vehi- from the P position to N. If this is not Location of the towing eyelet cle is being towed. possible, see Transmission – shiftlock 3. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing override (p. 256) for information about vehicle slows down by applying light manually overriding the shiftlock sys- pressure on the brake pedal. This will tem to move the gear selector from P help prevent jarring movements of the to N. vehicle being towed. • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not exceed the maximum allowable 4. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop towing speed. the vehicle being towed. • Maximum distance with front wheels on ground: 50 miles (80 km). • The vehicle should only be towed in the forward direction. Attaching the towing eyelet Related information • Towing eyelet (p. 285) • Remote key – functions (p. 153) 08

22 Not necessary in vehicles with the optional keyless drive. 23 For vehicles with the optional keyless drive, the remote key must be in the vehicle. }} 285 08 Starting and driving

|| Attaching the towing eyelet WARNING Towing by tow truck The towing eyelet is located under the When necessary, call for professional help When the vehicle is being towed, the floor of the cargo area, with the spare tire • from an authorized towing company. Volvo ignition should be in mode II (in mode and may be partially concealed. This eye- recommends the use of flat bed equipment. I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deac- let must be screwed into the positions tivated). For more information, see provided on the right sides of either the Ignition modes (p. 79) CAUTION front or rear bumper (see illustration). • Never remove the remote key from the In certain conditions, the towing eyelet There are two different types of covers ignition slot when the vehicle is being may be used to pull the vehicle onto a over the openings for the towing eyelet towed. For vehicles with keyless drive, flatbed tow truck. and they have to be opened differently. the remote key must remain inside the • The vehicle's position and ground • If the cover has a notch, insert a coin, vehicle. clearance determine if it can be pulled etc., into the notch and pry open the • The power brakes and power steering up onto a flatbed tow truck using the edge of the cover. Open the cover will not function when the engine is not towing eyelet. completely and remove it. running. Approximately 5 times more • If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is • If the cover has a mark along one edge pressure will be required on the brake too steep or the ground clearance or in a corner, press the mark while pedal and the steering wheel will be under the vehicle is insufficient, dam- prying out the opposite side/corner considerably harder to turn. age could occur by attempting to pull using a coin, etc. Open the cover and • The towing eyelets must not be used the vehicle using the towing eyelet. remove it. for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the for any similar purpose involving Screw the towing eyelet in place, first by tow truck’s lifting device. severe strain. hand and then using the tire iron until it is securely in place. WARNING Related information After the vehicle has been towed, the eyelet • Towing the vehicle (p. 285) No person or object should be behind the should be removed and returned to its stor- tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled age location. • Towing by tow truck (p. 286) up onto the flatbed. Press the cover for the attachment point back into position.

286 08 Starting and driving

CAUTION • The vehicle should always be towed in the forward direction. • Vehicles with All Wheel Drive (AWD)* that are being towed with the front wheels off the ground should not be towed at a speed above approx. 45 mph (70 km/h) and should not be towed farther than 30 miles (50 km).

Related information • Towing eyelet (p. 285)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287 WHEELS AND TIRES 09 Wheels and tires

Tires – general information However, for optimum road holding on icy or Related information 09 Your vehicle is equipped with tires according snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) to the vehicle's tire information placard on the winter tires on all four wheels. • Tire specifications (p. 299) B-pillar (the structural member at the side of When replacing tires, be sure that the new • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door tires are the same size designation, type (p. 292) opening). (radial) and preferably from the same manu- • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) facturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is Introduction a risk of altering the car's roadholding and handling characteristics. CAUTION Tire rotation Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire combination designed to provide maxi- wear is affected by a number of factors such mum dry pavement performance with con- as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving sideration for hydroplaning resistance. style, etc. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving NOTE conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this • If the tires are rotated, they should vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced only be moved from front to rear or AWD or stability system, these tires are not vice versa. They should never be rota- designed for winter driving, and should be ted left to right/right to left. replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at The tires have good road holding characteris- 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. tics and offer good handling on dry and wet Some customers find that tire rotation surfaces. It should be noted however that the may help to get extra mileage from tire tires have been developed to give these fea- life. tures on snow/ice-free surfaces. • Tire rotation should only be performed Most models are equipped with "all-season" if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tires, which provide a somewhat higher tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). degree of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating.

289 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tires – storage and age process. The temporary spare1 should also WARNING When storing complete wheels (tires mounted be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo on rims), they should be suspended off the never been used. • are specified to meet stringent stability floor or placed on their sides on the floor. A tire's age can be determined by the DOT and handling requirements. Unap- New Tires stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). proved wheel/tire size combinations A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. should be replaced immediately. • Any damage caused by installation of Storing wheels and tires unapproved wheel/tire size combina- When storing completes wheels (tires moun- tions will not be covered by your new ted on rims), they should be suspended off vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no the floor or placed on their sides on the floor. responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such Tires not mounted on rims should be stored installations. on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. Related information CAUTION • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) Tire specifications (p. 299) Remember that tires are perishable goods. As Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, • of 2000, the manufacturing week and year dry, dark place, and should never be • Tire specifications (p. 299) (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) stored in close proximity to solvents, gaso- • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 1513 line, oils, etc. (p. 292) means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 15 of 2013). • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging

1 Option or accessory on some models

290 09 Wheels and tires

Tires – tread wear indicator • Changing a wheel – direction of rotation Tires – tire economy 09 The tires have wear indicator strips running (p. 292) A smooth driving style and correct inflation across or parallel to the tread. • Tires – storage and age (p. 290) pressure can help prolong the tires' service life. • Maintain correct tire pressure. The tire inflation table, see Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301). • Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire screeching. • Tire wear increases with speed. • Correct front wheel alignment is very important. • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy G021829 and driving comfort. • Tires must maintain the same direction of The letters TWI are printed on the side of the rotation throughout their lifetime. tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible • When replacing tires, the tires with the and indicate that the tire should be replaced. most tread should be mounted on the rear wheels to reduce the chance of over- Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer steer during hard braking. very poor traction. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the When replacing worn tires, it is recommended tires and/or wheels permanently. that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. Related information • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) • Tire specifications (p. 299)

291 09 Wheels and tires

09 Changing a wheel – direction of Related information Changing a wheel – removing wheel rotation • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) Wheel changes should always be carried out Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's • Tire specifications (p. 299) correctly. braking properties and ability to force aside • Tires – storage and age (p. 290) rain, snow and slush. • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) Summer and winter tires G021778

The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire • The tires with the most tread should always be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of skidding). • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall. • Contact a Volvo workshop if you are unsure about the tread depth.

292 09 Wheels and tires

3. 09

Location of jack*, towing eyelet2 and tools* Lug wrench and towing eyelet Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel 5. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug Changing a wheel nuts 1. Apply the parking brake and put the gear wrench as shown in the illustration. selector in P. Remove the wheel cover (where applicable) using the removal tool or remove the CAUTION 2. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool wheel cover by hand. for removing the plastic covers on the The towing eyelet must be screwed into wheel nuts, the towing eyelet and the 4. Block the wheels that are on the ground the lug wrench as far as possible. wheel cover removal tool (certain models with wooden blocks or large stones. only) stowed under the floor of the cargo area.

2 The towing eyelet may be partially concealed under the rear edge of the cargo area. See the illustration Towing eyelet (p. 285) for its location. }}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 7. There are two jack attachment points on WARNING each side of the vehicle. Position the jack under the attachment point to be used on • The jack must correctly engage the a level, firm, non-slippery surface and jack attachment. crank it up until it is correctly aligned and • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, seated in the attachment point. Before non-slippery surface. raising the vehicle, check that the jack is • Never allow any part of your body to still correctly positioned in the attach- be extended under a vehicle suppor- ment. ted by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, • Apply the parking brake and put the remove the plastic covers on the wheel gear selector in the Park (P) position. nuts with the tool provided and use the • Block the wheels standing on the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or wheel nuts ½ – 1 turn by exerting down- large stones. ward (counterclockwise) pressure. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or WARNING between the jack and the attachment There are two attachment points near the bar on the vehicle. rear of the vehicle. Only the rear-most attachment point is intended for the jack (see the illustration).

8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground. Jack attachment points 9. Unscrew the wheel nuts completely and remove the wheel.

294 09 Wheels and tires

09 NOTE Changing a wheel – spare wheel Spare wheel Wheel changes should always be carried out The spare wheel is only intended for tempo- The jack provided with your vehicle is rary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as intended to be used only in temporary sit- correctly. uations such as changing wheels in the soon as possible. The car's handling may be event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came Spare tire altered by the use of the spare wheel. The with your particular model should be used The spare tire in your vehicle3 is called a correct tire pressure for the spare wheel is to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be "Temporary Spare". stated in the tire pressure table, see Tire infla- lifted more frequently or for a prolonged tion – pressure table (p. 301) and in the tire Recommended tire pressure (see the placard period, using a garage jack or hoist is rec- inflation placard on the driver's side door on the B-pillar or on the fuel filler door) should ommended. Always follow this device’s jamb at the rear of the driver's door opening. instructions for use. be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. WARNING Related information Changing a wheel – installing a wheel In the event of damage to this tire, a new one Current legislation prohibits the use of the • “Temporary Spare” tire other than as a (p. 296) can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- WARNING ble by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the “Tem- Current legislation prohibits the use of the porary Spare” in use. "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possi- CAUTION ble by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Tem- The vehicle must never be driven with porary Spare" in use. Do not exceed more than one temporary spare wheel. 50 mph (80 km/h). The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel CAUTION well with the rim side down. There are two foam blocks, one under the spare wheel and The vehicle must not be driven with wheels one over/inside. The upper one contains all of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehi- tools. cle. The use of different size wheels can The same bolt runs through to secure the seriously damage your car's transmission. spare wheel and the foam blocks.

3 Not on models equipped with the Tire sealing system. }} 295 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 Related information Changing a wheel – accessing the Changing a wheel – installing a wheel • Changing a wheel – installing a wheel spare wheel It is important to re-install wheels properly. (p. 296) The following procedure explains how to • Changing a wheel – removing wheel access the spare wheel (where applicable). Re-installing the wheel (p. 292) 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel 1. Open the floor hatch. and hub. 2. Undo the retaining bolt. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. 3. Lift out the foam block. 4. Lift out the spare wheel. The other two blocks can remain in the spare wheel well. After use The foam block and spare wheel must be replaced in the reverse order. Note the arrow on the upper foam block. It should point forward.

Tighten the wheel nuts 3. Install the wheel nuts and tighten hand- tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all nuts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alter- nately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel nuts and Install the wheel cover (where applicable). The opening in the wheel cover for the tire's inflation valve must be positioned over the valve.

296 09 Wheels and tires

09 Related information Tire inflation – general information NOTE • Changing a wheel – spare wheel (p. 295) Check tire inflation pressure regularly. • The placards shown indicate inflation • Changing a wheel – removing wheel Inflation placard pressure for the tires installed on the (p. 292) vehicle at the factory only. • A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly.

• Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare, at least once a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire G032521 pressure gauge, as automatic service sta- Tire inflation placard tion gauges may be inaccurate. • Use the recommended cold inflation Tire inflation pressure for optimum tire performance See the tire inflation table in Tire inflation – and wear. pressure table (p. 301). A tire inflation pres- • Under-inflation or over-inflation may sure placard is also located on the driver's cause uneven treadwear patterns. side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's WARNING door opening). This placard indicates the designation of the factory-mounted tires on your • Under-inflation is the most common vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation cause of tire failure and may result in pressure. severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. • Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle.

}} 297 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 When weather temperature changes occur, Tire inflation – checking pressure 3. Replace the valve cap. tire inflation pressures also change. A 10- Inflation pressure should be checked when degree temperature drop causes a corres- the tires are cold. CAUTION ponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently Cold tires • After inflating the tires, always reinstall and adjust them to the proper pressure, The tires are considered to be cold when the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. which can be found on the vehicle's tire infor- they have the same temperature as the mation placard or certification label. surrounding (ambient) air. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to Related information This temperature is normally reached after the remove. • Tire specifications (p. 299) vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. • Tires – storage and age (p. 290) After driving a distance of approximately 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be there are no nails or other objects hot. If you have to drive farther than this dis- embedded that could puncture the tire • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) tance to pump your tire(s), check and record and cause an air leak. the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, irregularities. never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, pressures to increase above recommended including the spare. cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be sig- NOTE nificantly under-inflated. • If you overfill the tire, release air by To check inflation pressure: pushing on the metal stem in the cen- 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one ter of the valve. Then recheck the tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto pressure with your tire gauge. the valve. • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Con- 2. Add air to reach the recommended air sult the tire inflation pressure table, pressure. see Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) or see the inflation pressure placard.

298 09 Wheels and tires

Related information Tire specifications Information on the sidewall 09 • Tire specifications (p. 299) The following information can be found on a • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) tire's sidewall. • Tires – storage and age (p. 290) Tire ratings Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) • Speed ratings The speed ratings in the table translate as follow:

Speed ratings

M 81 mph (130 km/h)

Q 100 mph (160 km/h) Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers T 118 mph (190 km/h) place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration). H 130 mph (210 km/h) The following information is listed on the tire V 149 mph (240 km/h) sidewall: W 168 mph (270 km/h) The tire designation:

Y 186 mph (300 km/h) NOTE Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle.

}} 299 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 1. 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The Terrain, AS = All Season grades: see Tire specifications – Uniform larger the number, the wider the tire. 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number Tire Quality Grading (p. 304) for more 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" information. width in percent. and indicates that the tire meets all fed- 12. Maximum permissible inflation 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the eral standards. The next two numbers or pressure: the greatest amount of air letters are the plant code where it was pressure that should ever be put in the symbol indicate that the vehicle is manufactured, the next two are the tire tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- equipped with optional self-supporting 4 size code and the last four numbers rep- turer. run flat tires . resent the week and year the tire was 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in built. For example, 1510 means that the inches). tire was manufactured during week 15 of 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, 2010. The numbers in between are mar- a load index of 95 equals a maximum keting codes used at the manufacturer's load of 1521 lbs (690 kg). discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maxi- recall purposes. mum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material carrying a permissible load for the vehi- Used: Indicates the number of plies indi- cle, and with correct inflation pressure. cates or the number of layers of rubber- For example, H indicates a speed rating coated fabric in the tire tread and side- of 130 mph (210 km/h). wall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the NOTE sidewall, which include steel, nylon, poly- ester, and others. The tire's load index and speed rating may Maximum Load not appear on the sidewall because they 10. : Indicates the maximum are not required by law. load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B- Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

4 Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models

300 09 Wheels and tires

Tire inflation – pressure table the tire inflation placard (see Tire inflation – information specific to the tires installed on 09 The following tire pressures are recom- general information (p. 297) for its location) for your vehicle at the factory. mended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to Some of the tire sizes listed here may not be available for all models in all markets.

Tire size Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa)

235/60 R18 35 (240) 35 (240) 235/55 R19 255/45 R20

Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) T125/80R17

NOTE Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts department for the most up-to-date specifications.

301 09 Wheels and tires

09 Loading specifications Gross vehicle weight (GVW) Loading specifications – load limit Properly loading your vehicle will provide The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passen- The load limit of your vehicle is the combined maximum return of vehicle design perform- gers. weight of the occupants and cargo. ance. NOTE Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- • The location of the various labels in 1. Locate the statement "the combined self with the following terms for determining your vehicle, see Label information weight of occupants and cargo should your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without (p. 368). never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehi- a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian • A table listing important weight limits cle's placard. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ for your vehicle, see Weights (p. 374). CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire informa- 2. Determine the combined weight of the tion placard: driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank 3. Subtract the combined weight of the of fuel and all standard equipment. It does driver and passengers from XXX kilo- not include passengers, cargo, or optional grams or XXX pounds. equipment. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load Capacity weight capacity. For example, if the "XXX" All weight added to the curb weight, including amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be cargo and optional equipment. When towing, five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo the amount of available cargo and lug- weight. gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – Permissible axle weight 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) The maximum allowable weight that can be 5. Determine the combined weight of lug- carried by a single axle (front or rear). These gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi- numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian cle. That weight may not safely exceed Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/ the available cargo and luggage load CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle capacity calculated in Step 4. must never exceed its maximum permissible weight.

302 09 Wheels and tires

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load Tire specifications – terminology • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pres- 09 from your trailer will be transferred to your The following is a glossary of tire-related sure. vehicle. terms. • PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. The tire suppliers may have additional mark- WARNING B-pillar: The structural member at the ings, notes or warnings such as standard • side of the vehicle behind the front door. • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, load, radial tubeless, etc. gross vehicle weight, or any other • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire weight rating limits can cause tire • Tire information placard: A placard next to the rim. showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire overheating resulting in permanent • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the deformation or catastrophic failure. sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can bead area and the tread. Do not use replacement tires with • carry. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perim- lower load carrying capacities than the • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A eter of the tire that contacts the road tires that were original equipment on when mounted on the vehicle. the vehicle because this will lower the number on the sidewall of each tire pro- vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires viding information about the tire brand • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire with the correct load carrying capacity. and manufacturing plant, tire size and or a tire and tube assembly upon which Consult your Volvo retailer for informa- date of manufacturer. the tire beads are seated. tion. • Inflation pressure: A measure of the • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating amount of air in a tire. the maximum load in pounds and kilo- • Standard load: A class of P-metric or grams that can be carried by the tire. This Metric tires designed to carry a maximum rating is established by the tire manufac- load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric turer. tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure • Maximum permissible inflation beyond this pressure will not increase the pressure: the greatest amount of air tires load carrying capability. pressure that should ever be put in the • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tire. This limit is set by the tire manufac- tires designed to carry a heavier maxi- turer. mum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for • Recommended tire inflation pressure: Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pres- inflation pressure, established by Volvo, sure beyond this pressure will not which is based on the type of tires that increase the tire's load carrying capabil- are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. ity. This information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's

}} 303 09 Wheels and tires

09 side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table Tire specifications – Uniform Tire ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire in this chapter. Quality Grading is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction • Cold tires: The tires are considered to be ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST tests and is not a measure of cornering (turn- cold when they have the same tempera- CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY ing) traction. ture as the surrounding (ambient) air. This REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE temperature is normally reached after the GRADES. WARNING vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. Quality grades can be found, where appli- The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction cable, on the tire sidewall between the tests and is not a measure of cornering tread shoulder and maximum section (turning) traction. width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TEMPERATURE TREADWEAR The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to The treadwear grade is a comparative rating the generation of heat and its ability to dissi- based on the wear rate of the tire when tes- pate heat when tested under controlled con- ted under controlled conditions on a specified ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test government test course. For example, a tire wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause graded 150 would wear one and one half the material of the tire to degenerate and (1 ½) times as well on the government course reduce tire life, and excessive temperature as a tire graded 100. The relative perform- can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C ance of tires depends upon the actual condi- corresponds to a minimum level of perform- tions of their use, however, and many depart ance that all passenger vehicle tires must significantly from the norm due to variation in meet under the Federal Motor Safety Stand- driving habits, maintenance practices and dif- ard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher ferences in road characteristics and climate. levels of performance on the laboratory test TRACTION wheel than the minimum required by law. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform-

304 09 Wheels and tires

09 WARNING Snow chains CAUTION Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with The temperature grade for this tire is Check local regulations regarding the the following restrictions: • established for a tire that is properly infla- use of snow chains before installing. ted and not overloaded. Excessive speed, Snow chains should be installed on front under-inflation, or excessive loading, either • • Use single-sided snow chains only. separately or in combination, can cause wheels only. Use only Volvo approved • Always follow the chain manufactur- heat buildup and tire failure. snow chains. er's installation instructions carefully. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" Install chains as tightly as possible and tires and wheels are installed and are of a retighten periodically. size different than the original tires and • Never exceed the chain manufactur- wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT er's specified maximum speed limit. be used. Sufficient clearances between (Under no circumstances should you chains and brakes, suspension and body exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). components must be maintained. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns • Some strap-on type chains will interfere when driving with snow chains. with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used. • The handling of the vehicle can be adversely affected when driving with All Wheel Drive models • : Snow chains chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as should only be installed on the front well as locked wheel braking. wheels. • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information.

305 09 Wheels and tires

09 Snow tires/studded tires5 Tire pressure monitoring - As an added safety feature, your vehicle has Owners who live in or regularly commute introduction been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- through areas with sustained periods of snow Volvo provides two different systems to moni- ing system that illuminates a low tire pressure or icy driving conditions are strongly advised tor tire pressure: Tire Pressure Monitoring telltale ( ) when one or more of your tires to fit suitable winter tires to help retain the System (TPMS) or Tire Monitor. is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, highest degree of traction. when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, Determining which tire monitoring you should stop and check your tires as soon Tires for winter use: system is in your vehicle as possible, and inflate them to the proper • It is important to install winter tires on all To see which system is installed in your vehi- pressure. four wheels to help retain traction during cle, press the MY CAR button on the center Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire cornering, braking, and accelerating. Fail- console. Go to Settings Car settings. ure to do so could reduce traction to an causes the tire to overheat and can lead to unsafe level or adversely affect handling. • If your vehicle has a menu called Tire tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel monitoring, see Tire Monitor - introduc- efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect Do not mix tires of different design as this • the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. could also negatively affect overall tire tion (p. 311). Please note that a tire pressure monitoring road grip. • If your vehicle has a menu called Tire pressure, see Tire Pressure Monitoring system is not a substitute for proper tire • Winter tires wear more quickly on dry maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi- roads in warm weather. They should be System (TPMS) – general information (p. 307). bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if removed when the winter driving season under-inflation has not reached the level to has ended. Introduction trigger illumination of the system's low tire • Studded tires should be run-in 300 – Each tire, including the spare (if provided), pressure telltale. 600 miles (500 – 1000 km) during which should be checked monthly when cold and Your vehicle has also been equipped with a the vehicle should be driven as smoothly inflated to the inflation pressure recom- as possible to give the studs the opportu- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the the system is not operating properly. The nity to seat properly in the tires. The tires vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. should have the same rotational direction monitoring system's malfunction indicator is (If your vehicle has tires of a different size combined with the low tire pressure telltale. throughout their entire lifetime. than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should When the system detects a malfunction, the NOTE determine the proper tire inflation pressure for telltale will flash for approximately one minute Please consult state or provincial regula- those tires.) and then remain continuously illuminated. tions restricting the use of studded winter This sequence will continue upon subsequent tires before installing such tires. vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

5 Where permitted

306 09 Wheels and tires

09 exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu- Tire Pressure Monitoring System NOTE minated, the system may not be able to (TPMS) – general information detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves tire pressure warning light will flash for System malfunctions may occur for a variety to check inflation pressure levels. When the approximately 1 minute and then remain of reasons, including the installation of vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately illuminated. Tire press. syst Service replacement or alternate tires or wheels on 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors required will be displayed. the vehicle that prevent the tire pressure transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver monitoring system from functioning properly. located in the vehicle. Related information Always check the system's malfunction tell- NOTE • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) tale after replacing one or more tires or – recalibrating (p. 309) wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the USA – FCC ID: KR5S180052050 • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) replacement or alternate tires and wheels This device complies with part 15 of the – messages (p. 310) allow the system to continue to function FCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol- • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) properly. lowing conditions: (1) This device may not – activating/deactivating (p. 309) cause harmful interference, and (2) this • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) NOTE device must accept any interference received, including interference that may – changing wheels (p. 308) The system indicates low tire pressure but cause undesired operation. does not replace normal tire maintenance. For information on correct tire pressure, When low inflation pressure is detected or if a please refer to the tire inflation pressure table (see Tire inflation – pressure table sensor is not functioning properly, TPMS will (p. 301)), the tire inflation pressure placard light up the tire pressure warning light ( ) located on the driver's side B-pillar (the (also referred to as a telltale) in the instrument structural member at the side of the vehi- panel and will display one of the following cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- messages: Tire pressure low, Tire needs ing) or consult your Volvo retailer. air now or Tire press. syst Service required. WARNING Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle.

307 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire Pressure Monitoring System CAUTION Related information (TPMS) – changing wheels • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, – general information (p. 307) Please keep the following in mind when press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) changing or replacing the factory installed otherwise damaging the valve. – recalibrating (p. 309) TPMS wheels/tires on the vehicle: • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Not all aftermarket wheels are equipped • CAUTION – messages (p. 310) with TPMS sensors in the valves. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) • If the vehicle is equipped with a tempo- • After inflating the tires, always reinstall – activating/deactivating (p. 309) rary spare tire, this tire does not have a the valve cap to help avoid damage to TPMS sensor. the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • If wheels without TPMS sensors are • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal mounted on the vehicle, a text message caps could corrode and become diffi- will displayed in the instrument panel cult to remove. each time the vehicle is driven above 20 mph (30 km/h) for 10 minutes or more. NOTE • Once TPMS sensors are properly installed, the warning message should not • If you change to tires with a different reappear. If the message is still displayed, dimension than the factory-installed drive the vehicle for several minutes at a ones, the TPMS system must be speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster to reconfigured for these tires. This must erase the message. be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors be fitted on all wheels used on the vehi- • If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sen- cle, including winter tires. Volvo does not sor is moved to another wheel, the recommend moving sensors back and sensor's seal, nut, and valve core forth between sets of wheels. should be replaced. • When installing TPMS sensors, the vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a TPMS error message will be displayed.

308 09 Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitoring System 5. Drive the vehicle at a speed above Tire Pressure Monitoring System 09 (TPMS) – recalibrating 20 mph (30 km/h) continuously for at (TPMS) – activating/deactivating In certain cases, it may be necessary to recali- least 10 minutes. brate TPMS to conform to Volvo's recom- > Calibration is done automatically once Activating/deactivating TPMS mended tire inflation pressures (see the infla- initiated by the driver and the system (Canadian models only) tion pressure table in Tire inflation – pressure does not give any confirmation when 1. Switch off the engine. table (p. 301)), for example, if higher inflation calibration is finished. 2. Put the ignition in mode I or II (see Igni- pressure is necessary when transporting The new pressures are used until step 1-5 tion modes (p. 79) for additional informa- heavy loads, etc. above are repeated. tion). Recalibrating TPMS (Canadian models Related information 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center con- only)* • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sole control panel and select Settings This is done in the vehicle's menu system. – general information (p. 307) Car settings Tire pressure To recalibrate: • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 4. Select Tire monitoring and press OK/ – messages (p. 310) 1. Switch off the engine. MENU to turn the system on or off. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure – activating/deactivating (p. 309) Related information and put the ignition in mode I or II (see Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) • Ignition modes (p. 79) for additional infor- • – general information (p. 307) – changing wheels (p. 308) mation). • My Car – introduction (p. 76) 3. Press the MY CAR key in the center console control panel and select Settings Car settings Tire pressure. 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire pressure and press OK/MENU again.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 309 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire Pressure Monitoring System NOTE CAUTION (TPMS) – messages • Tire monitoring systems use a tem- • After inflating the tires, always reinstall Erasing warning messages perature compensated pressure value. the valve cap to help avoid damage to When a low tire pressure warning message This pressure value is dependent on the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. tire temperature and ambient tempera- has been displayed and the tire pressure • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal ture, which can differ from the recom- warning light in the instrument panell ( ) caps could corrode and become diffi- mended cold tire pressure in the tire cult to remove. has come on: inflation table and on the tire pressure 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the placard located on the driver's side B- inflation pressure of all four tires. pillar (the structural member at the WARNING side of the vehicle, at the rear of the 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pres- driver's door opening). This means • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead sure (consult the tire pressure placard that it may sometimes be necessary to to tire failure, resulting in a loss of con- located on the driver's side B-pillar (the inflate them slightly above the recom- trol of the vehicle. structural member at the side of the vehi- mended cold pressure value • Tire monitoring systems cannot indi- cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- (approx. 3-4 psi or 0.2-0.3 bar) in order cate sudden tire damage caused by ing) or the inflation pressure table, see to reset a low tire pressure warning. external factors (e.g., a blowout) in Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301). • To help avoid incorrect tire inflation advance. 3. In certain cases, it may be necessary to pressure, if possible only inflate the drive the vehicle for several minutes at a tires when they are cold. The tires are Related information speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster. This considered to be cold when they have • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will erase the warning text and the telltale the same temperature as the sur- – general information (p. 307) rounding (ambient) air. This tempera- will go out. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ture is normally reached after the vehi- • – recalibrating (p. 309) cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires – activating/deactivating (p. 309) are considered to be hot. • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) – changing wheels (p. 308) • Tire pressure monitoring - introduction (p. 306) • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301)

310 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire Monitor - introduction NOTE Calibrating Tire Monitor Tire Monitor uses the rotational speed of the In order for Tire Monitor to work correctly, tire If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tires in combination with signal analysis of the tire pressure warning light will flash for pressure reference values must be set. This ABS sensor signals to determine if they are approximately 1 minute and then remain must be done each time wheels or tire pres- properly inflated. illuminated. Tire press. syst Service sures are changed. required will be displayed. When a tire is under-inflated, its diameter Calibration (and consequently also its rotational speed) 1. Switch off the engine. changes. By comparing the individual tires NOTE 2. Inflate the tires to the desired pressure with each other it is possible to determine if The system indicates low tire pressure but (consult tire pressure placard located on one or more tires are under inflated. does not replace normal tire maintenance. the driver's side B-pillar (the structural When low inflation pressure is detected or if For information on correct tire pressure, member at the side of the vehicle) and please refer to the tire inflation pressure the system is not functioning properly, Tire put the ignition in mode II, see Ignition table (see Tire inflation – pressure table Monitor will light up the tire pressure warning (p. 301)), the tire inflation pressure placard modes (p. 79). light ( ) (also referred to as a telltale) in located on the driver's side B-pillar (the 3. Press the MY CAR button on the center the instrument panel and will display one of structural member at the side of the vehi- console control panel and select Settings the following messages in the text window, cle, at the rear of the driver's door open- Car settings Tire monitoring. for example: Tire pressure low Check rear ing) or consult your Volvo retailer. right tire6 or Tire press. syst Service 4. Press OK/MENU, select Calibrate tire required. Related information pressure and press OK/MENU again. Tire pressure monitoring - introduction If two or more tires have low pressure or if the • 5. Drive away. (p. 306) system cannot determine which tire has low > The calibration process will be comple- pressure, a general text (Tire pressure low ted while driving and will be interrupted Check tires) will be displayed. if the vehicle is parked and the engine is switched off. Calibration continues automatically when driving resumes. The system will not give any confirmation when calibration is finished although it will state if calibration fails.

6 That last part of this message varies, depending on the tire(s) effected. }} 311 09 Wheels and tires

09 The new reference values will be used until Tire Monitor status information the system is temporarily unavailable. It steps 1-5 stated above are repeated. The current status of the system and the tires should become operational again shortly. is indicated by color-coded graphics. Related information NOTE This status can be displayed by pressing the • Tire Monitor – messages (p. 313) Always remember to calibrate Tire Monitor MY CAR button on the center console and when the wheels have been changed or the tire pressure has been corrected going to Settings Car settings Tire according to tire pressure placard or tire monitoring. pressure table. If correct reference values The following color-coded graphics indicate: have not been set, the system cannot issue low tire pressure alerts correctly. • All green: the system is operational and all tire pressures are at or above the recommended levels. • One yellow wheel: the tire indicated is under-inflated. • All wheels yellow: two or more tires are under-inflated • All wheels gray: the system is currently unavailable. It might be necessary to drive at a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes for the system to become operational. • All wheels gray in combination with the message Tire press. syst Service required and the telltale in the instrument panel ( ) is illuminated: the system is not functioning correctly. Have it checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • All wheels gray in combination with the message Tire press. syst currently unavailable and the telltale in the instrument panel ( ) is illuminated:

312 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire Monitor – messages NOTE Related information When low tire pressure has been detected, a • Tire Monitor – messages (p. 313) To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pres- message will be displayed and the tire pressure, only inflate the tires when they are • Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 298) sure warning telltale in the instrument panel cold. The tires are considered to be cold • Tire inflation – pressure table (p. 301) will illuminate. when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This tem- Erasing warning messages perature is normally reached after the vehi- To erase a low tire pressure message and cle has been parked for at least 3 hours. turn off the telltale: After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the be hot. inflation pressure of all four tires (see the article "Tire inflation – checking pressure"). CAUTION 2. Re-inflate the tires to the correct pressure • After inflating the tires, always reinstall (consult the tire pressure placard located the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal rear of the driver's door opening) or the caps could corrode and become diffi- inflation pressure table, see Tire inflation – cult to remove. pressure table (p. 301). 3. Recalibrate Tire Monitor, see Calibrating WARNING Tire Monitor (p. 311). • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. • Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate sudden tire damage caused by external factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance.

313 09 Wheels and tires

09 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST) WARNING Tire sealing system* – general Self-supporting run flat tires are available as information SST tires should only be mounted by optional equipment on certain models. • Certain models are equipped with a tire service technicians who are familiar with tires of this type. sealing system* that enables you to tempo- The vehicle must be equipped with one of the rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re- tire pressure monitoring systems if tires of • SST tires may only be mounted on inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation this type are installed. vehicles equipped with a tire pressure pressure. monitoring system. Tires of this type have specially reinforced sidewalls that make it possible to continue • Do not drive faster than 50 mph driving to a limited extent even though the tire (80 km/h) if the monitoring system indi- has lost some or all of its inflation pressure. cates that a tire has lost inflation pres- These tires are mounted on special rims (nor- sure. mal tires can also be mounted on these rims). • Do not drive farther than 50 miles (80 km) before replacing a damaged If an SST tire loses inflation pressure, the yel- SST tire. low TPMS symbol illuminates in the instrument panel and a text message is also dis- • Drive carefully and avoid e.g., hard played. If this happens, reduce speed to not braking or fast turns. more than 50 mph (80 km/h). The tire should • SST tires must be replaced if they are be replaced as soon as possible. damaged. A tire of this type cannot be repaired. Introduction Related information The tire sealing system consists of an air • Tire pressure monitoring - introduction compressor, a container for the sealing com- (p. 306) pound, wiring to connect the system to the vehicle’s electrical system via one of the 12- volt sockets, and a hose used to connect the system to the tire’s inflation valve.

NOTE The tire sealing system's compressor has been tested and approved by Volvo.

314 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

09 The 12-volt sockets are located in the front WARNING Tire sealing system–temporarily tunnel console, on the rear side of the center repairing a flat tire console in the rear seat and in the cargo • After using the tire sealing system, the area*. vehicle should not be driven farther than approximately 120 miles (200 Accessing the tire sealing system km). The tire sealing system is stowed under the • Have the tire inspected by a trained floor of the cargo area. To access it: and qualified Volvo service technician 1. Lift the floor hatch in the cargo area. as soon as possible to determine if it can be permanently repaired or must 2. Lift out the tire sealing system. be replaced. • The vehicle should not be driven faster NOTE than 50 mph (80 km/h) while using a • The tire sealing system is only tire that has been temporarily repaired intended to seal holes on the tire’s with the tire sealing system. tread area, not the sidewall. • After using the tire sealing system, • Tires with large holes or tears cannot drive carefully and avoid abrupt steer- be repaired with the tire sealing sys- ing maneuvers and sudden stops. tem. • After use, stow the tire sealing system properly to help prevent rattling.

Temporarily repairing a flat tire is done in two stages: • Stage 1: The hole is sealed by pumping sealing compound into the tire. The car is then driven a short distance to distribute the sealing compound in the tire.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 NOTE Tire sealing system* – overview Bottle with sealing compound Certain models are equipped with a tire Do not remove any foreign objects (nails, Air pressure gauge etc.) from the tire before using the sealing sealing system* that enables you to tempo- system. rarily seal a hole in the tread surface and re- inflate a flat tire, or to adjust a tire’s inflation pressure. • Stage 2: The tire’s inflation pressure is checked and adjusted if necessary.

WARNING • Never leave the tire sealing system unattended when it is operating. • Keep the tire sealing system away from children. • Be sure the vehicle is parked safely off the road and away from moving traffic. • Apply the parking brake.

Related information Speed limit sticker (on the rear side of the • Tire sealing system* – overview (p. 316) compressor) • Tire sealing system* – inflating tires On/Off switch (p. 320) Electrical wire • Tire sealing system* – sealing compound container (p. 321) Bottle holder (orange cover) • Tire sealing system* – sealing hole (p. 317) Protective hose cover • Tire sealing system – checking inflation Air release knob pressure (p. 319) Hose • Tunnel console – 12-volt sockets (p. 140) • 12-volt socket in the cargo area* (p. 141)

316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

09 WARNING • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting Tire sealing system* – sealing hole unless directed to do so by medical The tire sealing system can be used to tem- Please keep the following points in mind personnel. Get medical attention. when using the tire sealing system: porarily seal a hole in the tread surface of a • Disposal: Dispose of this material and tire. • The sealing compound bottle (no. 8 in its container to a hazardous or special the illustration) contains 1) rubber waste collection point. Stage 1: Sealing the hole latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These 1. Peel off the speed limit sticker and affix it substances are harmful if swallowed. to the steering wheel hub where it will be NOTE • The contents of this bottle may cause clearly visible to the driver. allergic skin reactions or otherwise be Do not break the seal on the bottle. This 2. Ensure that the on/off switch is in posi- potentially harmful to the respiratory occurs automatically when the bottle is tion 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be tract, the skin, the central nervous sys- screwed into the holder. pressed down). tem, and the eyes. Precautions: Related information WARNING • Keep out of reach of children. • Tire sealing system* – general information (p. 314) Contact with the sealing compound may • Do not ingest the contents. cause skin irritation. If contact occurs, Tire sealing system* – inflating tires Avoid prolonged or repeated contact • wash the affected area immediately with • (p. 320) with the skin. soap and water. • Tire sealing system – checking inflation • Wash thoroughly after handling. pressure (p. 319) 3. Unscrew the orange cover over the bottle First aid: • Tire sealing system* – sealing hole holder and unscrew the cap on the bottle • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with (p. 317) of sealing compound. soap and water. Get medical attention • Tire sealing system* – sealing compound if symptoms occur. container (p. 321) NOTE • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting Do not break the seal on the bottle. This occurs automatically when the bottle is the upper and lower eyelids. Get medi- screwed into the holder. cal attention if symptoms occur. Inhalation: Move the exposed person • 4. Screw the bottle into the bottle holder. to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention.

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 09 Wheels and tires

|| 09 WARNING WARNING WARNING The bottle is equipped with a catch to The vehicle´s engine should be running • Never stand next to the tire being infla- keep it securely in place and help prevent when the tire sealing system is used to ted when the compressor is in opera- sealing compound leakage. Once in place, avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the tion. the bottle cannot be unscrewed. This must vehicle is parked in a well ventilated place, be done by a trained and qualified Volvo or outdoors, before using the system. • If cracks, bubbles, etc. form on the tire, service technician. switch off the compressor immediately. If there is visible damage to the sidewall 8. Start the tire sealing system’s compres- • or the rim, the tire cannot be repaired. 5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s sor by pressing the on/off switch to posi- The vehicle should not be driven if this inflation valve and screw the tire sealing tion I. occurs. Contact a towing service or system’s hose connector onto the valve Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance if as tightly as possible by hand. applicable. 6. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest 12-volt socket in the vehicle. NOTE NOTE The air pressure gauge will temporarily show an increase in pressure to approxi- Be sure that none of the other 12-volt mately 88 psi (6 bar) while the sealing sockets is being used while the compres- compound is being pumped into the tire. sor is in operation. The pressure should return to a normal level after approximately 30 seconds. 7. Start the vehicle’s engine. 9. Within seven minutes, inflate the tire to between 22—44 psi (1.8—3.0 bar). Switch off the compressor briefly to get a clear reading from the pressure gauge.

318 09 Wheels and tires

09 CAUTION CAUTION Tire sealing system – checking inflation pressure The compressor should not be used for If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), the The tire sealing system can also be used to overheating. use of the sealing compound may lead to check the tires' inflation pressure. incorrect tire pressure readings or in rare cases, damage to the tire pressure sensor. Stage 2: Checking inflation pressure WARNING Use the tire sealing system to check and 1. Connect the tire sealing system as adjust the damaged tire's inflation pres- described in stage 1, see Tire sealing If the pressure remains below 22 psi sure. (1.8 bar) after approximately seven system* – sealing hole (p. 317). minutes, turn off the compressor. In this 2. Refer to the inflation pressure table in this case, the hole is too large to be sealed and NOTE chapter for the correct inflation pressure. the vehicle should not be driven. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the Safely stow the tire sealing system in a • tire sealing system’s compressor. If nec- convenient place as it will soon be 10. Switch off the compressor and discon- used again to check the tire’s inflation essary, release air from the tire by turning nect the electrical wire from the 12-volt pressure. the air release knob counterclockwise. socket. • The empty bottle of sealing compound CAUTION 11. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation cannot be removed from the bottle valve and reinstall the valve cap. holder. Consult a trained and qualified The compressor should not be used for Volvo service technician to have the more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid CAUTION bottle removed and properly disposed overheating. of. • After inflating the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to WARNING the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. WARNING If you interrupt your trip for more than 1 • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps If heavy vibrations, unsteady steering hour, check the inflation pressure in the could corrode and become difficult to behavior, or noises should occur while damaged tire again before continuing. remove. driving, reduce speed and park the vehicle in a safe place. Recheck the tire for 12. Immediately drive the vehicle for approxi- bumps, cracks, or other visible damage, and recheck its inflation pressure. If the mately 2 miles (3 km) at a maximum pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) to distribute continue driving. Have the vehicle towed the sealing compound in the tire. to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319 09 Wheels and tires

09 Tire sealing system* – inflating tires WARNING CAUTION The tire sealing system can be used to inflate The vehicle’s engine should be running The compressor should not be used for the tires. • when the tire sealing system is used to more than 10 minutes at a time to avoid overheating. To do so: avoid battery drain. Therefore, be sure the vehicle is parked in a well ventilated 1. Park the car in a safe place. place, or outdoors, before using the 9. Turn off the compressor (press the on/off 2. The compressor should be switched off. system. The parking brake should be switch to position 0) when the correct Ensure that the on/off switch is in position securely applied and the gear selector inflation pressure has been reached. should be in the P (park) position. 0 (the 0 side of the switch should be 10. Unscrew the hose from the tire’s inflation Children should never be left unatten- pressed down). • valve and reinstall the valve cap. ded in the vehicle when the engine is 3. Take out the electrical wire and hose. running. CAUTION 4. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s inflation valve and screw the hose con- 7. Check the tire’s inflation pressure on the • After inflating the tires, always reinstall nector onto the valve as tightly as possi- gauge. Switch off the compressor briefly the valve cap to help avoid damage to ble by hand. to get a clear reading from the pressure the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. gauge. Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps 5. Connect the electrical wire to the nearest • 8. Refer to the tire inflation table in this could corrode and become difficult to 12-volt socket in the vehicle. remove. chapter for the correct inflation pressure. 6. Start the vehicle’s engine. If the tire needs to be inflated, start the tire sealing system’s compressor (press 11. Disconnect the electrical wire from the the on/off switch to position I). If neces- 12-volt socket. sary, release air from the tire by turning the air release knob counterclockwise.

320 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 09 Wheels and tires

Tire sealing system* – sealing 09 compound container The sealing compound container must be replaced if the tire sealing system has been used to repair a tire or if the container’s expi- ration date has passed (see the date on decal). Replacing the sealing compound container

NOTE • After use, the sealing compound bottle, the hose, and certain other system components must be replaced. Please consult your Volvo retailer for replacement parts. • If the sealing compound bottle’s expi- ration date has passed, please take it to a Volvo retailer or a recycling station that can properly dispose of harmful substances.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – introduction performed anytime a malfunction is observed Periodic maintenance helps minimize Periodic maintenance will help keep your or suspected. emissions vehicle running well. Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada In accordance with applicable U.S. and NOTE Introduction Canadian regulations, the following list of 10 • Refer to your Warranty and Service The maintenance services contain several warranties is provided. checks that require special instruments and Records Information booklet for a tools and therefore must be performed by a • New Vehicle Limited Warranty comprehensive service and mainte- qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in • Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty nance schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km). This program contains top condition, specify time-tested and proven • Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. inspections and services necessary for • Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint the proper function of your vehicle and The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. Systems Limited Warranty includes components that affect vehi- The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle • Emission Design and Defect Warranty cle emissions. manufacturers to furnish written instructions • Emission Performance Warranty • The Warranty and Service Records to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper Information booklet also contains servicing and function of the components that These are the federal warranties; other war- detailed information concerning the control emissions. These services, which are ranties are provided as required by state/ warranties that apply to your vehicle. listed in the "Warranty and Service Records provincial law. Refer to your separate War- ranty and Service Records Information book- Information" booklet, are not covered by the Related information warranty. You will be required to pay for labor let for detailed information concerning each Climate – general information (p. 125) and material used. of the warranties. • Maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be

323 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – owner maintenance of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by Periodic maintenance requirements and inter- salt residues. vals are described in your vehicle's Warranty Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents and Service Records Information booklet. at the base of the windshield, and from other 10 The following points can be carried out places where they may collect. between the normally scheduled maintenance services. NOTE Owner maintenance Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase Each time the car is refueled: or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. • Check the engine oil level. • Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, Related information headlights, and taillights. • Maintenance – opening/closing hood Monthly: (p. 328) • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. • Engine compartment – overview (p. 329) Inspect the tires for wear. • Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332) • Check that engine coolant and other fluid • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330) levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings. • Engine compartment – power steering fluid (p. 334) • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass cleaner and soft paper towels. • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 345) • Wipe driver information displays with a soft cloth. • Cleaning the interior (p. 363) • Visually inspect battery terminals for cor- • Washing the car (p. 361) rosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose • Tire inflation – checking pressure (p. 298) terminal connector, or a battery near the • Tires – tread wear indicator (p. 291) end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information. As needed: Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup

324 10 Maintenance and servicing

Maintenance – hoisting When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage lift must be positioned in the correct lifting points. 10 Hoisting the vehicle

If a garage jack is used to lift the vehicle, it Related information should be placed: • Changing a wheel – removing wheel Front: under either of the two reinforced (p. 292) areas under the front section of the vehicle, not under to jack attachment points (the outermost points shown in the illustration). Rear: Under the jack attachment points. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. Always use axle stands or similar structures.

325 10 Maintenance and servicing

Onboard Diagnostic System • If you had recent service that required Booking service and repairs OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized disconnecting the battery, OBD II diag- Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes set- engine management system. It stores diagnostic information may be incomplete ting up a time for service, maintenance and/or nostic information about your vehicle's emis- and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle repairs directly from the vehicle quick and that is not ready may fail inspection. 10 sion controls. It can light the Check Engine convenient. light (MIL) if it detects an emission control How can I prepare for my next OBD II "fault." A "fault" is a component or system emission inspection? Prerequisites that is not performing within an expected • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or • The owner (primary driver) must have a range. A fault may be permanent or tempo- was lit but went out without service, have valid Volvo ID. See Volvo ID (p. 21) for rary. OBD II will store a message about any your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, additional information. fault. serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. • The vehicle must be connected to the • If you recently had service for a lit Check Internet using a paired Bluetooth® cell Emission inspection readiness Engine light, or if you had service that phone. See your Sensus Infotainment How do states use OBD II for emission required disconnecting the battery, a supplement for information on pairing a inspections? period of driving is necessary to bring the cell phone. On models equipped with Volvo On Call (VOC)*, you can connect to Many states connect a computer directly to a OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. the Internet using your separate VOC vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can Two half-hour trips of mixed stop-and- go/highway driving are typically needed data plan. Refer to your separate Volvo then read "faults." In some states, this type of On Call manual. inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more test. • By default, the retailer where you pur- information on planning a trip. chased your vehicle will be your preferred How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with (primary) retailer/Volvo authorized work- inspection? your vehicle's maintenance schedule. shop who will perform service and repairs Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspec- on your vehicle. To change the preferred tion for any of the following reasons. retailer, go to Dealer Locator at volvocars.com and select a retailer, click If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your • on Service Scheduler and book an vehicle may fail inspection. appointment at the new preferred retailer. If your vehicle's Check Engine light was • In order to be guided through the on- lit, but went out without any action on • screen steps, the menu alternative your part, OBD II will still have a recorded Display notifications must be activated. fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in CSB menu access your area. Once the prerequisites have been established, all CSB-related menus can be

326 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU On-screen service messages vehicle's instrument panel will also be and then selecting Maintenance & repair. turned off remotely by Volvo. No: No other messages will be displayed Booking information and data from the • on the Sensus screen but the Service vehicle Reminder Light on the vehicle's instru- 10 If you request an appointment from your vehi- ment panel will stay on. If you have cle, with your consent, booking information answered "No", service can still be and data about your vehicle1 will be transmit- booked manually (see the following sec- ted to your preferred retailer. tion). Using the service • Postpone: The pop-up menu will be displayed that next time the engine is Once the prerequisites have been estab- started. lished, all CSB-related menus can be accessed in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU Booking service or repairs manually On-screen service message and then selecting Maintenance & repair. Access your Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler The pop-up service alert menu offers the fol- portal from a smartphone or a computer to If the time for the next regularly scheduled lowing alternatives: select a day and time that suits you and service is approaching, if the vehicle requires specify any other service requests that you Yes: The vehicle will transmit a booking certain types of repairs or if a system needs • may have. When you have submitted your request as well as vehicle data directly to to be checked, a message will be displayed. request, it will be entered into the retailer's your preferred retailer. In return, you will You will then by guided through the steps booking portal and you will receive immediate required to book service or repairs. receive an email from this retailer with a link to their booking portal. From a smart- confirmation online and via email. phone or a computer, you can select a day and time that suits you and specify My Appointments any other service requests that you may This displays booking information. have. When you have submitted your request, it will be entered into the retail- – Select Maintenance & repair My er's booking portal and you will receive Appointments. immediate confirmation online and via email. The service reminder light in the Transmitting vehicle data In order for a retailer to access vehicle data, the information is initially sent to a central Volvo database (not directly to your retailer)

1 This information includes: service requirements, status of various functions, odometer reading and the vehicle's VIN number and software version. }} 327 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| where any retailer can access or search for Maintenance – opening/closing hood WARNING this information using your vehicle's VIN num- The hood is opened by first releasing the lock ber. This number can be found in your war- Check that the hood locks properly when from the passenger compartment and then closed. ranty booklet or on the dashboard at the pressing the release control. 10 lower left corner of the windshield. Opening and closing the hood Related information – Maintenance & repair Send Select • Maintenance – owner maintenance vehicle data. (p. 324) Booking information and vehicle data • Engine compartment – overview (p. 329) When you opt to book service from your vehicle, booking information and vehicle data will be transmitted. Vehicle data consists of a number of parameters in the following areas: • Service requirements • Function status • Fluid levels • Odometer reading (mileage) • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • The vehicle's software version Related information • Volvo ID (p. 21) G031911

Pull the lever located under the left side of the dash to release the hood lock. An information symbol will illuminate when the hood is open. Lift the hood slightly. Press the release control (located under the right front edge of the hood) to the left, and lift the hood.

328 10 Maintenance and servicing

Engine compartment – overview WARNING The overview shows the main inspection The cooling fan (located at the front of the points in the engine compartment. engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been 10 switched off.

WARNING Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in Engine compartment - 4-cylinder engines only mode 0, see Ignition modes (p. 79)) and there should be no remote keys in the pas- Filler cap-engine oil senger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the Coolant expansion tank engine has been running, wait until it has Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment. Power steering fluid reservoir Radiator The distributor ignition system operates at Dipstick-engine oil very high voltages. Special safety precau- Brake fluid reservoir tions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when: Filler cap-engine oil Battery Replacing distributor ignition compo- Cover over brake fluid reservoir • Relay/fuse box nents e.g. plugs, coil, etc. Battery Washer fluid reservoir • Do not touch any part of the distributor ignition system while the engine is run- Relay/fuse box Air cleaner ning. This may result in unintended movements and body injury. Washer fluid reservoir The appearance of the engine compartment may vary depending on engine model.

}} 329 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Related information Engine compartment – engine oil CAUTION • Maintenance – opening/closing hood The correct oil must be used for the stated oil Not checking the oil level regularly can (p. 328) change (service) intervals to apply. • result in serious engine damage if the • Maintenance – owner maintenance The oil level on 4-cylinder engines is checked oil level becomes too low. 10 (p. 324) electronically and is checked using a dipstick • Oil that is lower than the specified on 5- and 6-cylinder engines. quality can damage the engine. Checking the engine oil (5- and 6- • Volvo does not recommend the use of cylinder engines) oil additives. The oil level should be checked at regular • Always add oil of the same type and intervals, particularly during the period up to viscosity as already used. the first scheduled maintenance service. • Never fill oil above the MAX mark. This • See Oil specifications (p. 377) for oil could cause an increase in oil con- specifications. sumption. • Also, refer to the Warranty and Service • Oil changes should be carried out by a Records information booklet for informa- trained and qualified Volvo service tion on oil change intervals and oil speci- technician. fications.

330 10 Maintenance and servicing

Checking and adding oil Electronic oil level sensor (4-cylinder engines only)

10 G021737

The oil level must be between the MIN and MAX Location of the filler cap and dipstick marks on the dipstick Checking the oil Oil filler cap NOTE 1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a No action is necessary until a message is dis- lint-free rag. Before checking the oil: played, see the following illustration. • The car should be parked on a level 2. Reinsert the dipstick, pull it out, and surface. check the oil level. The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. • If the engine is warm, wait for at least 10 – 15 minutes after the engine has 3. Add oil if necessary. If the level is close to been switched off. the MIN mark, add approximately 0.5 US quarts (0.5 liters) of oil. 4. Recheck the level and add more oil if necessary until the level is near the MAX mark.

WARNING Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces.

}} 331 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| WARNING Engine compartment – coolant Normally, the coolant does not need to be Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces. changed. If the system must be drained, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service tech- 10 nician. Electronically checking the oil level The oil level should be checked at regular Level check and filling intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. To check the oil level: 1. Activate ignition mode II, see Ignition Left: digital instrument panel*, Right: analog modes (p. 79). instrument panel 2. Turn the thumb wheel on the left steering Message wheel lever until Oil level is displayed. Oil level > The oil level will be displayed. The oil level can be checked when the engine NOTE is not running by scrolling to the oil level sensor using the thumb wheel on the left steering • The system cannot detect changes in Location of the coolant reservoir wheel lever. the oil level immediately. The vehicle See Fuel tank volume – specification and vol- must be driven approximately 20 miles ume (p. 380) for information on cooling sys- (30 km) or have been parked on level tem capacities. CAUTION ground with the engine off for • If Oil service required is displayed, 5 minutes before the oil level reading the oil level may be too high. Take the will be correct. vehicle to an authorized Volvo work- • If the necessary conditions are not met shop as soon as possible. for checking the oil level electronically • If the oil level sensor indicates that the (time interval after the engine was level is too low, using the correct oil, switched off, if the vehicle is parked on top up with the amount of oil indicated an incline, etc.), No values available as soon as possible, see oil specifica- will be displayed. This does not indi- tions (p. 377). cate a problem with the oil level sensor.

332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION WARNING Engine compartment – brake fluid The brake fluid should always be between the If necessary, top up the cooling sys- Never remove the expansion tank cap • • MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- tem with Volvo Genuine Coolant/Anti- while the engine is warm. Wait until the ervoir. freeze only (a 50/50 mix of water and engine cools. 10 antifreeze). • If it is necessary to top off the coolant • Different types of antifreeze/coolant when the engine is warm, unscrew the may not be mixed. expansion tank cap slowly so that the • If the cooling system is drained, it overpressure dissipates. should be flushed with clean water or premixed anti-freeze before it is refilled with the correct mixture of water/antifreeze. • The cooling system must always be kept filled to the correct level, and the level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. If it is not kept filled, there can be high local temperatures in the Location of the brake fluid reservoir engine which could result in damage. Check coolant regularly! • Do not top up with water only. This reduces the rust-protective and antifreeze qualities of the coolant and has a lower boiling point. It can also cause damage to the cooling system if it should freeze. • Do not use chlorinated tap water in the vehicle's cooling system.

}} 333 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Checking the level WARNING Engine compartment – power steering The fluid reservoir is concealed under the fluid • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark round cover at the rear of the engine com- The fluid level must be between the MIN and in the reservoir or if a brake-related partment. The round cover must be removed MAX message is shown in the information marks. For capacities and recom- 10 first before the reservoir cap can be display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the car mended fluid grade, see Fuel tank volume – accessed. towed to a trained and qualified Volvo specification and volume (p. 380). The brake fluid should always be between the service technician and have the brake MIN and MAX marks on the inside of the res- system inspected. ervoir. Check, without removing the cap, that • Dot 4 should never be mixed with any there is sufficient fluid in the reservoir. other type of brake fluid. Fluid type: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (280 °C), P/N 9437433 Filling 1. Turn and open the cover. Replace: The fluid should be replaced according to the intervals specified in the 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the Warranty and Service Records Information fluid. The level must be between the MIN booklet. and MAX marks. When driving under extremely hard conditions (mountain driving, etc), it may be neces- Check the level frequently. It does not nor- sary to replace the fluid more often. Consult a mally require changing. trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Always entrust brake fluid changing to a WARNING trained and qualified Volvo service technician. If a problem should occur in the power steering system or if the vehicle has no electrical current and must be towed, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. However, keep in mind that greater effort will be required to turn the steering wheel.

334 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION Bulbs – introduction NOTE Certain bulbs can be replaced by the vehicle's Keep the area around the power steering For information regarding any bulbs owner. However, the bulbs on the following • fluid reservoir clean when checking. not mentioned in this section, please list should only be replaced by a trained and contact your Volvo retailer or a trained 10 qualified Volvo service technician. and authorized Volvo service techni- All bulb specifications are listed in Bulbs – cian. specifications (p. 342). • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. • Active Bending Lights • If an error message remains in the dis- Daytime running lights, front parking • play after a faulty bulb has been lights replaced, contact an authorized Volvo • Front side marker lights workshop. • Turn signals in the door mirrors • Condensation may form temporarily on • Approach lighting in the door mirrors the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or Interior lighting (except for the front foot- • taillights. This is normal and the lights well lighting) are designed to withstand moisture. • Rear parking lights Normally, condensation will dissipate • Rear side marker lights after the lights have been on for a short time. • Rear turn signals The optional Active Bending Light LED bulbs • • bulbs contain trace amounts of mer- cury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician.

}} 335 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| CAUTION Bulbs – headlight housing Unplug the wiring connector by holding The entire headlight housing must be lifted down the clip with your thumb. Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers out when replacing all front bulbs. Pull the connector out with the other vaporize in the heat and will leave a hand. 10 Removing the headlight housing deposit on the reflector, which will damage 5. Lift out the headlight housing and place it it. on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. WARNING 6. Replace the defective bulb(s). • The engine should not be running Reinserting the headlight housing when changing bulbs. • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compart- Pull out the headlight housing's locking ment will be hot. pins. Pull the headlight housing straight out. WARNING • Active Bending Lights* – due to the high voltage used by these headlights, these bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. When reinserting the housing, be sure that • Turn off the lights and remove the the long locking pin is securely in place in remote key from the ignition before both of its retaining clamps. changing any bulbs. 1. Plug in the connector until it clicks into place. Related information CAUTION • Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336) When disconnecting the connector, pull on • Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting (p. 342) the connector itself and not on the wiring. • Bulbs – cargo area lighting (p. 341) • Bulbs – license plate lighting (p. 341)

336 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

2. Reinsert the headlight housing and lock- Bulbs – cover Related information ing pins. Check that they are correctly The larger cover has to be removed in order • Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336) inserted. to change the high/low beam headlight bulbs. • Bulbs – low beam, Halogen (p. 338) The headlight housing must be properly Removing the cover to access the bulbs • Bulbs – high beam, Halogen (p. 338) in place and the wiring connector cor- 10 • Bulbs – extra high beam (p. 339) rectly reconnected before the lighting is switched on or the remote key is inserted into the ignition slot. 3. Check that the lights function properly. Related information • Bulbs – introduction (p. 335) • Bulbs – cover (p. 337) • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

NOTE Before starting to replace a bulb, see Bulbs – introduction (p. 335).

1. Loosen the cover's four retaining screws (3-4 turns) with a Torx T20 tool (1). The screws should not be removed completely. 2. Push the cover to the side. 3. Remove the cover. Reinstall the cover in the reverse order.

337 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – low beam, Halogen Bulbs – high beam, Halogen Related information The low beam bulb is concealed by the larger The high beam bulb is concealed behind the • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) cover. larger cover.

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336)). (p. 336)). 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see Bulbs – cover (p. 337)). Bulbs – cover (p. 337)). 3. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing the holder downward. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Press the new bulb into the socket until it 5. Press the new bulb into the socket and snaps into place. It can only be secured turn it clockwise to put it in place. It can in one position. only be secured in one position. 6. Put the cover back into position and rein- 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight stall the headlight housing. housing. Related information 7. Put the cover back into position and rein- • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) stall the headlight housing.

338 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – extra high beam 6. Press the bulb holder into position in the Bulbs – front turn signals The extra high beam bulb is concealed by the headlight housing. The turn signal bulb is concealed behind the larger cover. 7. Reconnect the wiring connector to the smaller cover. bulb holder. Extra high beam2 10 8. Put the cover back into position and reinstall the headlight housing. Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

1. Remove the headlight housing from the 1. Remove the headlight housing from the vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing vehicle (see Bulbs – headlight housing (p. 336)). (p. 336)). 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it 2. Remove the cover over the bulbs (see counterclockwise and pulling it out of the Bulbs – cover (p. 337)). headlight housing. 3. Disconnect the wiring connector from the 3. Pull out the holder to access the bulb. bulb holder. 4. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing 4. Remove the bulb holder from the head- it in slightly and turning it counterclock- light housing by pulling it straight out. wise. 5. Insert a new bulb in the holder. It can only 5. Press the new bulb into the holder and be inserted in one way. turn it clockwise.

2 Models with optional Active Bending Lights only. }} 339 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| 6. Reinsert the bulb holder into the headlight Bulbs – rear fog lights Bulbs – location of taillight bulbs housing and turn it clockwise. The rear fog lights can be reached from The following illustrations show the location of 7. Reinstall the headlight housing. behind the bumper the bulbs in the taillight cluster.

10 Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

Taillight lens, right side 1. Remove the bulb holder by turning it Parking/side marker lights (LED) counterclockwise. Brake light 2. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing it in and turning it counterclockwise. Backup light 3. Insert a new bulb, press it downward and Turn signal turn it clockwise. 4. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clock- Brake light (LED) wise. Related information Related information • Bulbs – introduction (p. 335) • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

340 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – brake lights and taillights Bulbs – license plate lighting Bulbs – cargo area lighting The brake lights and back-up lights in the tail- The license plate lighting is located next to The cargo area light is located in the ceiling light cluster are replaced from inside the the tailgate handle. liner. cargo area. 10 Brake lights and taillights G031942

1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the bulb housing comes loose. 2. Carefully detach the entire bulb housing 1. Open the panel. and pull it out. 2. Replace the bulb. 2. Remove the bulb holder by turning it 3. Replace the bulb. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press counterclockwise. it back into the bulb housing. 4. Reinsert the entire bulb housing and 3. Remove the burned out bulb by pressing tighten the screws. it in and turning it counterclockwise. Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) 4. Insert a new bulb, press it in and turn it Related information clockwise. • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) 5. Reinsert the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. Related information • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342) • Bulbs – location of taillight bulbs (p. 340)

341 10 Maintenance and servicing

Bulbs – vanity mirror lighting Bulbs – specifications Lighting func- Wat- Bulb The vanity mirror bulbs are located behind the The following bulbs can be replaced by the tion tage lens. vehicles owner. All other bulbs should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo Rear fog light 21 P21W LL 10 Removing the lens service technician. Backup lights 21 P21W LL

Lighting func- Wat- Bulb Brake lights 21 P21W LL tion tage Cargo area 10 SV8.5 Extra high beam 55 H7 LL lighting (length (models with 43mm) Active Bending Lights*) NOTE Low beam (hal- 55 H11 LL Please consult a Volvo retailer’s Parts ogen) department for the most up-to-date bulb specifications. High beam (hal- 65 H9 1. Insert a flat screwdriver under the lens ogen) Related information and carefully exert upward pressure to Front turn sig- 24 PY24W • Bulbs – introduction (p. 335) release the retaining lugs. nals 2. Snap out the lens. License plate 5 C5W LL 3. Use needle nose pliers to pull the bulb lighting straight to the side. Replace the bulb. Do not exert too much pressure on the bulb Vanity mirror 2 W2x4.6d with the pliers to help avoid damaging it. type T5 Reinstalling the lens Front side 5 W3W LL 1. Put the lens back into position. marker lights 2. Press it into place. Glove compart- 5 SV8.5 ment lighting (length Related information 43mm) • Bulbs – specifications (p. 342)

342 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – service position To put the windshiield wipers in the service Related information The windshield wiper blades must be in the position: • Engine compartment – washer fluid vertical (service) position for replacement, 1. Insert the remote key into the ignition (p. 345) washing or to lift them away from the wind- slot3 and press the START/STOP shield when e.g., removing ice or snow. ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition 10 in mode I (see Ignition modes (p. 79) for detailed information about the ignition modes). 2. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button again briefly to switch the ignition off. 3. Within 3 seconds, move the right steering wheel lever up and hold it for at least 1 second. > The wipers will then move to the vertical (service) position on the windshield. The wipers can be returned to the normal Wiper blades in service position position by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in CAUTION mode I (or by starting the engine). Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in position before attempting to move them CAUTION to the service position. If the wiper arms have been folded out from the windshield while in the service position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the normal position to help avoid scratching the paint on the hood.

3 Not necessary on vehicles with the optional keyless drive.

343 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – windshield With the wipers in the service position, The wiper blades should be replaced regularly fold out the wiper arm from the wind- for best effect. shield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper The windshield wiper blades must be in the 10 blade straight out, parallel with the wiper vertical (service) position for replacement, arm. washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. Replacing the windshield wiper blades Check that the blade is securely in place.

4. Press the wipers back against the windshield. To return the wipers from the service position to the normal position, fold the wipers back against the windshield and press the START/ STOP ENGINE button briefly to put the ignition in mode I (or start the engine). Cleaning Keeping the windshield and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the NOTE wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and The windshield wiper blades are different lukewarm soap solution or car washing deter- lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is gent. longer than the one on the passenger side. Related information • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 345) • Wiper blades – service position (p. 343)

344 10 Maintenance and servicing

Wiper blades – tailgate Engine compartment – washer fluid • 6.8 US qts (6.5 liters) The wiper blades should be replaced regularly Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and • 4.7 US qts (4.5 liters4) for best effect. headlights clean. During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield Related information Replacing the tailgate wiper blade washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use • Wiper blades – service position (p. 343) 10 Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalent with a recommended pH value between 6 and 8. G032770

1. Fold the wiper arm outward. 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the arrow). Location of the washer fluid reservoir 3. Pull out the blade to release it from the wiper arm. The windshield and headlight washers share 4. Press the new wiper blade into place and a common reservoir. check that it seats securely. The washer fluid reservoir is located on the 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tail- driver's side of the engine compartment. For gate window. capacities, see the printed Owner's Manual. Specification:Use a washer antifreeze rec- Related information ommended by Volvo, mixed with water. • Engine compartment – washer fluid (p. 345) Volume:

4 Models without headlight washers

345 10 Maintenance and servicing

Battery – symbols Contains corrosive acid. Battery – handling There are information and warning symbols The battery's service life is affected by the on the battery. number of starts, if it has been discharged, driving style, driving conditions, weather con- 10 Symbols on the battery ditions ,etc. Wear protective goggles. Handling Risk of explosion • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened. • Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running (for example, when replacing the battery). Keep away from children. • If the battery is fully discharged a number Recycle properly of times, this may shorten its service life. • The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as the number of starts, driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s Avoid smoking, open starting capacity. flames, and/or sparks. • Because the battery’s starting capacity NOTE decreases with time, it may be necessary A used battery should be disposed of in an to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven environmentally responsible manner. Con- for an extended period of time or if the sult your Volvo retailer or take the battery vehicle is usually only driven short dis- See the owner's manual. to a recycling station. tances. • Never use a quick charger to charge the Related information battery. Only traditional types of battery • Battery – changing (p. 348) chargers should be used. • Battery – handling (p. 346) • Battery – maintenance (p. 347)

346 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION Related information Battery – maintenance • Battery – changing (p. 348) Proper battery maintenance can help prolong The infotainment system's energy-saving feature may not function correctly or at all, • Battery – maintenance (p. 347) its service life. and/or a message may be displayed if a • Battery – symbols (p. 346) battery charger or jumper cables are not Maintenance 10 connected properly. • Use a screw driver to open the caps or cover and a flashlight to inspect the level. • The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a • If necessary, add distilled water. The level jumper cable or a battery charger. should never be above the indicator. Only the ground point on the chassis • The fluid level should be checked if the may be used. battery has been recharged. See Jump starting (p. 251) for an illustra- • After inspection, be sure the cap over tion and additional information. each battery cell or the cover is securely in place. WARNING • Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and properly tightened. Never expose the battery to open • Never disconnect the battery when the flame or electric spark. • engine is running, or when the key is in • Do not smoke near the battery. the ignition. This could damage the vehi- • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do cle's electrical system. not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, • The battery should be disconnected from skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If the vehicle when a battery charger is contact occurs, flush the affected area used directly on the battery. immediately with water. Obtain medi- To help keep the battery in good condi- cal help immediately if eyes are affec- • tion, the vehicle should be driven for at ted. least 15 minutes a week or connected to a charger with an automatic charging NOTE function. If the battery is fully discharged a number The life of the battery is shortened if it • becomes discharged repeatedly. of times, this may shorten its service life. Keeping the battery fully charged helps prolong its service life.

}} 347 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| • The service life of a battery is affected by Battery – changing factors such as driving conditions and cli- When changing batteries, be sure to use the mate. Extreme cold may also further correct battery for your vehicle. Consult a decrease the battery’s starting capacity. Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo 10 • Because the battery’s starting capacity service technician. decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven Changing for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances.

CAUTION • Always use distilled or deionized water (battery water). • Never fill above the level mark in the cell.

Related information • Battery – changing (p. 348) • Battery – handling (p. 346) • Battery – symbols (p. 346)

WARNING Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence.

348 10 Maintenance and servicing

Removal Installation Fuses – introduction Switch off the ignition, remove the remote key 1. Lower the battery into the battery box. The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical from the ignition slot and wait at least components from overloading. 5 minutes before disconnecting the battery so that all information in the vehicle's electrical There are relay/fuseboxes located in the 10 system can be stored in the control modules. engine compartment, the passenger compartment and the cargo area. Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. The easiest Release the rubber molding so that the way to see if a fuse is blown is to remove it. rear cover is free. To do so: Remove the rear cover by pulling it away. 2. Move the battery inward and to the side 1. Pull the fuse straight out. If a fuse is diffi- Detach the black negative cable. until it reaches the rear edge of the box. cult to remove, a special fuse removal tool is located on the inside of the 3. Tighten the clamp that secures the bat- Detach the red positive cable engine compartment fusebox cover. tery. Detach the ventilation hose from the 2. From the side, examine the curved metal 4. Connect the ventilation hose. battery wire in the fuse to see if it is intact. > Be sure that it is correctly connected Loosen the screw holding the battery to the battery and the vent in the vehi- If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the clamp. cle's body. same color and amperage (written on the fuse). Move the battery to the side and lift it up. 5. Connect the red positive cable. If fuses burn out repeatedly, have the electri- 6. Connect the black negative cable. cal system inspected by a trained and quali- WARNING 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). fied Volvo service technician. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! 8. Reinstall the molding. (See Removal). Battery posts, terminals, and related WARNING 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with accessories contain lead and lead com- Never use metal objects or fuses with the clips. (See Removal). pounds, chemicals known to the state of higher amperage than those stated on the California to cause cancer and reproduc- Related information following pages. Doing so could seriously tive harm. Wash hands after handling. damage or overload the vehicle's electrical • Battery – handling (p. 346) system. • Battery – symbols (p. 346)

}} 349 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Location of the fuseboxes

Engine compartment

Under the glove compartment

Cargo area

Engine compartment cold zone (Start/ Stop only)

350 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment protect e.g., engine and brake functions.

}} 351 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Engine compartment, upper Pos Function A Pos Function A

Engine compartment, front Circuit breaker: central 60 ABS valves 20 Engine compartment, lower electrical module in the 10 cargo compartmentA Headlight washers 20

Positions Circuit breaker: central 60 Active Bending Lights- 10 These fuses are all located in the engine com- electrical module headlight leveling* partment box. Fuses in C are located under under the glove com- A . partmentA Central electrical mod- 20 A decal on the inside of the cover shows the ule (under the glove positions of the fuses. Circuit breaker: central 60 compartment) electrical module • Fuses 1 – 15, 34 and 42 – 44 are relays/ under the glove com- ABS 5 circuit breakers and should only be partmentA removed or replaced by a trained and Adjustable steering 5 qualified Volvo service technician. – force* • Fuses 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 may be Engine Control Module 10 – changed at any time when necessary. (ECM), transmission, There is a special fuse removal tool on the Headed windshield*, 40 SRS underside of the cover. driver's side Heated washer noz- 10 Pos Function A Windshield wipers 30 zles* - Circuit breaker: central 50 – electrical module Lighting panel 5 under the glove com- Climate system 40 A partmentA blower - Headed windshield*, 40 Circuit breaker: central 50 - electrical module passenger's side under the glove com- - partment ABS pump 40 Relay coils 5

352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Auxiliary lights* 20 4-cyl. engines: mass 10 Oil pump/crankcase 10 air meter, thermostat, ventilation heater/cool- Horn 15 EVAP valve ant pump (5-cyl. 10 engines) Relay coils, Engine 10 5-/6-cyl. engines: 15 Control Module (ECM) Injection system, mass Ignition coils (4-cyl. 15 air meter (6-cyl. engines) Control module - auto- 15 engines only), engine matic transmission control module Fuel leakage detection 5 (5-/6-cyl. engines), A/C compressor (not 15 A/C compressor (5-/6- 10 control module for 4-cyl. engines) cyl. engines), engine radiator shutter (5-cyl. valves, engine control engines) Relay-coils A/C, relay 5 module (6-cyl. coils in engine com- engines), solenoids (6- Fuel leakage detection, 7.5 partment cold zone for cyl. non-turbo only), A/C solenoid (4-cyl. Start/Stop mass air meter (6-cyl. engines) Starter motor relayA 30 only), oil level sensor Coolant pump (4-cyl. 50 (5-cyl. only) engines) Engine control module 20 (4-cyl. engines) Engine valves/oil 15 Cooling fan 60 (4/5- pump/center heated cyl. Ignition coils (5-/6-cyl. oxygen sensor (4-cyl. engines) engines), condenser engines) (6-cyl. engines) 80 (6-cyl. Front/rear heated oxy- 15 engines) Engine Control Module 20 gen sensors (4-cyl. (4-cyl. engines) engines), EVAP valve Power steering 100 (5-/6-cyl. engines), Engine Control Module 10 heated oxygen sensors A This position is not used on vehicles with the optional (5-cyl. & 6-cyl. engines) Start/Stop function, refer to the table "Engine compart- (5-/6-cyl. engines) ment cold zone" in Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only) (p. 359).

}}

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 353 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Related information • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355) • Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358)

354 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – glove compartment The fuses under the glove compartment protect components such as the infotainment system and optional power seat. 10

Fusebox A: General fuses Positions: fusebox A Pos Function A Fusebox B: Control module fuses Pos Function A - Fold aside the upholstery covering the fuse- Circuit breaker for the infotain- 40 boxes. ment system and for fuses 12-volt socket (cargo area) 15 1. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 16-20 Controls in driver's door 20 2. The fuses are accessible. Windshield/tailgate washers 25 Controls in front passenger's 20 - door

- Controls in right rear passeng- 20 er's door -

}} 355 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A

Controls in left rear passeng- 20 - Courtesy lighting, rain sen- 7.5 er's door sor*, HomeLInk® Wireless 10 Heated front passenger's 15 Control System* Keyless drive* 20 seat* Steering wheel module 7.5 Power driver's seat* 20 Heated driver's seat* 15 Cental locking: fuel filler door 10 Power front passenger's seat* 20 Park assist* 5 Blind Spot Information System Electrically heated steering 15 - (BLIS)*, park assist camera* wheel*

Infotainment system display 5 All Wheel Drive* control mod- 15 Electrically heated windshield* 15 ule Infotainment system: amplifier, 10 Tailgate unlock 10 SiriusXM™ satellite radio* Active chassis system* 10 Electrical folding rear seat 10 Sensus control module 15 outboard head restraints* Positions: fusebox B Bluetooth hands-free system 5 Pos Function A Fuel pump 20

- Tailgate wiper 15 Climate system control panel 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 5 - - Courtesy lighting, climate sys- Front courtesy lighting, driv- 7.5 Alarm, On-board diagnostic 5 tem sensor er's door power window con- system trols, power seat(s)*, 12-volt sockets in tunnel con- 15 Satellite radio *, audio system 10 sole Instrument panel 5 amplifier Heated rear seat* (passenger's 15 Airbag system, occupant 10 side) Adaptive cruise control/colli- 10 sion warning* weight sensor Heated rear seat* (driver's 15 Collision warning system* 5 side)

356 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Pos Function A

Accelerator pedal sensor, 7.5 auto-dim mirror function, heated rear seats* 10

Brake lights 5

Laminated panoramic roof* 20

Immobilizer 5

Related information • Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351) • Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358) • Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only) (p. 359)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 357 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – cargo area/trunk The fuses in the cargo area/trunk protect components such as trailer connections, the parking brake, etc. 10

Located behind the upholstery on the left side of the cargo area

Positions Pos Function A Pos Function A Pos Function A Power tailgate* 20 Trailer socket 1* 40 Electric parking brake (left 30 side) - -

Electric parking brake (right 30 - Related information side) Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351) - • Heated rear window 30 • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355) - • Fuses – engine compartment cold zone Trailer socket 2* 15 (Start/Stop only) (p. 359) -

358 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 10 Maintenance and servicing

Fuses – engine compartment cold zone (Start/Stop only)7 There are fuses in the engine compartment cold zone on models with the Start/Stop function. 10

Location of Start/Stop fuses

Positions Pos Function A Pos Function A • Fuses A1, A2 and 1–11 are relays/circuit breakers and should only be removed or Circuit breaker: central elec- 175 - replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo trical module in the engine service technician. compartment Circuit breaker: fusebox B 50 • Fuse 12 may be changed at any time under the glove compartment when necessary. Circuit breaker: fuseboxes 175 (see Fuses – glove compart- under the glove compartment (p. 355)) ment, central electrical module in the cargo area

7 Option on 4-cyl. engines }} 359 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Pos Function A Related information • Fuses – engine compartment (p. 351) Circuit breaker: fusebox A 60 • Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355) under the glove compartment Fuses – cargo area/trunk (p. 358) 10 (see Fuses – glove compart- • ment (p. 355)) • Start/Stop – introduction (p. 257)

Circuit breaker: fusebox A 60 under the glove compartment (see Fuses – glove compartment (p. 355))

Circuit breaker: central elec- 60 trical module in the cargo area

Climate system blower 40

– –

Starter motor relay 30

Internal diode 50

Auxiliary battery 70

Central electrical module: 15 auxiliary battery reference voltage, auxiliary battery charging point

360 10 Maintenance and servicing

Washing the car • Wash off the dirt from the underside Exterior components The vehicle should be washed at regular inter- (wheel housings, fenders, etc). Volvo recommends the use of special clean- vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • In areas of high industrial fallout, more ing products, available at your Volvo retailer, adhere to the paint and may cause damage. frequent washing is recommended. for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or orna- To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly mental components such as chromed strips 10 important to wash the car frequently in the NOTE on the exterior of your vehicle. The instruc- wintertime. tions for using these products should be fol- When washing the car, remember to lowed carefully. Solvents or stain removers remove dirt from the drain holes in the The following points should be kept in mind should not be used. when washing and cleaning the car: doors and sills. • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. CAUTION Doing so may cause detergents and wax CAUTION • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid • During high pressure washing, the rubber components scratching, use lukewarm water to soften spray mouthpiece must never be the dirt before you wash with a soft • Polishing chromed strips can wear closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). away or damage the surface sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. Do not spray into the locks. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork • Polishes containing abrasive sub- • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can stances should not be used as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish reduce lighting capacity considerably. may be permanently damaged. Clean the headlights regularly, for • A detergent can be used to facilitate the example when refueling. Related information softening of dirt and oil. Special laminated panoramic roof cau- • Polishing and waxing (p. 362) • Dry the car with a clean chamois and tions: • Cleaning the interior (p. 363) remember to clean the drain holes in the • Always close the laminated panoramic doors and rocker panels. roof and sun shade before washing • Tar spots can be removed with tar your vehicle. remover after the car has been washed. • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy the laminated panoramic roof. water can be used to clean the wiper • Never use wax on the rubber seals blades. Frequent cleaning of the wind- around the laminated panoramic roof. shield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades.

361 10 Maintenance and servicing

Automatic car wash CAUTION Polishing and waxing The vehicle should be washed at regular inter- Normally, polishing is not required during the Before driving into an automatic car vals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots • first year after delivery, however, waxing may wash, turn off the optional rain sensor adhere to the paint and may cause damage. be beneficial. to avoid damaging the windshield wip- 10 To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly ers. important to wash the car frequently in the • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle wintertime. • Make sure that side view mirrors, aux- must be washed and dried. Tar spots can iliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that be removed with kerosene or tar remover. • We do NOT recommend washing your any antenna(s) are retracted or Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing car in an automatic wash during the first removed. Otherwise there is risk of the compound. few months (because the paint will not machine dislodging them. • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. have hardened sufficiently). • Chromed wheels: Clean chrome- • Several commercially available products • An automatic wash is a simple and quick plated wheels using the same deter- contain both polish and wax. way to clean your car, but it is worth gents used for the body of the vehicle. Waxing alone does not substitute for pol- remembering that it may not be as thor- Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can • ishing a dull surface. ough as when you yourself go over the permanently stain chrome-plated car with sponge and water. Keeping the wheels. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes underbody clean is most important, espe- can be purchased today. These waxes cially in the winter. Some automatic are easy to use and produce a long-last- washers do not have facilities for washing WARNING ing, high-gloss finish that protects the the underbody. • When the vehicle is driven immediately bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and after being washed, apply the brakes, fading. NOTE including the parking brake, several • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct times in order to remove any moisture sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should Condensation may form temporarily on the from the brake linings. not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This • Engine cleaning agents should not be is normal and the lights are designed to used when the engine is warm. This withstand moisture. Normally, condensa- constitutes a fire risk. tion will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time. Related information • Polishing and waxing (p. 362) • Cleaning the interior (p. 363) • Washing the car (p. 361)

362 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION Cleaning the interior Volvo also offers a special leather softener Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- that should be applied after the cleaner and Volvo does not recommend the use of ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, long-life or durable paint protection coat- and reduces friction between leather and ings, some of which may claim to prevent and follow the instructions included with the pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coat- car care product. other finishes in the vehicle. 10 ings have not been tested by Volvo for Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and Cleaning the interior compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four Some of them may cause the clear coat to times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by Upholstery care Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Soft- application of paint protection coatings Fabric may not be covered under your vehicle's ener 943 7429. paint warranty. Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, Cleaning leather upholstery shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/ 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge Related information fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. • Washing the car (p. 361) retailer. 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the AlcanteraTM suede-like material sponge with circular movements. Suede-like upholstery can be cleaned with a 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the soft cloth and mild soap solution. sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, Leather care do not rub. Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, towel, and allow the leather to dry com- sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the pletely. protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beau- tify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight.

}} 363 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Protecting leather upholstery Cleaning a leather-covered steering CAUTION 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream wheel Sharp objects, such as rings, could dam- on a cloth and apply a thin coating of Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp • age the leather on the steering wheel. cream to the upholstery with light circular sponge and a neutral soap solution. 10 movements. • Leather should be allowed to breath. Cleaning the seat belts 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. Never cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector. Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild This will help the leather resist staining and soap solution. protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning the steering wheel with Cleaning floor mats Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and CAUTION The floor mats should be vacuumed or Leather Softener 943 7429. brushed clean regularly, especially during • Under no circumstances should gaso- If there are stains on the steering wheel: winter when they should be taken out for dry- line, naphtha or similar cleaning agents ing. Spots on textile mats can be removed be used on the plastic or the leather Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) with a mild detergent. For best protection in since these can cause damage. winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo • Take extra care when removing stains – Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. such as ink or lipstick since the color- wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia. ing can spread. For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood • Use solvents sparingly. Too much sol- of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and surfaces vent can damage the seat padding. wipe the stain. Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially Start from the outside of the stain and Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) • designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo work toward the center. 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. retailer. • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorb- may damage the textile upholstery. ent paper or a towel. • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as Type 3 (dry soil or dust) new jeans or suede garments, may 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. stain the upholstery. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains.

364 10 Maintenance and servicing

CAUTION Touching up paintwork Paint damage requires immediate attention to Do not use cleaning agents with high • avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the fin- alcohol content such as washer fluid ish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. to clean instrument panel glass. Touch-up if necessary. 10 • Never spray cleaning agents or water directly onto components with electri- Paint repairs require special equipment and cal buttons or controls. Clean compo- skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any nents of this type by applying the extensive damage. cleaning agent/water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the components so Minor scratches can be repaired by using that no liquid penetrates into these Volvo touch-up paint. components. Color code Sample color code: Canadian models Make sure you have the right color. See Label Related information information (p. 368) for the location of this Washing the car (p. 361) • label (label number 4 in the illustration). Minor stone chips and scratches Material: • Primer – can • Paint – touch-up pen • Brush • Masking tape If the stone chip has not gone down to the Sample color code: US models bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt.

NOTE When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C).

}} 365 10 Maintenance and servicing

|| Repairing stone chips

10 G021832

1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application. 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. Related information • Label information (p. 368)

366 SPECIFICATIONS 11 Specifications

Label information The labels in your vehicle provide information such as the chassis number, paint code, tire inflation pressure, etc.

368 11 Specifications

Location of labels

}} 369 11 Specifications

|| List of labels Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- Vehicle Emission Control Information. ards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Your Volvo is designed to meet all appli- Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) stand- cable emission standards, as evidenced ards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to by the certification label on the underside meet all applicable safety standards, as of the hood. For further information regar- evidenced by the certification label on the ding these regulations, please consult driver's side B-pillar (the structural mem- your Volvo retailer. ber at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label 11 Engine oil. This label contains the recommended engine oil specifications. also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). regulations, please consult your Volvo The VIN plate is located on the top left retailer. U.S. models have the upper surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle decal; Canadian models have the lower Identification Number (VIN) should always one. be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when Related information ordering parts. • Weights (p. 374) Tire inflation pressures. This label indi- • Engine specifications (p. 376) cates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory.

370 11 Specifications

Dimensions This section lists your vehicle's most important dimensions.

}} 371 11 Specifications

|| Dimensions

Dimension in. (mm)

A Ground clearance (curb weight + 2 people)A 8.7 (220)

B Wheelbase 109.2 (2774)

C Length 182.8 (4644)

D Load length, floor, seatback down 70.4 (1789)

E Load length, floor 38.3 (972)

F Height 67.4 (1713)

G Load height 31.6 (802)

H Track, front 64.3 (1632)

I Track, rear 62.4 (1586)

372 11 Specifications

Dimension in. (mm)

J Load width, floor 42.9 (1090)

K Width 74.4 (1891)

L Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 83.5 (2120)

M Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 74.4 (1891)

A Varies slightly depending on tire size, optional sport chassis, etc. 11

373 11 Specifications

Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle.

Category USA Canada

Gross vehicle weight 4-cyl. FWDA: 5140 lbs 4-cyl. FWD: 2330 kg 5-cyl. AWDB: 5270 lbs 5-cyl. AWD: 2390 kg 11 6-cyl. turbo AWD: 5380 lbs 6-cyl. AWD: 2440 kg

Capacity weight 950 lbs (all models) 430 kg (all models)

Permissible axle weights, front 4-cyl. FWD: 2720 lbs 4-cyl. FWD: 1230 kg 5-cyl. AWD: 2755 lbs 5-cyl. AWD: 1250 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2840 lbs 6-cyl. AWD: 1290 kg

Permissible axle weights, rear 4-cyl. FWD: 2560 lbs 4-cyl. FWD: 1160 kg 5-cyl. AWD: 2640 lbs 5-cyl. AWD: 1200 kg 6-cyl. AWD: 2645 lbs 6-cyl. AWD: 1200 kg

Curb weight 3840 - 4170 lbs 1740 - 1900 kg

Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg

Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 2,000 lbs With brakes, 1 7/8” ball: 900 kg With brakes, 2” ball: 3,500 lbs With brakes, 2” ball: 1600 kg

Max. tongue weight 350 lbs 160 kg

A FWD = Front Wheel Drive B AWD = All Wheel Drive

374 11 Specifications

Related information • Loading specifications (p. 302) • Loading specifications – load limit (p. 302)

375 11 Specifications

Engine specifications Some of the engines listed here may not The following table provides technical data for be available in all markets. the respective engines. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary. Engine specifications Specification/Model 3.0 T6 5-cyl. 2.0 4-cyl. T9 2.0 4-cyl. T11

Engine designation B6304T4 B5254T12 B4204T9 B4204T11 11 Output (kW/rps) 224/93 187/90 225/95 179/93

Output (hp/rpm) 300/5600 250/5400 rpm 302/5700 240/5600

Torque (Nm/rps) 440/35–70 360/30-70 400/35–75 350/25-75

Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 325/2100– 4200 266/1800-4200 295/1500–4500 258/1500–4500

No. of cylinders 6 5 4 4

Bore (in/mm) 3.23/82 3.27/83 3.23/82 3.23/82

Stroke (in/mm) 3.67/93.2 3.63/92.3 3.67/93.2 3.67/93.2

Displacement 2.95 liters (175 cu. in.) 2.497 liters / (152.4 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.) 1.97 liters (120.2 cu. in.)

Compression ratio 9.3:1 9.5:1 10.3:1 10.8:1

Related information • Coolant – specification and volume (p. 379) • Oil specifications (p. 377) • Oil volume (p. 378)

376 11 Specifications

Oil specifications good fuel economy and engine protection. Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum See the viscosity chart. ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection.

Volvo recommends:

Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation SAE 0W-30 oil meeting ACEA A5/B5 requirements is recommended for extreme driving conditions. Refer to the warranty and Service Records information booklet for information on oil CAUTION change intervals and oil type requirements. 4-cylinder engines only: Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended for NOTE extreme driving conditions. This vehicle comes from the factory with This oil must never be used in 5- or 6-cyl- synthetic oil. inder engines.

Oil additives must not be used. Related information Oil volume (p. 378) Oil viscosity • Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330) under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide

377 11 Specifications

Oil volume engines may not be available in all markets. The following table provides technical data for Engine specifications for Special Edition vehi- the respective engines. Some of these cles may vary.

Engine model Approx. volume (incl. filter)

3.2 (6-cyl.) B6324S4/S5 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters)

3.0 T6 (6 cyl.) B6304T4 7.18 US qts (6.8 liters) 11 T12 (5 cyl.) B5254T12 5.8 US qts (5.5 liters)

All 4-cyl. engines 5.7 US qts (5.4 liters)

Related information • Engine compartment – engine oil (p. 330) • Oil specifications (p. 377)

378 11 Specifications

Coolant – specification and volume Transmission oil – specification and Brake fluid – specification and volume The table lists coolant volumes and specifica- volumes Brake fluid transfers braking force when the tions. The table lists transmission oil1 volumes and brake pedal is depressed to the master cylin- specifications. der and to the slave cylinders on each wheel. System Volume Specifica- Specification: tion Auto- Volume Specifi- DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C) matic cation 3.2 (6- 9.4 US qts. Coolant with trans- Volume: 0.63 US qts (0.6 liters) cyl.)/3.0T (8.9 liters) corrosion mission 11 inhibitor 3.0 T6/T5 Related information mixed with TF-80SC 7.4 US qts Transmis- • Engine compartment – brake fluid (p. 333) All 4-cyl. 8.8 US qts. water (50/50 (7 liters) sion fluid engines (8.3 liters) mix), see AW1 packaging. TG-81SC 7 US qts ( 6.6 liters) Related information TF-71SC 7.1 US qts Engine compartment – coolant (p. 332) • (6.8 liters)

Related information • Label information (p. 368)

1 Under normal driving conditions the transmission oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions.

379 11 Specifications

Power steering – specification Fuel tank volume – specification and Air conditioning – specification and This fluid is used to help reduce and regulate volume volume steering force. The table lists the fuel tank volume for your The air conditioning system in your vehicle vehicle. contains the following: Specification:Power steering fluid recommended by Volvo. Volume Specification Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a) Volume: 1.7 lbs (770 g) Related information 18.5 US gallons (70 lit- – • Engine compartment – power steering ers) Compressor oil: PAG 11 fluid (p. 334) Related information • Refueling – opening/closing fuel filler door (p. 278) • Refueling – opening/closing fuel cap (p. 279) • Refueling – octane rating (p. 277) • Engine specifications (p. 376)

380 11 Specifications

Battery specifications If the battery is replaced, replace it with a bat- 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- tery of the same cold start capacity as the nator. Single pole system in which the chas- original (see the decal on the battery). sis and engine block are used as conductors. The negative terminal is connected to the General information chassis.

WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! 11 Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead com- pounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

Motor Voltage (V) Cold start capacity CCA (Cold Cranking Amperes) (A)

Engines with Start/Stop* 12 800A

All other engines 12 520–800

A AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries have to be used on models with Start/Stop

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381 11 Specifications

Symbols – general information driver with necessary information about one Warning symbols The following tables list the most common of the vehicle's systems. The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and Related information warning and indicator lights and symbols and a reference to where more detailed informa- a reference to where more detailed informa- Information displays – indicator symbols tion can be found. • tion can be found. (p. 72) Introduction • Information displays – warning symbols : The red warning symbol illuminates to The symbols in the vehicle's various displays (p. 74) indicate a problem related to safety and/or are divided into three main categories: • Information display – messages (p. 114) drivability. A message will also appear in the 11 main instruments panel's display. • Warning symbols • Indicator symbols : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the • Information symbols driver with necessary information about one The following tables list the most common of the vehicle's systems. symbols, their meaning and the pages in this manual that provide more detailed information.

NOTE Not all of the symbols shown in the related articles are available in all models or on all markets. Local variations may occur.

Warning symbol : The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or drivability. A message will also appear in the main instruments panel's display. Information symbol : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the

382 11 Specifications

Symbols in the main instrument panel Indicator symbols Symbol Description See Warning symbols in the instrument The following tables list the most common panel warning and indicator lights and symbols and Stability system, Hill (p. 72) a reference to where more detailed informa- Descent Control, Symbol Description See tion can be found. Trailer Stability Assist* Low oil pressure (p. 74) : The red warning symbol illuminates to indicate a problem related to safety and/or Tire pressure moni- (p. 72) Parking brakeA (p. 74) drivability. A message will also appear in the toring sensor (TPMS) main instruments panel's display. 11 Low fuel level (p. 72) SRS airbags (p. 74) : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the Information symbol, (p. 72) Seat belt reminder (p. 74) driver with necessary information about one see text in informa- of the vehicle's systems. tion display Generator not charg- (p. 74) ing Indicator symbols in the instrument High beam indicator (p. 72) panel Fault in the brake sys- (p. 74) Symbol Description See Left turn signal indi- (p. 72) tem cator Fault in the Active (p. 72) Warning symbol (p. 74) Bending Light Right turn signal indi- (p. 72) (ABL)*system cator A The symbol is Park only on models with the optional digital instrument panel. Malfunction indicator (p. 72) Stability system , (p. 175) Related information light Sport mode Information displays – indicator symbols • Anti-lock brake sys- (p. 72) (p. 72) Related information tem (ABS) • Information displays – warning symbols • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 74) Rear fog lights on (p. 72) (p. 72) • Information display – messages (p. 114) • Information displays – warning symbols (p. 74) • Information display – messages (p. 114)

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 383 11 Specifications

Information symbols Symbol Description See Symbol Description See The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and Camera sensor, (p. 215) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 227) a reference to where more detailed informa- laser sensor (p. 208) tem* (Lane tion can be found. Departure Warning) : The red warning symbol illuminates to Collision Warning (p. 220) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 227) indicate a problem related to safety and/or with Full Auto- tem* (Lane drivability. A message will also appear in the brake and Pedes- Departure Warning) 11 main instruments panel's display. trian Detection* Driver Alert Sys- (p. 227) : The information symbol illuminates and Active Bending (p. 92) tem* (Lane a text message is displayed to provide the Lights (ABL)* Departure Warning) driver with necessary information about one of the vehicle's systems. Fuel tank on pas- (p. 278) Driver Alert Sys- (p. 222) senger's side of the Information symbols in the instrument tem* vehicle panel Symbol Description See Related information Driver Alert Sys- (p. 222) • Information displays – indicator symbols Adaptive Cruise (p. 184) tem* (p. 72) Control * • Information displays – warning symbols Adaptive Cruise (p. 184) Parking brake (p. 269) (p. 74) Control * • Information display – messages (p. 114) Rain sensor* (p. 98) Adaptive Cruise (p. 184) Control * Active High Beams (p. 90) Adaptive Cruise (p. 184) (AHB)* Control * (Distance alert) Windshield sensor* (p. 90)

Radar sensor* (p. 193)

384 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 11 Specifications

Information symbols – ceiling console Information symbols – center console Symbol Description See The following tables list the most common The following tables list the most common warning and indicator lights and symbols and warning and indicator lights and symbols and BluetoothTM Sensus Info- a reference to where more detailed informa- a reference to where more detailed informa- hands-free tainment sup- tion can be found. tion can be found. plement : The red warning symbol illuminates to : The red warning symbol illuminates to HD radio Sensus Info- indicate a problem related to safety and/or indicate a problem related to safety and/or tainment sup- drivability. A message will also appear in the drivability. A message will also appear in the plement main instruments panel's display. main instruments panel's display. 11 Park Assist* (p. 232) : The information symbol illuminates and : The information symbol illuminates and a text message is displayed to provide the a text message is displayed to provide the driver with necessary information about one driver with necessary information about one Related information of the vehicle's systems. of the vehicle's systems. • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 72) Symbol Description See Symbol Description See • Information displays – warning symbols (p. 74) Seat belt reminder (p. 30) Audio files Sensus Info- • Information display – messages (p. 114) tainment sup- Occupant Weight Sen- (p. 36) plement sor CD folder Sensus Info- tainment sup- Related information plement • Information displays – indicator symbols (p. 72) Video files Sensus Info- • Information displays – warning symbols tainment sup- (p. 74) plement • Information display – messages (p. 114) Bluetooth- Sensus Info- connected cell tainment sup- phone plement

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385 12 Index

A Approach lighting...... 97, 153 Brake system Auto-dim rearview mirror...... 104 ABS...... 268 ABS (anti-lock brake system)...... 268 Brake pad inspection...... 266 Automatic locking retractor...... 47 Accessory installation warning...... 23 checking fluid level...... 333 Automatic transmission emergency brake assistance...... 269 Active chassis system...... 174 Eco (driving function)...... 262 fluid...... 379 Active high beams...... 90 Geartronic...... 254 general information...... 266 Active yaw control...... 174, 175 general description...... 252, 254 Hill Descent Control...... 264, 265 oil...... 379 Adaptive brake lights...... 268 Bulbs shiftlock override...... 256 Adaptive cruise control...... 184, 185 cargo area lighting...... 341 Axle weight...... 302 headlights...... 335, 336, 337, 338, 339 Airbags 12 introduction...... 335 disconnecting the front passenger’s license plate lights...... 341 side...... 36 B specifications...... 342 front...... 32 taillight...... 340 inflatable curtain...... 41 Battery side impact...... 39 maintenance...... 347, 348 Air conditioning...... 131, 132 remote key, replacing...... 158 C Air distribution...... 127, 133 replacing...... 348 specifications...... 381 Air distribution table...... 135 Camera, Park Assist...... 236 start/stop...... 381 Capacity weight...... 302 Air vents...... 127 warning symbols...... 346 Cargo area Alarm...... 169, 170, 171 Blind Spot Information System (BLIS)..... 240 changing bulbs...... 341 All Wheel Drive...... 264 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)...... 243 steel grid...... 147 Ambient temperature sensor...... 77 Booster cushion, integrated...... 57, 59, 60 Cargo area cover...... 147 Anti-freeze...... 275, 332 Booster cushions...... 54 Cargo area net...... 144 Anti-lock brake system Brake lights...... 268 Cargo net...... 144 warning light...... 73 Catalytic converter...... 280 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)...... 268

386 12 Index

Central locking system, introduction 150, Collision warning system.. 209, 211, 214, Disconnecting the front passenger’s air- 151, 154, 157 215, 217, 218 bag...... 36 Chains...... 305 Compass in rearview mirror...... 105 Distance Alert...... 198 Check Engine warning light...... 73 Connected service booking...... 326 Dome lighting...... 96 Child restraints Conserving electrical current...... 274 Door mirrors...... 102, 103 recalls and registration...... 47 Convertible seats...... 51 Driver alert...... 222, 223, 224, 225 Child restraint systems...... 47 Coolant...... 332, 379 Lane Departure Warning..... 227, 229, 230 booster cushions...... 54 Cooling system, general information...... 274 Driver distraction warning...... 23 convertible seats...... 51 Driving economically...... 280 infant seats...... 49 Corner traction control...... 175 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 55 Driving in cold weather...... 275 Courtesy lighting...... 96 12 top tether anchors...... 56 Crash event data...... 18 Driving through water...... 273 Child safety...... 46 Crash mode...... 44, 45 booster cushions...... 54 Cruise control...... 181, 183 child restraint systems...... 47 E adaptive...... 184 convertible seats...... 51 infant seats...... 49 Curb weight...... 302 ECC...... 130, 131 Child safety locks...... 61 Current, conserving...... 274 Eco (driving function)...... 262 City safety...... 202, 203 Cyclist detection...... 213, 217 Eco coast...... 262 Climate system...... 132 Eco guide...... 71 air distribution...... 127, 133, 135 Economical driving...... 280 air vents...... 127 D Electrically heated steering wheel...... 88 Interior Air Quality System...... 126 introduction...... 125 Daytime running lights...... 89 Electrical sockets...... 140 passenger compartment filter...... 126 Defroster...... 132 Electric parking brake...... 269, 270, 271, 272 refrigerant...... 125 Detachable key blade...... 155, 156 Electronic Climate Control...... 129, 131 Clock, setting...... 78 Dimensions...... 372 air distribution table...... 135 Cold weather driving...... 275 Interior Air Quality System...... 126

387 12 Index

Electronic oil level sensor...... 331 Floor mats Gauges...... 68 Electronic stability control...... 174 cleaning...... 364 Geartronic...... 254 placing correctly...... 247 Emergency locking retractor...... 47 Geartronic automatic transmission...... 254 Fluid specifications...... 379, 380 Emergency starting...... 251 Generator warning light...... 75 Fog lights...... 73 Emergency towing...... 285, 286 Glossary of tire terminology...... 303 rear...... 94, 340 Emission inspection readiness...... 326 Grocery bag holder...... 144 Four C (active chassis system)...... 174 Engine Gross vehicle weight...... 302 Front airbags...... 32 overheating...... 75 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 36 specifications...... 376 Start/Stop...... 257, 258, 259, 260, 261 Front park assist...... 232, 236 H 12 starting...... 247 Front seats...... 80 switching off...... 249, 250 heated...... 130 Hazard warning flashers...... 94 Engine compartment overview...... 329 Fuel filler cap...... 279 Headlights Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 175 Fuel filler door, opening...... 278, 279 Active Bending Lights...... 92 active high beams...... 90 Engine oil...... 377 Fuel level warning light...... 73 changing bulbs...... 336, 337, 338, 339 checking...... 330 Fuel requirements...... 276, 277 daytime running lights...... 89 low pressure warning light...... 74 Fuel tank volume...... 380 high/low beams...... 90 volumes...... 378 Fuses...... 349, 351, 358 high beam flash...... 90 Engine remote start (ERS)...... 249 tunnel detection...... 92 Environment...... 22 Headlight washers...... 99 G Head restraints, rear seat...... 84, 85 Heated front seats...... 130 F Garage door opener HomeLink® Wireless Control Heated oxygen sensors...... 280 Federal Clean Air Act...... 323 System...... 109, 110 Heated rear seats...... 130 Flat tires Gasoline requirements...... 277 Heated steering wheel...... 88 repairing with tire sealing system...... 314 Gas tank volume...... 380 Heated windshield...... 104, 132

388 12 Index

High beams...... 90 Inspection readiness...... 326 K active...... 90 Instrument lighting...... 93 Hill Descent Control...... 264, 265 "theater" lighting...... 93 Key blade. 150, 151, 154, 155, 156, 157, 160 private locking...... 156 Hill Start Assist (HSA)...... 252 Instrument overview...... 64, 68 Keyless drive...... 159 Hoisting the vehicle...... 325 Instrument panel...... 68, 113, 114 general description...... 160, 161, 162 HomeLink® Wireless Control Integrated two-stage booster starting the vehicle...... 247 System...... 109, 110 cushion...... 57, 59, 60 Keyless locking/unlocking...... 159 Home safe lighting...... 97 Interior Air Quality System...... 126 Hood, opening/closing...... 328 Interior lighting...... 96 Horn...... 88 Internet connection L 12 booking service...... 326 Labels ISOFIX/LATCH anchors...... 55 I list of...... 370 location of...... 369 ID, Volvo...... 21 J Laminated panoramic roof...... 106, 107 Ignition modes...... 78, 79 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 227, 229, 230 Immobilizer...... 152 Jack attaching...... 293 LATCH anchors...... 55 Important information...... 13, 14 location of...... 292 Leather care...... 363 Indicator lights...... 68, 70, 74 Jump starting...... 251 Lighting panel...... 89 Infant seats...... 49 Loading the vehicle...... 142, 143, 302 Inflatable Curtain...... 41 roof loads...... 142 Inflation pressure...... 297, 298 Locking...... 163, 164, 165 Inflation pressure table...... 301 tailgate...... 166 Information and warning symbols, table Locking the vehicle...... 153 of...... 382 Locks, child safety...... 61 Information lights...... 68, 70, 74

389 12 Index

Low beams...... 90 O Parking brake Low oil pressure warning light...... 74 electric, applying/releasing. 269, 270, Occupant safety...... 26 271, 272 Occupant weight sensor...... 36 warning light...... 74 M Octane recommendations...... 277 Parking lights...... 93 Odometer, trip...... 78 Pedestrian detection...... 214, 217 Main instrument panel...... 113, 114 Oil Polishing...... 362 Maintenance...... 323 checking...... 330 Power front seat hoisting the vehicle...... 325 volumes...... 378 memory function...... 81 performed by the owner...... 324 Oil level sensor...... 331 Power meter...... 71 Malfunction indicator light...... 73 12 Oil quality...... 377 Power mirrors...... 102, 103 Messages in the instrument panel... 113, 114 OK button...... 113, 114 defroster...... 104 Mirrors Power steering defroster...... 104 On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 adjustable...... 179 power door...... 102, 103 Outside temperature sensor...... 77 fluid...... 334 rearview, auto-dim function...... 104 Overhead courtesy lighting...... 96 retractable...... 102, 103 Power steering fluid...... 380 Overheating, engine...... 75 vanity...... 141 Power tailgate...... 167, 168, 169 Ownership, changing...... 18 Motor oil Power windows...... 100 checking...... 330 Oxygen sensors, heated...... 280 laminated glass...... 101 volumes...... 378 Pregnancy, using seat belts during...... 30 P Private locking...... 156 N PROPOSITION 65 WARNING.. 251, 349, 381 Paint, touching up...... 365 Net in cargo area...... 144 Park assist...... 232, 236 Park Assist Camera...... 236

390 12 Index

R key blade.... 150, 151, 154, 155, 156, 157 securing child restraint systems.... 49, locking the vehicle...... 153 51, 54 Rain sensor...... 98 replacing the battery...... 158 unbuckling...... 29 Rear fog lights...... 94, 340 unlocking the vehicle...... 153 use during pregnancy...... 30 using...... 28 Rear park assist...... 232, 236 Reporting safety defects...... 27 Seats, front...... 80, 81 Rear seat head restraints...... 85 Roadside Assistance...... 24 Sensus...... 112 Rear seats Road sign information (RSI)...... 179 center head restraint...... 84 Rollover Protection System (ROPS)...... 44 Service connected service booking...... 326 folding...... 84, 86 Roll Stability Control (RSC)...... 44 heated...... 130 Shiftlock...... 14 Roof loads...... 142 override...... 256 Rearview mirror 12 auto-dim function...... 104 Side door mirrors...... 102, 103 compass...... 105 S Side impact airbags...... 39 Rear window defroster...... 104 Sign information (RSI)...... 179 Safety, occupant...... 26 Recalls...... 26 Snow chains...... 305 Safety defects, reporting...... 27 Recalls, child restraints...... 47 Snow tires...... 305, 306 Safety mode...... 44 Refrigerant...... 380 Spare tire...... 295 Seat belt Refueling...... 276, 277 Spin control...... 174, 175 fuel filler cap...... 279 reminder...... 30 SRS...... 31 fuel filler door...... 278, 279 Seat belts fuel tank volume...... 380 Automatic locking retractor/Emer- Stability system...... 174, 175, 177 Corner Traction Control (CTC)...... 175 Registering child restraints...... 47 gency locking retractor...... 47 buckling...... 29 Engine Drag Control (EDC)...... 175 Remote control maintenance...... 29 indicator light...... 73 private locking...... 156 pretensioners...... 28 Start/Stop (engine function)..... 257, 258, Remote key...... 150, 151, 154, 157 reminder...... 30 259, 260, 261 approach lighting...... 153 reminder warning light...... 74 immobilizer...... 152

391 12 Index

Starting the engine...... 247 T spare...... 295 remote start...... 249 specifications...... 299 with keyless drive...... 247 Tailgate speed ratings...... 299 Starting the vehicle locking/unlocking...... 166 storing...... 290 after a crash (crash mode)...... 44, 45 opening manually...... 166 studded...... 305, 306 power operated...... 167, 168, 169 tire pressure monitoring system...... 307 Start inhibitor (immobilizer)...... 152 wiper/washer...... 100 tire sealing system...... 314 Steel grid in cargo area...... 147 Tailgate wipers...... 345 tread wear indicator...... 291 Steering wheel uniform tire quality grading...... 304 Taillights, changing bulbs...... 340 adjusting...... 87 Tire sealing system...... 314 heated...... 88 Temperature sensor Top tether anchors (child restraint sys- horn...... 88 ambient...... 77 12 tems)...... 56 keypad...... 88 Temporary spare tire...... 295 Touching up paint...... 365 Steering wheel paddles...... 88 Three-way catalytic converter...... 280 Towing a trailer...... 282, 283, 284 Stone chips, touching up...... 365 Tire designations...... 299 trailer hitch...... 283 Storage spaces...... 138 Tire inflation pressure...... 301 Towing the vehicle...... 285, 286 Studded tires...... 305, 306 Tire Monitor...... 311, 312, 313 Traction control...... 174, 175 Sunroof Tire Pressure Monitoring System.... 307, 310 Trailer towing...... 282, 283, 284 laminated panoramic roof...... 106, 107 indicator light...... 73 trailer hitch...... 283 Sun shade...... 100 Tires...... 289 Transmission age...... 290 Supplemental restraint system...... 31 general description...... 252, 254 changing from summer to winter...... 292 warning light...... 74 Hill Start Assist...... 252 glossary of terms...... 303 Symbols, overview...... 382 oil...... 379 improving economy...... 291 shiftlock override...... 256 inflation pressure...... 297, 298 inflation pressure table...... 301 Tread wear indicator...... 291 rotation...... 289 Trip computer...... 115 Self-supporting run flat tires (SST)..... 314 Trip odometers...... 78 snow...... 305, 306

392 12 Index

Trips, long distance...... 274 Volvo and the environment...... 22 Windows Tunnel detection...... 92 Volvo ID...... 21 power...... 100 sun shade...... 100 Turn signals...... 95 Volvo maintenance...... 323 Windshield changing bulbs...... 339 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance...... 24 indicator lights...... 73 heated...... 104, 132 Volvo programs...... 24 rain sensor...... 98 Two-stage booster cushion...... 57, 59, 60 Volvo Sensus...... 112 washers...... 99 wipers/washers...... 98 U Windshield washer fluid...... 345 W Windshield wipers...... 343 Uniform Tire Quality Grading...... 304 service position...... 343 Warning flashers, hazard...... 94 12 Unlocking the tailgate...... 166 Wiper blades Warning lights...... 68, 70, 74 Unlocking the vehicle...... 153, 163, 164, 165 replacing...... 343 Warning symbol...... 75 replacing tailgate wiper...... 345 Warning system, collision...... 209, 211, 217 V Warranties...... 323 Washer fluid...... 345 Vanity mirror...... 141 Washers changing bulbs...... 342 headlight...... 99 Vehicle dimensions...... 372 windshield...... 98 Vehicle Event Data...... 18 Water, driving through...... 273 Vehicle information...... 20 Waxing...... 362 Vehicle loading...... 142, 143, 302 Weights...... 374 roof loads...... 142 Wheels...... 289 Vehicle maintenance...... 323 changing...... 292, 293 performed by the owner...... 324 storing...... 290 Vehicle weights...... 374 Whiplash Protection System...... 42

393 12 Index

394